Yokogawa DX2000 Manual PDF

Users
Manual
Model DX2004/DX2008/DX2010/DX2020/

DX2030/DX2040/DX2048
Daqstation DX2000
IM 04L42B01-01E
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
5th Edition
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing the Daqstation DX2000 (hereafter referred to as DX).
This Users Manual explains how to use the useful functions of the DX. To ensure correct
use, please read this manual thoroughly before operation.
The following manuals are provided for the DX:
Paper Manual
Manual Title
DX2000 Operation Guide
Manual No.
IM 04L42B01-02E
Control of Pollution Caused IM 04L41B01-91C

by the Product
Description
Explains the basic operations of the DX. It is
also provided in the CD-ROM.
Gives a description of pollution control.
Electronic Manuals Provided on the Accompanying CD-ROM

Manual Title
DX2000 Operation Guide
Manual No.
IM 04L42B01-02E
DX2000 Users Manual
IM 04L42B01-01E
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000
Multi Batch (/BT2)
Users Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000
Custom Display
Users Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000
Communication Interface
Users Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000
EtherNet/IP
Users Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000
PROFIBUS-DP (/CP1)
Users Manual
DAQSTANDARD
Users Manual
IM 04L41B01-03E
Description
This is the electronic version of the paper
manual.
Describes how to use the application
functions. Communication and network
functions are not covered.
Describes how to use the multi batch
function (/BT2 option).
IM 04L41B01-04E
Describes how to use the custom display

function.
IM 04L41B01-17E
Describes how to use communication

functions through an Ethernet or serial
interface.
functions through an EtherNet/IP interface.
IM 04L41B01-18E
IM 04L41B01-19E

functions through the PROFIBUS-DP
interface (/CP1 option).
IM 04L41B01-61E
Describes how to use the accompanying

software program, DAQSTANDARD.
Notes
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of
continuing improvements to the instruments performance and functions.
Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy
of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please
contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without
YOKOGAWAs permission is strictly prohibited.
The TCP/IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP/IP software
have been developed/created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software,
Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California.
5th Edition: November 2008 (YK)

All Right Reserved, Copyright 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM 04L42B01-01E
Trademarks
vigilantplant, DAQSTATION, Daqstation, and DXAdvanced are registered trademarks
of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective holders.
The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the
registered trademark or trademark symbols ( and ).
Revisions
First edition:
December 2005
Second edition: October 2006
Third edition: April 2007
Fourth edition: December 2007
Fifth edition:
November 2008
ii
IM 04L42B01-01E
DXs Version and Functions Described in This Manual

The contents of this manual corresponds to the DX with release number 3 and style
number 3.
DXs Version and Functions

For the procedure to check the version, see section 2.5.
Edition
DX
2
Version
1.11
Version
1.21
IM 04L42B01-01E
Release
number
2
(Version
2.0x)
Style
number
2
Same as
edition 3
Refer to
Addition and change to functions
(Added) German, French, and Chinese as display language
Section 2.6
(Added) Modbus client connection retry interval: 10 s, 20 s, and 30 s Communication manual
(Added) 24 VDC/AC power supply (/P1 option)
Operation Guide
(Added) Tab key on the USB keyboard corresponds to arrow keys. Section 2.11
(Added) Operations to request and release network information
Section 2.11
(Changed) Modbus client: Function to connect a server with a unit
Communication manual
number is changed.
(Added) Modbus client: Connection timeout value
(Added) Modbus registers (floating point type for communication
input data)
(Added) A data output format (Skip or OFF channel data not output) Communication manual
(Changed) Error messages 105, 221, and 222 are added.
Section 11.1
Error messages 215, 218, 536 and 536 are changed.
(Added) Improvement to the operability on the historical trend
Section 4.3
display.
(Changed) Displaying the date in the grid time of the trend display
Sections 1.3 and 2.4
when the trend interval is greater than or equal to 1 h/div.
(Added) Improvement to the display group setup operation.
Section 5.1
(Added) Addition of the Upper and Lower settings to the bar graph Section 5.11
base position.
(Added) Addition of the relay action when alarm ACK is executed to Sections 1.2, 3.5, and 3.8
the alarm output relay settings.
(Added) Ability to reset the computed value during computation.
Section 9.4
(Changed) Changes to how the data files are named.
Section 1.4
(Added) Sorting the files by the update date/time.
Sections 6.7, 6.8, and 6.9
(Added) Storage method for constantly retaining the most recent
data files in the CF card (Media FIFO).
(Added) Progress display when saving all data of the internal
Sections 4.8
memory.
(Changed) Changing the initial display selection menu.
(Changed) Improvement to the data save operation to the USB flash Sections 2.12 and 5.17
memory.
(Changed) Retaining the state of the CapsLock and NumLock keys
Section 2.11
on the USB keyboard
(Changed) Changing the default setting of the web server function.
Operation Guide
(Added) Error messages, 513, 514, 515, and 516 have been added. Section 11.1
(Added) The waterproof construction of the DX front panel
Section 13.6
complies with the NEMA4 standard
Added explanations. Fixed explanations.
Changed the direction of the clamp input terminal (/H2 option)
Operation Guide
iii
DXs Version and Functions Described in This Manual

Edition
5
DX
Release
number 3
(Version
3.0x)
Style
number 3
iv
Addition and change to functions

Divided the setting mode displays with tabs
Added method for switching from setting mode to basic setting
mode
Improved numeric input operation
Added the ability to input the following characters: [ ] and :
Added new input type (GOST; /N3 option)
Increased measurement range for TC Type N
Custom display
Multi Batch (/BT2 option)
Alarm level display
Alarm annunciator
Common alarm (/F1 option)
32-character tag comments and 16-character tag numbers
Faster display update interval
Secondary trend interval changeable during recording
Added 15-, 20-, and 30-minute event data sample rates.
Fine grid
Auto zone display
Indication that the DX is waiting for a trigger.
Decimal point types Point and Comma
Added favorite key operations
Data searching with date and time
Historical trend relative time display, auto span display, and top
channel display.
Number of batch text fields changed to 24
The start recording screen appears when you press the start key
while using the batch function
Changed contents of the system and network information displays
Limits on setting load function
Event switch
Added CommentDisplay and FavoriteDisplay actions to the
event action function
Remote control contact input changed from operating on Close to
operating on Open (/R1 and /PM1 options)
Match time timer reset (/M1 and /PM1 Options)
Added Year to match time timer conditions (/M1 and /PM1
options)
Match time timer usable for TLOG computation (/M1 and /PM1
options)
Stacked bar graphs for report data (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Added recording condition variables to equations (/M1 and /PM1
options)
Added USB barcode reader support (/USB1 option)
Saving of data from the internal memory to USB flash memory or
a CF card (/USB1 option)
Added data searching, report layout display, a print button, and
an FTP link to the Web server function.
Modbus register map expansion and floating-point data writing
Only send alarm e-mails when an alarm has occurred
Added tag and channel number to alarm e-mails
E-mail transfer authentication (Pop Before SMTP)
C displayed in e-mails and the Web settings
Added the ability to input the square and cube characters ( and )
in communications (only for English, German, and French)
Added FTP data transfer wait operation
FTP server directory output format can be set to MS-DOS and
UNIX.
EtherNet/IP
PROFIBUS-DP (/CP1 option)
Changed the boot ROM
Refer to
All setting displays
Section 2.14
Numeric input display
Character string input display
Section 3.3
Section 13.5
IM04L41B01-04E.
IM04L41B01-03E
Section 3.7
Section 3.12
Section 2.9
Section 5.2
Section 3.1
Section 5.3
Section 6.1
Section 1.3
Section 2.13
Section 5.15
Section 4.3
Section 4.3
Section 6.3
Section 6.3
Section 2.5
Section 8.1
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
Section 9.1
Section 4.10
Section 1.8
Section 2.11
Section 2.12
Section 1.5 in the Communication Manual
Appendix 3 in the Communication Manual
IM04L41B01-18E
IM04L41B01-19E
IM 04L42B01-01E
How to Use This Manual

Structure of the Manual
Read the Operation Guide first to familiarize yourself with the basic operation,
and then read this manual. For a description of the communication function and the
accompanying software program, DAQSTANDARD, read the respective manual.
This users manual consists of the following sections.
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
Appendix
Title and Contents

Overview of Functions
Describes the functions of the DX.
Common Operations
Describes the procedure to set the time and the operating procedure using the
remote control terminal (/KB1 or /KB2 option) and keyboard (/USB1 option).
Measurement Channels and Alarms
Describes how to set the measurement conditions and alarms.
Switching Operation Screens
Describes the operations on the operation screen.
Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents
Describes how to change the displayed contents on the operation screen and how
to write messages.
Saving and Loading Data
Describes how to acquire and store the data. Also describes the procedure to
load measured data/setup data on the CF card or the USB flash memory (/USB1
option).
Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control Functions
(/R1 and /PM1 Options)
Describes how to carry out specific actions when a given event occurs, when a
remote control signal is applied, and when the USER key is pressed.
Using the Security Function
Describes how to use the key lock function and the function that allows only
registered users to operate the DX.
Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)
Describes how to use computation channels and how to create reports such as
hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports.
External Input Channels (/MC1 Option)
Describes how to use external input channels.
Troubleshooting
Describes error messages and troubleshooting.
Maintenance
Describes periodic inspection and calibration.
Specifications
Lists the specifications of the DX.
Describes how to estimate the file size, the types of data that the DX can
generated and how to use them, the data format of text files, etc.
Index
Note
This users manual covers information regarding DX2000s that have a suffix code for
language -2 (English).
For details on setting the display language, see section 2.6, Changing the Displayed
Language.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Conventions Used in This Manul

Unit
K
k
Denotes 1024. Example: 768 KB (file size)

Denotes 1000.
Markings
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or
damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the
instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user's
manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in
the corresponding place in the user's manual to identify those
instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction
with the word WARNING or CAUTION.
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious

or fatal injury to the user, and precautions that can be taken to
prevent such occurrences.
CAUTION
Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light

injury to the user or damage to the instrument or users data, and
precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
Note
Calls attention to information that is important for proper

operation of the instrument.
Subheadings
Bold characters
Denotes key or character strings that appear on the screen.

Example: Volt
Aa#1
Indicates character types that can be used.

A Uppercase alphabet, a lowercase alphabet, # symbols,
1 numbers.
Procedure
Explanation
Setup Screen
Setup Items
vi
Carry out the procedure according to the step numbers.

All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind;
depending on the operation, not all steps need to be taken.
Explanation gives information such as limitations related the
procedure.
Indicates the setup screen and explains the settings. A
detailed description of the function is not provided in this
section. For details on the function, see chapter 1.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Contents
Foreword.............................................................................................................................................i
DXs Version and Functions Described in This Manual.................................................................... iii
How to Use This Manual....................................................................................................................v
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Input Section................................................................................................................... 1-1

Alarms............................................................................................................................. 1-4
Display............................................................................................................................ 1-9
Data Storage Function.................................................................................................. 1-28
Batch Function.............................................................................................................. 1-38
Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options).......................... 1-39
Security Function.......................................................................................................... 1-44
Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)......................................... 1-46
FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 and /F2 Options)...................................................... 1-53
Other Functions............................................................................................................. 1-55
Setting the Date/Time..................................................................................................... 2-1

Setting the Time Difference from GMT............................................................................ 2-2
Setting the Time Correction Operation during Memory Sampling................................... 2-3
Setting the Date Format.................................................................................................. 2-4
Viewing the DX Information............................................................................................. 2-5
Changing the Displayed Language................................................................................. 2-7
Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight Saver............................................................ 2-8
Initializing Settings and Clearing the Internal Memory.................................................... 2-9
Outputting the DX Status via the Relay Contact (/F1 and /F2 Options)........................ 2-10
Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)...........2-11
Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 Option)..................... 2-16
Using the USB Flash Memory (/USB1 Option)............................................................. 2-21
Setting the Decimal Point Type (Release number 3 or later)........................................ 2-23
Showing or Hiding the Menu Item for Switching from Setting Mode to Basic Setting Mode
(Release number 3 or later).......................................................................................... 2-24
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3
4
5
6
Common Operations
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
Setting the Scan Interval and the Integration Time of the A/D Converter........................ 3-1
Setting the Burnout Detection and the Reference Junction Compensation of the
Thermocouple Input........................................................................................................ 3-2
Setting the Input Range.................................................................................................. 3-3
Setting the Moving Average of the Input......................................................................... 3-6
Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function................................................................................ 3-7
Hiding the Alarm Indication........................................................................................... 3-10
Setting Alarms on Channels...........................................................................................3-11
Releasing the Alarm Output (Alarm ACK Operation).................................................... 3-15
Performing Calibration Correction (/CC1 Option).......................................................... 3-16
Counting Pulses (/PM1 Option)..................................................................................... 3-17
Setting the Method of Detecting Over-Range Values of Linearly Scaled Measurement
Channels....................................................................................................................... 3-20
Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)............................. 3-21
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
vii
Contents
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
Chapter 6
viii
Operations in Operation Mode........................................................................................ 4-1

Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs . ........................ 4-4
Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)........................................... 4-10
Display the Statuses of All Channels on One Screen (Overview Display).................... 4-24
Displaying Various Information...................................................................................... 4-26
Using the Alarm Summary............................................................................................ 4-29
Using the Message Summary....................................................................................... 4-31
Using the Memory Summary......................................................................................... 4-32
Displaying a List of Operation Logs.............................................................................. 4-36
Showing the Four Panel Display................................................................................... 4-40
Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1 options; release number 3 or later).... 4-42
Setting Display Groups................................................................................................... 5-1

Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers............................................................................. 5-3
Setting the Trend Interval and Switching to the Secondary Trend Interval..................... 5-6
Writing Messages............................................................................................................ 5-8
Changing the Channel Display Colors...........................................................................5-11
Displaying Channels in Display Zones.......................................................................... 5-12
Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display....................................................................... 5-13
Displaying Alarm Point Marks and Color Scale Band on the Scale.............................. 5-16
Partially Expanding the Waveform................................................................................ 5-18
Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the Waveform at Start, Message Display
Direction, Waveform Line Width, and Grid.................................................................... 5-20
Changing the Bar Graph Display Method..................................................................... 5-21
Using the Circular Display............................................................................................. 5-24
Changing the Background Color of the Display............................................................ 5-32
Automatically Switching Display Groups....................................................................... 5-33
Automatically Reverting to the Specified Display.......................................................... 5-34
Using the Favorite Key.................................................................................................. 5-35
Writing a Message When the DX Recovers from a Power Failure............................... 5-37
Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display Selection Menu....................................... 5-38
Displaying Comments (Release number 3 or later)...................................................... 5-42
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data................................................ 6-1

Setting the Method for Saving the Data.......................................................................... 6-4
Using the Batch Function................................................................................................ 6-6
Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured data................................. 6-10
Manually Saving the Measured Data (Manual Sample)................................................ 6-13
Saving the Screen Image Data (Snapshot)................................................................... 6-15
Managing the Files on the Storage Medium................................................................. 6-16
Loading and Displaying the Measured Data in the Storage Medium............................ 6-18
Saving/Loading the Setup Data.................................................................................... 6-19
IM 04L42B01-01E
Contents
Chapter 7
Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control

Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)
7.1
7.2
7.3
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and
/PM1 options and the USER key)................................................................................... 7-1
Setup Examples of Event Action..................................................................................... 7-7
Changing the Response to Remote Contact Input Opening and Closing (/R1 and /PM1
options; release number 3 or later)............................................................................... 7-10
8.1
8.2
8.3
Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock Function).......................................................... 8-1

Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the DX (Login Function)............................ 8-3
Logging in and Logging Out............................................................................................ 8-6
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on
Computation Channels.................................................................................................... 9-1
Writing Expressions........................................................................................................ 9-5
Displaying the Computation Channels...........................................................................9-11
Starting/Stopping Computation, Resetting Computation, and Releasing Computation
Data Dropout Display.................................................................................................... 9-13
Creating Reports........................................................................................................... 9-15
Chapter 10 Using External Input Channels (/MC1 Option)

10.1
10.2
Setting External Input Channels.................................................................................... 10-1

Displaying the External Input Channels........................................................................ 10-5
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.1
11.2
A List of Messages.........................................................................................................11-1
Troubleshooting...........................................................................................................11-17
Chapter 12 Maintenance
12.1
12.2
Periodic Inspection........................................................................................................ 12-1

Calibrating the DX......................................................................................................... 12-2
Chapter 13 Specifications
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
Appendix
Signal Input and Alarm.................................................................................................. 13-1

Display Function............................................................................................................ 13-3
Data Saving Function.................................................................................................... 13-6
Other Standard Functions............................................................................................. 13-8
Options........................................................................................................................ 13-10
General Specifications................................................................................................ 13-16
External Dimensions................................................................................................... 13-21
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
File Size of Display Data and Event Data.......................................................... App-1

Types of Data That the DX Can Create and Their Application........................... App-4
Text File Data Format......................................................................................... App-5
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
ix
Chapter 1
1.1
Input Section
1
2
Number of Measurement Channels and Scan Interval

The DX samples the input signals on the measurement channels at the scan interval
to obtain the measured values. The table below shows the relationship between the
number of measurement channels and the scan interval.
Measurement Channel
Number of
Scan Interval
Measurement
Model
Normal
Mode
Fast Sampling Mode*
Channels
DX2004
125 ms
4
25 ms
250 ms
DX2008
8
DX2010
10
DX2020
20
1 s, 2 s, 5 s
125 ms
2 s, 5 s
DX2030
30
DX2040
40
DX2048
48
Integration time of the A/D
60 Hz/50 Hz/100 ms
60 Hz/50 Hz
600 Hz (fixed)
converter
* Not available on models equipped with external input channels (/MC1 option).
For the setting procedure, see section 3.1.
3
4
5
6
Integration Time of the A/D Converter

The DX uses an A/D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital
signal. By setting the integration time of the A/D converter to match the time period
corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle, the
power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated.
Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16.7 ms and 20 ms, this setting can be used to
eliminate the power frequency noise for both frequency, 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
In fast sampling mode, the performance of eliminating power frequency noise is worse than
in normal mode. We recommend that you use normal mode when making measurements in
an environment affected by power frequency noise.
7
8
9
Input Type and Computation
10
You can make measurements using the following input types.

Input Type
DC voltage
DC current
IM 04L42B01-01E
Description
Measures a DC voltage in the range of 20 mV to 50 V.
A shunt resistor*1 is attached to the input terminal. The current signal is converted
to a voltage signal and measured. The measurable range is the range equivalent
to the DC voltage range indicated above after converting the current to the
voltage signal.
Thermocouple Measures temperature corresponding to each type: R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N, W,
L, U, and WRe3-25. Measurement is possible on other thermocouples
such as PR40-20 and PLATINEL*2.
RTD
Measures temperature corresponding to each type: Pt100 and JPt100.
Measurement is possible on other RTDs such as Cu10 or Cu25*3 and Pt50 or
Ni100*2.
ON/OFF input Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0% or
100% of the display range.
Contact input: Closed contact is ON (1). Open contact is OFF (0).
Voltage input: Less than 2.4 V is OFF (0). Greater than or equal to 2.4 V is ON (1).
Pulse input*4 Counts the pulses.
*1 Item sold separately. For example, a 250- shunt resistor is used to convert the signal
to 1 to 5 V for 4-20 mA input.
*2 /N3 option.
*3 /N1 option.
*4 /PM1 option.
1-1
11
12
13
App
Index
1.1 Input Section

The following input processing and computation are available.
Moving average
Linear Calibration Low cut Difference Measured

scaling correction
computation
value
(/CC1 option)
DC Voltage
Shunt resistor
DC current
Square root computation

1-5V
Burnout detection
RJC
Thermocouple
Burnout detection
RTD
ON/OFF input
Convert to number of pulses over 1 second

Pulse
(/PM1 option)
Dotted lines indicate that the function can be selected.

Burnout Detection
Reference Junction Compensation
Detects and indicates a burnout in the sensor.
Performs reference junction compensation on

the thermocouple.
DX
Thermocouple
Burnout
1-5V
Detected on the
1-5 V value.
Internal
reference
junction
Thermocouple
Indicated as
Burnout.
Thermoelectromotive
force
Indicated as
Burnout.
Burnout
External reference junction
Moving Average
Eliminates noise.
New sampled
data
Operation example when the number

of moving average data points is 3
1
2
3
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
0.0 mV
(Moving average)
5.0 mV
Sampling data
in the buffer
Measured
value
Sampling
nth time
New sampled
data
15.0 mV
10.0 mV
5.0 mV
Clear
10.0 mV
n + 1th time
10.0 mV
15.0 mV
10.0 mV
Clear
Number of moving
average data points: 2 to 400
11.7 mV
n + 2th time
1-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.1 Input Section
B
X
A
xa
X = (B A)
ba
+A
Measured
value
0V
Number of break
points: Up to 16
100 c
The measured value of the channel is set to the

difference with respect to the measured value of the
reference channel.
Input
value
Measured
value
Measured value on the reference channel
Result of square root

computation
Input
value

Pulse Input (/PM1 Option)
Pulse that can be counted
Pulse
100 Hz or less
Measured
value
For square root computation, measured values below

the specified value are cut.
For 1-5 V input, values below 0 % are cut.
Input
value
Difference computation

Low-cut
Low-cut value
300 c
Input
value
Corrects the input value with the characteristics

specified by segments to obtain the measured value.
10 V
Measured
value

Calibration Correction (/CC1 Option)
Output
value
Measured
value
Converts the unit to obtain the measured value.
Contact
or
5 ms or more
Input to the DX
DX
The signal level at the input terminal changes from high

to low.
Note

Open
collector
Count on the DX
The contact changes from open to close.
b
Input
value
Linear Scaling
Square Root Computation

Takes the square root of the input value and converts
the unit to obtain the measured value.
Difference computation is executed even if the input type or range is not the same between
the difference computation channel and the reference channel. The difference is computed
discarding the decimal place and unit, and the decimal place and unit of the difference
computation channel are applied.
Example 1: If the input value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 and the
measured value of the reference channel is 100.0, the computed result is
10.00 100.0 = 90.00.
Example 2: If the input value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 V and the
measured value of the reference channel is 5.00 mV, the computed result is
10.00 V 5.00 mV = 5.00 V.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-3
1.2
Alarms
This function generates an alarm when the measured data meets a certain condition. Up
to four alarms can be set for each channel.
Alarm Type
You can use the alarms shown below. The character inside the parentheses is the
symbol denoting each alarm.
For the alarm setting procedure, see section 3.7.
High Limit Alarm (H)
Measured value Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm value
Alarm output ON
Alarm value
Low Limit Alarm (L)

Measured value Hysteresis
Alarm output ON
Delay High Limit Alarm (T)

Measured value
Delay time
Delay Low Limit Alarm (t)

Measured value
Alarm value
Delay time
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (R)
Measured value
Change in the
measured value
T2
T1
t1
t2
Amount of change in
the setting
T2-T1 |
Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (r)

Measured value
T2
T1
t1
Time
Difference High Limit Alarm (h)
Alarm value
t2
Change in the measured value
Time
Interval (t2-t1)
Interval (t2-t1)
Difference in the measured values of two channels

Hysteresis
Amount of change in
the setting
| T2-T1 |
Difference Low Limit Alarm (l)

Difference in the measured values of two channels
Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
Alarm Hysteresis
You can set a width (hysteresis) to the value used to activate and release alarms.
Delay High Limit Alarm and Delay Low Limit Alarm

An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or below the alarm value
for a specified time period (delay period).
High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm and Low Limit on Rate-of-Change

Alarm
The rate-of-change of the measured values is checked over a certain time (interval).
An alarm occurs if the rate-of-change of the measured value in the rising/falling
direction is greater than or equal to the specified value.
The alarm value of the rate-of-change alarm is set using an absolute value. The
interval is derived using the following equation and set using the number of samples.
Interval = the scan interval the number of samples

Difference Upper Limit Alarm and Difference Lower Limit Alarm

An alarm occurs when the difference in the values of two channels is greater/less
than or equal to the specified value. These alarms can be specified on measurement
channels set to difference computation.
1-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.2 Alarms
Alarm Indication
Alarm Levels and Colors (Release number 3 or later)

You can set separate levels and colors for the four alarms on a single channel. When
multiple alarms occur, the DX gives higher priority to the display of alarms with higher
levels. It is easy to understand what processes are taking place when alarms occur if
you associate an alarms color with its level. Level and color settings are the same for
each channel.
In the overview display, the channel display area appears in the color of the alarm
that has occurred.
The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and on
the operation screen such as the trend, digital, bar graph, overview displays. Detailed
information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary.
2
3
4
5
6
The following items also appear in the color of the alarm that has occurred.
Alarm marks in the trend, digital, and bar graph displays
The alarm point marks on scales (when they are set to Alarm)
The alarm occurrence mark in the alarm summary
When multiple alarms occur on the same channel, the various displays respond as
described below:
In the overview display, the channel display area is displayed using the color of the
alarm with the highest priority level.
In the trend and digital displays, the alarm type is displayed using the symbol for
the alarm with the highest priority level.
In the annunciator display, the display window is displayed using the color of the
alarm with the highest priority level.
Alarm-Activated Text Display (Release number 3 or later)
9
10
11
12
You can set strings of text to appear when alarms occur.

13
Hold/Non-hold of Indications
The alarm indication can be set to operate in the following fashion when the condition
is no longer met.
Clear the alarm indication (non-hold).
Hold the alarm indication until the alarm ACK operation is executed (hold).
The default setting is non-hold.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-5
1.2 Alarms
Alarm Hide Function

The alarm setting is displayed, but no indication is made when an alarm occurs. The
alarm is also not recorded in the alarm summary. The alarm is output to the relay
(/A[ ] option) or internal switch. This function can be set for each channel and each
alarm.
1-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.2 Alarms
Alarm Output Relay Operation
Channel 1
Alarm ACK
Channel 2
Alarm output relay

(Reflash on)
Alarm output relay
(Reflash off)
Approx. Approx.
500 ms 500 ms
Display
Channel 3
(when a relay is set to OR logic)
OR
(You can set AND/OR for the alarm output relay and internal
switch. For details about the internal switch, see the next
page.)
Energize or De-energize
When power
Normal
is shut down
operation
When an alarm
is occurring
Energize
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
De-energize
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO: Normally Opened

C: Common
NC: Normally Closed
NO C NC
Normal
Alarm
Normal
Non-hold
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
Hold
AND
Alarm output relay
Alarm output relay

or
internal switch
Relay Action on ACK Normal
Channel 2
Alarm
Relay Action on ACK Reset

Non-hold
Hold
Channel 1
Alarm ACK
Release
AND/OR
Alarm
Occurrence
Non-hold
Alarm
Non-hold/Hold
Hold
Alarm
Reflash
Contact signals can be generated from alarm output relays (/A_ option) when alarms
occur. The alarm output relay operation can be changed.
or
Deactivated
Relay is activated
at the next scan
interval.
7
8
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
or
Deactivated
Relay is activated
when the next
alarm occurs.
Reflash
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, this function notifies the
occurrence of subsequent alarms after the relay is activated by the first alarm. When
subsequent alarms occur, the output relay is released temporarily (approximately 500 ms).
The reflash function is set on the first three output relays.*
* I01 to I03 or I11 to I13. I01 and I02 for the /A1 option.
10
11
12
Note
When reflash is enabled, the first three output relays are used exclusively as reflash relays.
The first three output relays are set to OR logic and de-energize operation regardless of the
AND/OR and energize/de-energize settings explained below.
13
AND/OR
App
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, the condition for
activating the output relay can be selected from the following: You can select AND
operation also for the internal switch.
AND: Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously.
OR: Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Index
1-7
1.2 Alarms
Energize or De-energize Operation

You can select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an
alarm occurs. If de-energized is selected, the status of the alarm output relay when an
alarm occurs is the same as the status that results when the DX power is shut down.
The setting applies to all alarm output relays.
Non-Hold/Hold
The alarm output relay can be set to operate in the following fashion when the alarm
condition is no longer met.
Turn OFF the relay output (non-hold).
Hold the relay at ON until the alarm ACK operation is executed (hold).
The setting applies to all alarm output relays.
Alarm ACK Operation

The alarm acknowledge (alarm ACK) operation releases all alarm indications and
relay outputs. For the action of alarm indication and alarm output relay when you
carried out the alarm ACK operation, see the previous page.
Note
When you enter the basic setting mode, the hold/non-hold condition of the alarm output relay
immediately before is retained. In the basic setting mode, alarms are not detected, and you
cannot acknowledge alarms.
Internal Switch
The alarm status can be output to software switches (30 internal switches). The values of
the internal switch are shown below. Like the alarm output relay, you can specify AND/
OR operation (see the previous page).
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm release
1
Internal switch
The internal switches can be used events of the event action function (see section 1.6).
In addition, the internal switches can be written in calculation expressions of computation
channels (/M1 or /PM1 option).
Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

You can use the DX as an alarm annunciator. No lock-in, lock-in, and double lock-in
sequences are supported. The alarm display and alarm output relay operations follow the
annunciator sequence.

1-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3
Display
1
Common Items Related to the Display

10.4 TFT Color LCD and the Screen Configuration
The DX has a 10.4-inch TFT color LCD (480 640 dot resolution). The screen
consists of the status display section and the data display section.
Status display section
4
Data display section
5
6
Status Display Section

The status display section shows the display name, date/time, batch name (when
using the batch function), user name (when using the login function), usage of the
internal memory or CF card, alarm occurrence, computation status (/M1 or /PM1
option), and usage of key lock or e-mail transmission.
Data Display Section

The data display section shows the measured data using numeric values,
waveforms, and bar graphs. It also shows the setup screen when setting functions.
Group Display
On the trend, digital, and bar graph displays, the data of channels is displayed by
groups that are set in advance. Up to 36 groups can be registered, and up to 10
channels can be assigned to each group. Groups are common to the trend, digital,
and bar graph displays.
The displayed group can be switched automatically at a specified time interval (5 s to 1 min).
Channel Number Display and Tag Display
The values are updated every second. However, if the scan interval is greater than 1 s,
the values are updated at the scan interval.
Alarm Indication
Alarms that are set for each channel are checked at all times and are indicated with
the symbol representing the alarm type on each display.

IM 04L42B01-01E
Alarm Type
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Delay high limit alarm
Delay low limit alarm
9
10
12
Update Interval of Measured Values
Symbol
H
L
h
l
11
You can choose to label displayed channels according to their tags or according to
their channel numbers. This setting applies to all channels.
Alarm Type
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm
Difference high limit alarm
Difference low limit alarm
Symbol
R
r
T
t
1-9
13
App
Index
1.3 Display
Status Display Section

The following information is displayed in the status display section during operation mode
or setting mode.
Memory sampling status
Data type
Display data
Event data
Memory sampling
stopped
Memory sampling
in progress
Memory sampling icon
Memory sampling progress

Displays the progress using a green bar graph. The frame indicates the file
save interval (display data) or the data length (event data).
Error in internal memory.
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Displays the remaining memory sampling time for the left bar graph.
Alarm icon
Displayed when any alarm is activated.
Blinks when there are alarms that are
(Red)
occurring but have not been acknowledged.
Display name or group name

For all channel display on the trend display,
All is displayed.
Date and time
Displayed in yellow while the time is being corrected.
All alarms have been released after they

(Green) have occurred, but there are alarms that
have not been acknowledged.
When using the batch function

Batch name and the display
name are shown alternately.
Date and time
If the batch number-lot number exceeds 20
characters, the date and time position is used to
display the batch number-lot number.
When using the login function
Name of the user logged in
Display name
Date and time
When using the login and batch functions
Name of the user logged in
Batch name and the display
name are shown alternately.
Date and time
Status icon
The status assigned to the status output relay
(/F1 option) is occurring.
Keys are locked.
E-mail transmission is enabled.
Computation icon (/M1 or /PM1 option)
White icon:Computation started
Yellow icon:Computation data dropout occurred
CF card icon
CF card is being accessed.
The green level display indicates the amount of

CF card used. If Media FIFO* is not enabled and
the free space on the CF card falls below 10%,
the level indicator changes to red.
* See section 1.4, in the DX1000/DX1000N User's
Manual. Media FIFO is a function available on
release number 2 or later.
Waiting.
Light blue icon: CF card in the slot is not
recognized. Remove and reset it.
CF card error.
Carry out the procedure below to reset the CF card icon to
normal.
Remove the CF card, and then reinsert it.
Replace the CF card with a normal one.
Format the CF card on the DX (the data on the CF card
will be erased).
Bar Graph
When event data recording is set to pretrigger, the DX will start recording pretrigger data
after you press the START key. Waiting appears in the bar graph (release number 3 or
later). At this time, the progress bar will turn orange. After the pretrigger time elapses,
the length of the bar fixed at that point. However, the relevant data is updated until the
trigger condition is met. When the trigger condition is met, the bar turns green, and data
is recorded after the data in the pretrigger section.
1-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Trend Display (T-Y)

Grid
See section 5.10.
Numeric display section

See section 4.2.
Waveform data is displayed in a waveform. For the operating procedure, see section 4.2.
Trend interval
See section 5.3.
Tag or channel number, measured value,

and specified alarm
Trip line (up to four lines)

See section 5.1.
Current value mark
Waveform (displayed using the channel display color)
Change the channel display color (see section 5.5.)
Change the waveform line width (see section 5.10.)
Display the waveforms of all channels (see section 4.2.)
Message (mark, time, and message)
See section 5.4.
1 division
(30 dots)
Maximum value
Minimum value
1 dot
Scale
See section 5.7.
"Trend space" function
Inserts a division-wide space here.
See section 4.2.
Time at the grid position
Displays the time or the date and time.
See sections 2.4 and 5.3.
Displays the maximum and minimum values of the

data sampled within the time corresponding to 1 dot.
Display layout
Alarm point mark

See section 5.8.
Color scale band
See section 5.8.
Current value display

using a bar graph
See section 5.7.
See section 5.10.
4
5
6
7
8
Vertical display
Alarm mark
Alarm type
9
10
11
Horizontal wide display
Horizontal split display (displays two groups)
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-11
1.3 Display
Updating of the Waveform

On the screen, 30 dots along the time axis is represented by a unit called division (see
the figure on the previous page). The displayed waveform is updated at an interval
corresponding to one dot. This interval is determined by the time corresponding to one
division (referred to as the trend interval). The relationship between the trend interval
and the speed of movement of waveforms on the screen is as follows:
Trend interval (/DIV)
Time corresponding to one dot
(in seconds)
Speed of waveform movement
(approximation in mm/h)
(in seconds)
(in seconds)
5 s*1
0.125
10 s*1
0.25
15 s*2
0.5
30 s
1
1 min
2
10000
5000
2500
1250
625
2 min
4
5 min
10
10 min
20
15 min
30
20 min
40
312
156
78
42
31
30 min
60
1h
120
2h
240
4h
480
10 h
1200
21
10
5.2
2.6
1.0
*1 40 dots per division. Selectable on the DX2004 and DX2008 (release number 3 or later).
*2 Selectable on the DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048 when the scan interval
is set to fast sampling mode (release number 3 or later).
Switching the Trend Interval
You can switch from the normal trend interval to the secondary trend interval during
memory sampling and vice versa. For the operating procedure, see section 5.3.
Writing Messages
Preset messages
1
2
3
4
Trend display
Start
Material 1

Free message
Set the message when writing the message
Preset Messages
Preset messages are recalled and written.
The number of messages that you can use are 100 (message 1 to 10 are shared with
free messages). For the operating procedure, see section 5.4
Free Messages
Messages are entered when you need to enter them. The number of messages that
you can use are 10. For the operating procedure, see section 5.4.
Automatic Message Writing

A message is written when the trend interval is switched during memory sampling.
A message is written when the power recovers from a power failure during memory
sampling. For the operating procedure, see section 5.17.
1-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Message display method
Except for the vertical display, you can set the direction in which messages are
displayed to horizontal or vertical. For the setting procedure, see section 5.10.
Messages can be displayed consolidated at the upper left of the screen (list
display). For the operating procedure, see section 4.2.
List display
Vertical display
4
Zone Display
You can display channels in specified zones. This function can be used to keep the
waveforms from overlapping for easier view.
In the example below, channel 1 is displayed in the 0 to 30% zone, channel 2 in the
30 to 60% zone, and channel 3 in the 60 to 100% zone.
100 %
100 %
Zone 3
CH3
60 %
CH2
Zone 2
30 %
CH1
Time axis
When zone display is used
When zone display is not used
0%
Zone 1
Time axis
0%
Auto Zone (Release number 3 or later)

You can divide the trend display area evenly between each channel in a group.
For operating instructions, see section 4.2.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-13
1.3 Display
Partial Expanded Display

By compressing a section of the waveform display range, the rest of the section is
expanded.
In the example below, 0 V (boundary value) is moved to the 30% position of
the display range (new boundary position). The 30% area below the boundary
corresponds to 6 V to 0 V and 70% area above the boundary corresponds to 0 V
to 6 V.
Percentage with
respect to the
display span
Measured value
Measured value
6V
When partial expanded display

is used
100
Boundary
value
Percentage with
respect to the
display span
6V
100
New
boundary
position
50
0
6V
Time axis
30
6V
Time axis
Expanded section
When partial expanded display

is not used
Reduced
section
Alarm Indication
Alarm mark, alarm type, and measured value are displayed as follows according to
the alarm status. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or
later), the alarm mark follows the annunciator sequence.
When indication is
set to hold
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
When indication is
set to non-hold
Alarm
1-14
Occurrence
Release
Alarm mark Green
Red
Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green

red
green
red
Alarm type
None
Red
None
None
Red
None
None
None
Red
Red None
Measured
value
Blue
Red
Blue
Blue
Red
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Blue
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Digital Display
Displays the measured data numerically using large numbers. For the operating
procedure, see section 4.2.
Unit
Measured value
Alarm mark
Tag or channel numbers
4
5
Note
Numeric display of measurement channels

If a measured value of a measurement channel is over range (see below), the measured
value is indicated as +Over or Over. If a burnout is detected on a channel whose
burnout detection function is enabled, the word Burnout is indicated. Otherwise, a numeric
value is displayed.
Over range of measurement channels
For DC voltage input, over range occurs when the measured value of the measurement
channel exceeds 5% of the measurable range. For example, the measurable range when
the measurement range is 2 V is 2.000 to 2.000 V. If the measured value exceeds 2.200 V,
+ over range occurs; if the measured value falls below 2.200 V, over range occurs.
For thermocouple or RTD input, over range occurs when the measured value exceeds
approximately 10C of the measurable range. For example, the measurable range
when the measurement range is R is 0.0 to 1760.0C. If the measured value exceeds
approximately 1770.0C, + over range occurs; if the measured value falls below
approximately 10.0C, over range occurs.
For channels that are linearly scaled, + over range occurs when the value exceeds 30000
excluding the decimal point; over range occurs when the value falls below 30000.
However, + over range can be changed to greater than or equal to 105% of the scale width
and over range to less than or equal to 5% of the scale width within 30000. For the

Numeric display of computation channels

See section 1.8, Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)
Numeric display of external input channels (/MC1 option)
The numeric range that can be displayed is 30000 to 30000 excluding the decimal point.
The decimal place corresponds to the decimal place of the lower limit of span of the external
input channel. On the numeric display, values are displayed if the value is within the 30000
to 30000 range regardless of the upper and lower limits of span.
If the value exceeds 30000, + over range occurs; if the value falls below 30000, over
range occurs.
Alarm mark and measured value are displayed as follows according to the alarm
status. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the
alarm mark follows the annunciator sequence.
When indication
is set to hold
Alarm ACK
When indication is
set to non-hold
IM 04L42B01-01E
7
8
9
setting procedure, see section 3.11.
Alarm Indication
Alarm
Occurrence
Alarm mark Green
Red
Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green

red
green
red
Measured
value
Red
Blue
Blue
Red
Blue
Blue
Blue
11
12
13
Alarm ACK
Release
Blue
10
Red
Red
Blue
1-15
App
Index
1.3 Display
Bar Graph Display

Waveform data is displayed in a bar graph. For the operating procedure, see section 4.2.
Vertical
Tag or channel number
Alarm mark
Upper limit of span
Scale
See section 5.7.
Alarm point mark
Bar graph (displayed using the
channel display color)
See section 5.11.
Lower limit of span and unit
Measured value

Horizontal
See section 5.10.
Bar graph base position is set to Center

See section 5.11.
Bar graph base position is set

to Normal, Lower*, or Upper*.
* You can select Lower and Upper
on DXs with release number 2 or
later.
See section 5.11.
Bar graph base position is set

to Center
See section 5.11.
Updating of the Bar Graph

The bar graph is updated at the same interval as numeric values.
Alarm Indication
Alarm mark, alarm point mark, and measured value are displayed as follows according
to the alarm status. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3
or later), the alarm marks and alarm point marks follow the annunciator sequence.
When indication is
set to hold
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
When indication is
set to non-hold
Alarm
1-16
Occurrence
Release
Alarm mark Green
Red
Green
Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green

red
green
red
Point mark Green
Red
Green
Green
Red
Measured
value
Red
Blue
Blue
Red
Blue
Green Green Green

Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Red Green
Red
Red
Blue
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Historical Trend Display

Methods of Displaying the Historical Trend
There are four methods to display the historical trend of the measured data in the
internal memory.
Display from the alarm summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.6.
Display from the message summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.7.
Display from the memory summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.8.
Recall from the display selection menu. For the operating procedure, see section 4.3.
Measured data on an external storage medium can also be displayed as historical
trend. For the operating procedure, see section 6.8.
The waveform of the past measured data (display or event data) in the internal memory
or external storage medium can be displayed. This function is called Historical trend.
2
3
4
Displayed Contents
Background
Waveform (channel display color)
color
Zoom factor of the time axis
Cursor
(Can be changed)
Trip line
Time axis
Tag or channel number (channel display color)

Measured value (maximum or minimum value over
the entire display range)*1
Measured value (maximum or minimum value at

the cursor position)*1
Unit
Message
Screen switch display
Date and time of the data at

the left end on the time axis*2
*1
*2
The most recent data position among the displayed data

Date and time of the data at the right end on
the time axis*2 or the time at the cursor position
The time at the cursor position is displayed enclosed in a
yellow frame.
You can also view a digital display of just the value at the cursor position
(release number 3 or later).
You can also display the relative time from the start of recording
9
10
Half screen display
11
Historical trend
Current trend
12
13
Item
Alarm summary
Message summary
Data information
IM 04L42B01-01E
Description
Displays an alarm summary of the displayed data.
Displays a message summary of the displayed data.
Shows information about the displayed data (file name, sample start
time, end time, etc.).
1-17
App
Index
1.3 Display
Added Messages
Added messages can be written. For the operating procedure, see section 5.4.
Auto Span Display (Release number 3 or later)

The DX can automatically adjust the display span of the selected channel.*It sets
the span based on the maximum and minimum displayed historical data values. This
setting is deactivated when you switch to another group.
* Auto span affects channels that are in the same scale position as the selected channel.
When the maximum or minimum values are outside of the set display span
Measured value
Measured value
0
Auto span 0
Time axis
Time axis
When the maximum or minimum values are within the set display span
Measured value
Measured value
0
Auto span
Time axis
Time axis
If the maximum or minimum data value falls outside the maximum selectable display
span, the DX adjusts the display span to the maximum or minimum possible value.
The DX responds in the same way when it encounters overflow data.
Top Channel Display (Release number 3 or later)

Displays the selected channels historical trend waveform in front of all of the others.
This setting is deactivated when you switch to another group.
1-18
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Circular Display
Message
This position is the time reference position.

The time axis is set so that the time reference
position is hour 0.
The reference position can be offset in unit of one hour.
Time per revolution
See section 5.12
Message mark (position where the message was written)
See section 5.4
Grid
See section 5.10
Waveform (displayed using the channel display color)
To change the channel display color, see section 5.5.
To change the waveform line width, see section 5.10.
To display the waveforms of all channels, see section
4.2.
Trip line (up to four lines)
See section 5.1
Date/time
Time scale (main scale marks and small scale marks)
Channel number corresponding to the scale value
Scale
Quarter cycle display
Simplified historical trend
The circular display shows the measured data on a circular time axis in place of the trend
display (T-Y). The time per revolution can be set in the range of 20 minutes to 4 weeks.
For the operating procedure, see section 5.12.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Historical Trend Display
Displays the past data for each time of revolution. The displayed contents and
operating procedure are the same as the historical trend of the T-Y display. Half
screen display is not possible.
11
12
Time per revolution

See section 5.12
Date/time
13

App
Cursor (yellow line)
See section 5.12
Cursor time
IM 04L42B01-01E
Index
1-19
1.3 Display
Overview Display
Displays a list of the statuses of all channels.
You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend, digital, or bar graph
of the group containing the selected channel.
Channels on which an alarm is

occurring are indicated in red
Alarm type
Cursor
Measured value and unit

Alarm Indication
Channel display area, tag/channel number, alarm type, and measured value
are displayed as follows according to the alarm status. When you use the alarm
annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the displays of the previously listed
items follow the annunciator sequence.
When indication is
set to hold
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
When indication is
set to non-hold
Alarm
Occurrence
Release
Tag/Channel Black
1-20
White
Black
Channel
area
Green
Red
Alarm type
None
White
None
Measured
value
Black
White
Black
Black Blinking Blinking Black Black Blinking White Black

white
black
white
Red
Green
Green Green
None
White
None
None
None White
White None
Black
White
Black
Black Black White
White Black
Green Green
Red
Red Green
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Alarm Summary
Displays a list of the most recent alarms.

Up to 1000 alarms can be displayed.
You can select arbitrary alarm information and recall the historical trend of the display
data or event data that contains the alarm information.
2
3
To the historical trend display
4
5

Date/Time of alarm occurrence/release

Alarm level (1, 2, 3, 4)/type (H, L, h, l, R, r, T, t)
Channels on which alarms are occurring
: Alarm occurrence
(
blinks until the alarm ACK operation is carried out if Indicator is set to
Hold.)
: Alarm release
: Alarm acknowledge
(when blinking is cleared through the alarm ACK operation)
7
8
Cursor (selects the alarm)

Number of the alarm information displayed on the bottom line/number of alarm
information in the internal memory
When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the alarm
occurrence mark follows the annunciator sequence. If the alarm sequence is no lock-in
(ISA-A-4):
The alarm occurrence mark does not blink.
ACK is recorded when the alarm is released.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-21
1.3 Display
Message Summary
Displays a list of written messages and the time the messages were written.
Up to 450 messages can be displayed.
Up to 50 messages that are added to the past data section (added messages) can be
displayed.
You can select arbitrary message information and recall the historical trend of the
display data or event data that contains the message.
Message
Added message
(displayed in blue)
Cursor (selects the message)
Destination group to write the message

All groups or a group number
Date/Time when the message was written
Number of the message displayed on the bottom line/number

of messages in the internal memory
Switching of the Display Items

You can switch between two sets of display contents.
Message, time when the message was written, and group to which the message
was written
Message, user name that wrote the message
1-22
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Memory Summary
Date/Time of the most recent

data
Number of data points in the
internal memory/maximum
number of data points that
can be recorded in the
internal memory
Data type
Display data
Event data
Displays the information pertaining to the display data and event data in the internal
memory.
By selecting the display data or event data, the historical trend display can be recalled.
The number of manual sampled data and report data (/M1 and /PM1 options) in the
internal memory is displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
Status
Sampling count
Date/Time of memory stop

Date/Time of memory start
Cursor (selects the file)
Switching of the Display Items

You can switch between two display methods.
Display the start and end times
Display the file name
Saving the Data

The data in the internal memory can be saved to a CF card or USB flash memory
(/USB1 option).
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-23
1.3 Display
Report Data (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed.
Start:
Start date/time
Timeup: Report date/time
Report data status

Indicates that the following
occurred between the report
interval.
E: Error data
O: Over data
P: Power failure
C: Time change
B: Burnout
Average, maximum, minimum, sum,
or instantaneous value
Unit
Report type
Number of the displayed report data/number of report data in the internal memory
Stacked Bar Graph (/M1 and /PM1 options)

You can display the report data (that is stored in the internal memory) of each report
group in a stacked bar graph.
For information about report groups, see section 9.5.
Types of Displayed Data

The type of data that is displayed is determined by the report type, which is set using
the report function.
Displayed Data Type
Hourly + daily
Daily + weekly
Daily + monthly
Report Type
Hourly, or hourly + daily
Daily + weekly
Daily or daily + monthly
Example: Hourly + daily display
Daily sum of all channels

and the daily sums of all
report groups
If you select a bar graph, the
sum of the hour selected with
the cursor is displayed.

Sums for the day (bar graph)
Hourly report group sums (bar graph)
1-24
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Display Modes
You can switch the bar graph between single graph and dual graph display.
Single graph display
Dual graph display
2
3
4
5
Status Display
The following displays available.
Relay Status Display

Displays the status of the alarm output relay and internal switch.
Modbus Client Status Display and Modbus Master Status Display

Displays the command status.
Event Level Switch Status (Release number 3 or later)
Displays the status of the event level switches.
Log Display
Displays various logs (operation log).

Log Type
Login
Error
Communications
FTP transfer
WEB
E-mail transmission
SNTP
DHCP
MODBUS
Description
Log of login/logout, log of time setting, and log of power failure
Log of error messages
Log of communication commands
Log of FTP transfers
Log of Web operations
Log of e-mail transmissions
Log of accesses to the SNTP server
Log of accesses to the DHCP server
Log of communications using Modbus client or Modbus master
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-25
1.3 Display
Four Panel Display

Displays four different display formats on a single screen. Because the size of each
screen is reduced to 1/4, there are limitations in the format, content, and operation of the
display.
Displayable Screen
Trend
Digital
Bar graph display
Overview
Annunciator
Alarm summary
Message summary
Memory summary
Modbus client status display
Modbus master status display
Report display
Event switch display
Stacked bar graph display
Limitation
No auto switching of groups. No all channel display and
message display. Number of displayed scales is 6 or less.
No auto switching of groups.
No auto switching of groups. No numeric display. Displays
one representative alarm character.
No operation. No numeric display when there are more than
261 channels.
There are restrictions on the display characters you can use.
For more information, see section 3.12.
No operation using the cursor.
No operation using the cursor.

-
Registering Screens
You can assign a display name to the display condition of the four panel display (up
to four configurations) and register it. A registered configuration can be recalled by its
display name and displayed.
The default values are as follows:
Display Name
MIX
ALL TREND
ALL DIGITAL
ALL BAR
1-26
Displays Shown
Trend (group 1), digital (group 1), bar graph (group 1), and
overview
All trend displays (groups 1 through 4)
All digital displays (groups 1 through 4)
All bar graph displays (groups 1 through 4)
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.3 Display
Other Useful Functions

Show a preset display when there is no operation for a specific time.
Automatically Reverting to the Specified Display
Favorite Key
Register a frequently used display to the Favorite key and enable the display to be
shown through simple operation.
Customizing the Menus

Change the FUNC key menu that appears when the FUNC key is pressed and the
screen menu that appears when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed.
Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD

The display conditions of the LCD can be configured.
Display Attribute
Background color of the
operation display
Background color of the
historical trend screen
LCD brightness
Backlight saver
Setting
The background color of the display can be set to white or black.
The default value is White. For the setting procedure, see section
5.13.
You can select white, cream, black, or light gray for the background
color of the screen. The default value is Black. For the setting
procedure, see section 5.13.
The brightness of the LCD can be set among six levels. The default
brightness is 2. For the setting procedure, see section 2.7.
The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically
turning OFF or dimming the light when there is no key operation
for a specified amount of time. The display returns to the original
brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence. By default,
the backlight saver is disabled. For the setting procedure, see
section 2.7.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-27
1.4
Data Storage Function

This section explains the types of data that the DX can record and how to store them.
Data Types
The types of data that the DX can record are as follows:
Data Type
Display data
Description
Waveform data displayed on the trend display. The measured data
is recorded as a specified sampling interval. The sampling interval is
specified using the trend interval.
The minimum and maximum values among the measured data within the
sampling interval are saved.
A header string (common to other files) can be written in the file.
The display data contains alarm and message information.
Data format: Binary (Undisclosed)
Event data
Measured data that is recorded at a specified sampling interval. There are
two modes. One mode starts recording when a trigger event occurs. The
other mode records at all times.
The event data contains alarm and message information.
Manual sampled data
Instantaneous value of the measured data when a manual sample
operation is executed.
Data format: Text
Report data (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly report data. Report data is created at an
interval that is determined by the report type (one hour for hourly reports,
one day for daily reports, and so on).
Data format: Text
Snapshot data (screen image data)
The image data of the DX screen when the snapshot operation is
executed.
The data can be saved to a CF card.
Data format: PNG
Setup data
The setup data of the DX.
Custom Display Setup Data
The custom display setup data of the DX.
Data format: text
Display data and event data

Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and
are useful for long-term recording. Event data is useful when you wish to record the
measured data in detail.
Display data
Maximum value per sampling interval
Minimum value per sampling interval
Event data
Instantaneous value during sampling
Measured data per

scan interval
Time
Scan interval
Sampling interval of event data
Sampling interval of display data
1-28
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.4 Data Storage Function
Flow of Data Recording and Storage
Measurement
channel
Computation
channel
External input
channel
Data of another device
(via communication)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Measured data is recorded once to the internal memory and then saved to the external
storage medium.
Display
Sampling
Setup data
Internal memory
5
FTP server on
the network
Save
Screen image
data
Save the data
Display/Event
data
CF card
Load
6
7
USB memory (/USB1 option)

External storage medium
Internal Memory
Display data and event data are held in files in the internal memory. The data area also
stored on the external storage medium in files.
Sampling
Internal memory
Display data and event data
Manual
sampled data
Report data
10
File
11
......
Save the data
FTP server on
the network
12
......
13
Directory on the external storage medium
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-29
Recording Method of Display Data and Event Data

Types of Data to Be Acquired

Select display data only, display data and event data, or event data only.
Deciding the Data to Be Recorded

Record the data that suits your application. Refer to the following examples.
Example 1: Continuously record the waveform data as with the conventional chart
recorder.

Record the display data.
Example 2: Record waveform data under normal conditions but record details around
the point of alarm occurrence when alarms occur.
Continuously record display data and record event data when alarms

occur.
Example 3: Only record the most-detailed data at all times.

Record event data by specifying the sampling interval.
Example 4: No need to continuously record data. Record data only when alarms
occur.

Record event data only when alarms occur.
Internal Memory
The recorded measured data is divided at a specific time interval and saved to files.
The size of the internal memory that holds the files is 80 MB or 200 MB (expansion
memory). If this size is exceeded or if the number of display data files and event data
files exceeds 400, files are overwritten from the oldest file.
Recording Conditions of Display Data

Item
Source channels
Sampling interval
File creation
Description
Select from measurement channels, computation channels, and
external input channels.
Specify the sampling interval with the trend interval (see the table
below). You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the
scan interval.
Files are created at the specified file save interval
Time
File
File
File
Adding data
Files are also created in the following cases.

When a file is created manually.
When the memory sampling is stopped.
When file creation is executed with the event action function.
Memory start/stop
After recovering from a power failure.

Press the START key to start recording (memory start) and the
STOP key to stop the recording (memory stop).
Trend interval and the sampling interval of display data

Trend interval
Sample rate
Trend interval
Sample rate
Trend interval
Sample rate
5 s*1
125 ms
2 min
4s
30 min
1 min
10 s*1
250 ms
5 min
10 s
1h
2 min
15 s*2
500 ms
10 min
20 s
2h
4 min
30 s
1s
15 min
30 s
4h
8 min
1 min
2s
20 min
40 s
10 h
20 min
*1 Selectable on the DX2004 and DX2008 (release number 3 or later).

*2 Selectable in fast sampling mode on the DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048
1-30
IM 04L42B01-01E
Recording Conditions of Event Data
File creation
Mode
Description
Same as the display data.
Select from the available settings between 25 ms to 30 minutes.
However, you cannot specify an interval that is faster than the scan
interval.
A file is created when the specified data length is reached.
Files are also created in the following cases.
When a file is created manually.
When file creation is executed with the event action function.
After recovering from a power failure.
The available modes are Free (continuously record), Single, and
Repeat. The recording operation varies depending on the mode as
follows:
Free
Press the START key to start recording (memory start) and the STOP
key to stop the recording (memory stop) .
Time
File
File
File
Adding data
Single
Pressing the START key places the DX in the trigger-wait state. When
the trigger condition is met, the DX records data for a specified time
(data length) and stops. From this point, the DX does not record even
if the trigger condition is met.
Trigger condition met
1
Item
Source channels
Sampling interval
2
3
4
5
6
7
Time
File
Repeat
Pressing the START key places the DX in the trigger-wait state. When
the trigger condition is met, the DX records data for a specified time
(data length) and stops. The DX enters the trigger-wait sate again and
keeps recording the data for a specified time (data length) each time
the trigger condition is met. To stop the recording of the event data,
press the STOP key.
Trigger condition met Trigger condition met
Time
File
8
9
10
File
Pretrigger of Event Data
The pretrigger can be specified in trigger mode.

This function is used to save the data before the point where the trigger condition
is met as event data. This function is convenient when you wish to record the data
before the occurrence of a certain event such as when an alarm occurs.
Specify the pretrigger as a percentage (0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, or 100%) of the recording
time (data length) of the event data. If set to 0%, the data after the trigger condition is
met is recorded.
Trigger condition met
11
12
13
Time

Data before
the trigger
App
Data after
the trigger
Trigger for Starting the Event Data Recording

When set to trigger mode, you can set various conditions for starting the recording.
Example: Key operation, alarm occurrence, specific time, or remote control
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-31
Index
Creating Files through Key Operation

Files can be created using keys.
Key operation
Time

File
File
File
Previous files
Current file
Manual Sampled Data

Manual sampled data is recorded to the internal memory. When the number of manual
sampled data exceeds 400, the data is overwritten from the oldest data.
Time

Manual sampled data
Report Data
Report data is recorded to the internal memory. When the number of report data
exceeds 100, the data is overwritten from the oldest data.
Time

Report data
1-32
IM 04L42B01-01E
Saving Data to the External Storage Medium

Type of External Storage Medium
CF card (32 MB or more)
USB flash memory (/USB1 option)
Auto Save
Have the CF card inserted in the slot at all times. The data in the internal memory is
automatically saved to the CF card.
Auto Save Timing

Data Type
Display data
Description
The file is saved when the file is created.
Time
File
File
File
Report data
Report Type
Hourly report
Daily report
Hourly and
daily reports
Daily and
weekly reports
Daily and
monthly reports
Same as the display data.

The first time manual sample is executed, a manual sampled data
file is created on the CF card. The data is appended to this file for
each subsequent manual sample operation. A new file is created
after manual sampled data has been stored 100 times.
The first time report data is generated, a report data file is created
on the CF card and report data is stored. The report data is
appended to this file every time of report.
Dividing of the report files
The appending of the report data to the file is stopped at a specified
time, and subsequent reports are saved to a new file. The file is
divided in the unit shown in the table below.
One File
Report File
hourly reports of a day

daily reports for a month
hourly reports for a day and
a daily report
daily reports for a week and
a weekly report
daily reports for a month and
a monthly report
3
4
5
Save to the CF card

Event data
Manual sampled data
For the setting and operating procedure, see sections 6.2 and 6.4 respectively.
6
7
8
File for Each Type

a file for each daily report
hourly reports of a day
a file for each weekly report
a file for each monthly report
9
10
Save Destination
CF card.
11
Data Save Destination Directory

You can set the data save destination directory name (DATA0 by default). The
specified directory is created on the CF card, and the data is saved in the directory.
Save Operation (If Media FIFO Is Disabled)

The data in the internal memory can be saved only if there is sufficient free space on
the CF card. Replace the CF card and save the data before the data in the internal
memory is overwritten.
Save Operation (Constantly Retaining the Most Recent Data Files Using
Media FIFO) (Release Number 2 or Later)
When saving the data files automatically, you can save the data so that the most
recent data files are constantly retained in the CF card. This method allow you to use
the DX continuously without having to replace the CF card.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-33
Operation
Old
Deleted
Update date
File 1
File 2
New
File 3
Saved
File 4
Medium
If not enough free space is available when saving a new data file to the CF card,
files are deleted in order from the oldest data update date/time to save the new file.
This operation is referred to as FIFO (First In First Out).
The FIFO operation is carried out only when saving the following files
automatically. It is not carried out when saving files to the save destination
directory using another method. Display data files, event data files, report data
files, manual sample data files, and snapshot data files
Files that are deleted
All the files in the save destination directory are applicable to be deleted.
However, the following files are excluded. Hidden files, read-only files, files in
the subdirectory within the save destination directory
The most recent 1000 files are retained. If the number of files in the save
destination directory exceeds 1000, the number of files is held at 1000 by
deleting old files even if there is enough free space.
If there are more than 1000 files already in the save destination directory, one or
more files are always deleted before saving the new file. The number of files is
not kept within 1000 in this case.
Manual Save (Collectively Storing Unsaved Data)

Unsaved data in the internal memory is stored in unit of files to the external storage
medium when an external storage medium is inserted and a given operation is carried
out.
Save operation
Time

File
Saved the
previous time
File
File
Saved this time
When using manual save, it is important that you save the data in the internal memory
to the external storage medium before the data is overwritten. Determine the usage
condition of the internal memory and save the data to the external storage medium at
appropriate times.
Save Destination
You can select a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).

You can set the data save destination directory name (DATA0 by default).
1-34
IM 04L42B01-01E
File Name
You can select the file name configuration from three types.
Structure
Date
Description
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Report data
7-digit
. Extension
Date
Specified string
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633.DAD
7-digit
Type . Extension
Date
Specified string
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633HD.DAR
Serial
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Report data
7-digit
. Extension
Specified string
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.DAD
7-digit
Specified string
Type . Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA0HD.DAR
Batch name
Display data
Event data
Report data
7-digit
Batch name
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB.DAD
7-digit
Date
Type . Extension
Ex.: 000123_050928_174633HD.DAR
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Item
7-digit
Date
7-digit
Date
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_050928_174633.DAM
Description
Consists of a 6-digit number and 1-character delimiter.
6-digit
A sequence number in the order of occurrence. The number ranges from
number
000001 to 999999. If the number reaches 999999, it returns to 000001.
1-character Starts with _ and takes on the following values: A to Z and 0 to 9.
If a file with the same name exists in the specified directory, the file is
delimiter
saved by changing the delimiter to prevent overwriting.
Example: If a file named 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.DAD already exists,
the file is saved to the name 000123AAAAAAAAAAAA.DAD.
YYMMDD_hhmmss
YY: Year (lower two digits), MM: Month, DD: Day

hh: Hour, mm: Minute, ss: Second
Specified string AAAAAAAAAA
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used
Batch name
BBBBBBBBBBBB
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used
Type
H_, D_, W_, M_,

HD, DW, DM
Report data type

H_: Hourly, D_: Daily, W_: Weekly, M_: Monthly,
HD: Hourly and daily, DW: Daily and weekly,
DM: Daily and monthly
Extension
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
:DAD
:DAE
:DAM
Report data
Snapshot data
Setup data
10
:DAR
:PNG
:PDL
11
Note
Differences from the File Names up to Now

The ID item at the end of the file name is deleted and its functionality is included in the
Separator of the 7-digit sequence.
Example
DXs before release number 2:
12
13
000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_1746330.DAD
The ID functionarity
has been shifted.
DXs with release number 2 or later: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633.DAD

The sequence section of the display data and event data file names is changed to 7 digits,
and the ID function is included in the Separator when using the Batch name.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-35
File Names on DXs before Release Number 2

The table below shows the file name that is assigned when the measured data is saved
to the CF card.
Structure
Date
Description
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Report data
7-digit
Specified string
Date
ID
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_1746330.DAD
7-digit
Type
Date
Specified string
ID
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633DH0.DAR
Serial
Display data
Event data
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Report data
Batch
name
Display data
Event data
Report data
7-digit
Specified string
ID
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA0.DAD
7-digit
Type
Specified string
ID
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAAHD0.DAR
3-digit
. Extension
Batch name
ID
. Extension
Ex.: 123BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB0.DAD
7-digit
Date
Type
ID
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_050928_174633HD0.DAR
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Item
Date
YYMMDD_hhmmss
7-digit sequence 000001 to 999999

3-digit sequence 001 to 999
Type
H_, D_, W_, M_,
HD, DW, DM
1-36
7-digit
Date
ID
. Extension
Ex.: 000123_050928_1746330.DAM
Description
Same as release number 2 and later.
Consists of a 6-digit number and an underscore as a separator.
A sequence number in the order of occurrence.
A sequence number in the order of occurrence.
Report data type
ID
0 to 9, A to Z
Extension
When a file with the same name exists in the specified directory,
the file is saved by changing the ID character to prevent
overwriting.
Example: If a file named
000123_AAAAA050907_1036480.DAD
already exists, the file is saved to the name
000123_AAAAA050907_1036481.DAD.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Saving Data through Key Operation
Data Storage
All save
Selective save
Manual sampled data save
Report data save
Description
Collectively saves all the data in the internal memory.
Saves the specified display data or event data file.
Collectively saves all the manual sampled data in the internal
memory.
Collectively saves all the report data in the internal memory.
Save Destination
1
You can carry out the following data save operations regardless of whether auto save
or manual save is used.
2
3
You can select a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
Creates a directory with the name of the data save destination directory name with the
date/time added and saves the data.
Directory name: Specified string_YYMMDD_HHMMSS
Example: If the data is saved at 17 hours 6 minutes 42 seconds on September 30,
2005, the data is saved to a directory named DATA0_050930_170642.
DATA0 is the specified string.
Note
The number of directories that you can create on the external storage medium varies
depending on the length of the directory names. If the length of the specified string is 5
characters, approximately 170 directories can be created. If it is 20 characters, approximately
120 directories can be created. An error occurs, if you try to create directories exceeding this
limit.
6
7
8
Other Types of Data That Can Be Stored

Setup Data
The setup data of the DX is saved to a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
The setup data is saved to the root directory.

Name of the setup data file
Specified
. PDL
Example: ABCD10005.PDL
10
Snapshot Data
The screen that the DX displays is saved to a CF card in PNG format. The data is
saved to the same directory as the display data and event data. For the file name, see
the previous page.
Time

CF card
11
12
Snapshot
Data file
Saving Data via the Ethernet Network

Display data, event data, report data (/M1 or /PM1 option), and screen image data
(snapshot data) can be automatically transferred and saved to an FTP server via the
Ethernet network by using the FTP client function. Conversely, the DX can function as an
FTP server. The DX can be accessed from a PC and the data files in the internal memory
or the external storage medium can be retrieved to be stored on the PC.
See the Communication Interface Users Manual IM 04L41B01-17E.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-37
1.5
Batch Function
You can add batch information to the display data and event data files. The files can be
managed using the batch information.
For the setting and operating procedure, see section 6.3.
Batch Information
Batch Number and Lot Number
A file can be identified by its batch number-lot number. The lot number does not
have to be specified.
Batch number (up to 32 characters).
Lot number (up to 8 digits)
Automatic Increment of the Lot Number

The lot number can be automatically incremented when the memory sampling is
stopped.
Text Field
You can enter text fields into a file. There are 24 available text fields (release number
3 or later). Each text field consists of the following
Field title (up to 20 characters)
Field string (up to 30 characters)
The text field can be shown on the DX screen through key operation.
Batch Comment
Three arbitrary comments can be entered in a file. A single comment can be entered
while memory sample is in progress.
Comment 1, Comment 2, and Comment 3 (up to 50 characters each)
Using the Batch Function

See the figure below. For example, enter the operator and administrator in the text field.
Batch number + lot number
Memory start
Comment
Memory stop
Time
Text field
Comment
Data file
1-38
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.6
Event Action and Remote Control Functions

(/R1 and /PM1 Options)
Events
Events
Select from the following events.
Event
Remote
Output relay
Level/Edge*1
Level/Edge
Level/Edge
Internal switch
Timer
Match time timer
Alarm
Level/Edge
Edge
Edge
Level/Edge
USER key
Event edge switch*2
Edge
Edge
Event level switch*2
Level
Description
ON/OFF of the remote control input.
Activated/Deactivated condition of the alarm output
relay.
The value 0 and 1 of the internal switch.
Timer timeout.
When the time matches.
The state in which any alarm is occurring and the state
in which no alarm is occurring.
The operation of pressing the USER key.
Can be caused by:
The Edge Switch soft key in the FUNC key menu.
A dedicated communication command or Modbus
communication.
The custom display
You can view the status of the switch in the event level
switch status display. Can be caused by:
A dedicated communication command or Modbus
communication.
The custom display.
A specified action is carried out when an event occurs. This function is called event
action. The remote control function (/R1 and /PM1 options) allows you to specify actions
to be performed when the terminal receives a contact input or an open collector signal.
The remote control function (/R1 option) is configured using the event action function.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*1 For a description of level and edge, see Miscellaneous in this section.

*2 This function is available for release numbers 3 and later.
Timers
Four timers are available. The timers are also used with the TLOG computation
function (/M1 and /PM1 options).
10
Timer Type
Absolute timer
Relative timer
Set the timer

A
Timeout
Ref. time
A
Time
Set the timer

Reset the timer
B
A: Interval
Time
11
B
B: Interval
Absolute Time Mode

The timer expires at the times determined by the reference time and the interval.
The reference time is set on the hour (00 to 23).
Example: Reference time: 00:00

Interval:
10 min

The timer expires at 0 hour, 0 hour 10 min, 0 hour 20 min, ... 23 hour 40
min, and 23 hour 50 min. For example, if the timer is set at 9 hour 36
min, the timer expires at 09 hour 40 min, 09 hour 50 min, 10 hour, and
so on.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-39
1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)
Relative Time Mode

The timer is started when the timer is set, and the timer expires every specified
interval. In this mode, the timer stops when a power failure occurs.
Example: Interval: 00:15

The timer expires every 15 minutes.
Match Time
You can set the time matching conditions for the four match time timers. Specify
the date/time using the method described below. For each condition, you can select
whether to use the condition once or continuously. The timers are also used with the
TLOG computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options).
Specified Date/Time
Y hour of the X day of the Z year
Y hour of the X day
Y hour of the X day of the week
Y hour
1-40
Description
The condition is met once a year. This function is available
for release numbers 3 and later.
The condition is met once a month.
The condition is met once a week.
The condition is met once a day.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Action
Select from the following actions.
Action
Memory start/stop
Memory start
Memory stop
Event trigger
Level/Edge*1
Level
Edge
Edge
Edge
Alarm acknowledge
Edge
Computation start/stop
Computation start*2
Computation stop*2
Computation reset*2
*2
Level
Edge
Edge
Edge
Save display data
Edge
Save event data
Edge
Message
Edge
Snapshot
Switch the display rate
Edge
Level
Manual sample
Reset the relative timer
Edge
Edge
Switch the display group
Edge
Flag*2
Level
Load the setup
Edge
Adjust the time
Edge
Display comment*3
Edge
Show favorite display*3
Edge
Reset alarm display*3
Edge
Description
Starts/stops memory sampling.
Starts the memory sampling.
Stops the memory sampling.
Applies a trigger for starting the event data
recording.
This is valid when recording event data in trigger
mode. See the next page.
Releases the alarm output.
This is valid when the use of the alarm ACK
operation is enabled.
It is used to start/stop the computation.
Starts the computation.
Stops the computation.
Resets the computed values on all computation
channels.
The display data being recorded is saved to the
internal memory as a file. This is the same function
as the data save operation using the FUNC key.
The event data being recorded is saved to the
internal memory as a file.
This is the same function as the data save
operation using the FUNC key.
Writes a message.
This action can be executed while memory
sampling is in progress.
Saves the screen image data.
Toggles between the trend interval and the
secondary trend interval.
This action is valid when the DX is configured to
use trend interval switching.
Executes manual sampling.
Resets the relative timer. The timer restarts from
that point.
Switches the display group when the trend, digital,
or bar graph is displayed.
The flag is zero for normal conditions and 1 when
an event occurs. The flag can be written in a
calculation expression of a computation channel.
Loads the setup data file in the root directory of the
CF card into the DX and updates the DX settings.
See below.
Synchronizes the time to the nearest hour. See the
next page.
Displays a preset text string (comment text block).
For information about how to set comment text
blocks, see section 5.18.
Shows the display that is registered to the Favorite
key. For information about how to register a display
to the Favorite key, see section 5.15.
An operation for when you are using a double lockin sequence with the alarm annunciator function.
Resets the alarm display. For information about
annunciator settings, see section 3.12.
*1 For a description of level and edge, see Miscellaneous in this section.

*2 This is an option.
Actions
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-41
Resetting the Relative Timer

If the event is set to output relay, internal switch, match time timer, or alarm, the
resetting of the timer is not considered a timeout. (The action is not executed even if
the timer is used as an event.)
Loading the Setup

Can be specified as an action only when the event is set to remote control input.
Loads the setup data file, LOAD1.PDL, LOAD2.PDL, or LOAD3.PDL, in the root
directory of the CF card into the DX and updates the DX settings.
You must create a setup file and save it to the CF card in advance.
Event Trigger Operation

When the event is set to output relay, internal switch, or alarm
If the output relay is activated, the internal switch is 1, or the alarm is occurring during
memory sampling, the event trigger is always activated. However, the number of times
the trigger is activated depends on the event data mode (single or repeat).
Time Adjustment
Time adjustment can be specified as an action only when the event is set to remote
control input. The internal clock of the DX is adjusted to the nearest hour through
remote control input.
Operation When Memory Sampling Is Stopped
Difference from the Nearest Hour Operation

00 min 00 s to 01 min to 59 s Truncates the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00 min 00 s.
02 min 00 s to 57 min to 59 s The time is not changed.
58 min 00 s to 59 min to 59 s Rounds up the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00 min 00 s.
Operation during Memory Sampling

If the time difference between the time the remote control signal is applied and the
nearest hour is within the preset time, the time is gradually corrected. Otherwise,
the time is corrected immediately. For details, see section 10.1.
1-42
IM 04L42B01-01E
Miscellaneous
The combinations that are checked in the table below can be used.
Event
Remote
Action
Alarm ACK
Reset the relative timer
Load the settings
Adjust the time
Reset the alarm display
Other actions
Output
Relay
Internal
Switch
Timer
Match
Time
Timer
Alarm
User
Key
Event
Edge
Switch
Event
Level
Switch
Level and Edge
Limitations on the Combinations of Events and Actions
2
3
4
The combinations of events and actions are summarized in the figure below.
Type
Event
Operation
Edge
Edge
Level

Action
Level
6
Status 1
Edge
Operation
executed
Status 2
Operation
executed
Level and Edge of the Remote Control Input Signal

Level
Edge
ON
OFF
250 ms or more
For contact inputs, the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to
closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open. For open collector
signals, the remote signal rises when the collector signal (voltage level of the remote
terminal) goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high.
You can reverse the above operations (see section 7.3 for details).
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-43
1.7
Security Function
Key Lock Function

Key lock is a function that prohibits key operations. You enter a password to release the
key lock.
Key Lock Items
Keys
Access to the storage medium
Setup loading*1
Function operation
Description
The following keys can be locked independently.
START key, STOP key, MENU key, USER key, DISP/ENTER
key (prohibits switching the operation screen), and Favorite
key.
Prohibits all operations listed below.
Manually save the data
Load the display data and event data files
Save/Load setup data files
List the files on the storage medium
Delete the files on the storage medium
Format the storage medium
Prevents external storage medium access for the purpose of
loading setup files (release number 3 or later).
The following FUNC key operations can be locked
independently.
[Alarm ACK], [Alarm DispRST]*1
[Message], [Free message], [Batch],
[Add Message], [Add Free Message],
[Text field]
[Math start]*2, [Math stop]*2, [Math reset]*2,
[Math ACK]*2
[Save display], [Save event],
[Manual sample], [Trigger], [Snap shot],
[Timer reset], [Save stop], [Edge Switch]*1,
[Match T Reset]*1
[E-Mail start], [E-Mail stop], [E-Mail test], [FTP test],
Operations to [Request] or [Release] network information
[SNTP], time setting (operation in the setting mode)
[Favorite regist], [4panel], [Standard display],
[Second speed], [Normal speed], [Builder]*1

*2 Optional.
1-44
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.7 Security Function
Login Function
Login and Logout

You enter your user name and password to log into the DX in the following cases.
Method of Accessing the DX
Keys
Communication
Login Required
When the power is turned ON
When logging in after exiting the basic setting mode
When logging in after logging out
When accessing the setting/measurement server, FTP
server, maintenance/test server, or Web server.
Only registered users can operate the DX. Access from communication functions can
also be limited to users registered here.
For the setting and operating procedure, see sections 8.2 and 8.3 respectively.
2
3
4
Auto Logout (When Logged in Using Keys)

When logged in using keys, you are automatically logged out when there is no key
operation for a specified time. If you are automatically logged out from the setting
mode, the setting changes are cancelled. You are not automatically logged out during
basic setting mode.
Operations That Can Be Carried Out When Logged Out

When logged out, you can switch the operation screen using the DISP/ENTER key,
arrow keys and Favorite key.
User Levels
5
6
7
A user can be an administrator or a user.
Administrator
Administrators can perform all operations on the DX. At least one administrator must
be registered to use the login function.
Item
Number of users that
can be registered
Range of operations
Login method
ID information
User
Item
Number of users that
can be registered
Range of operations
Login method
ID information
Description
5
All operations.
Select key operation, via communication, or Web server login.
User name and password
10
Description
30
Key operations
Operation
Basic setting mode
Setting mode
Customize menus
Other
Operation mode
Key operation
Limitation
Not allowed
Not allowed
Specified by user privileges
Specified by user privileges
User privileges
You can set operation privileges for each user. The privileges are
the same as with the key lock function.
Operations via communication
See the Communications Interface Users Manual.
Select key operation, via communication, or Web server login.
User name and password
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-45
1.8
Computation and Report Function (/M1 and

/PM1 Options)
Computation Function
Equations can be defined in computation channels by using the measured data or

computed data as variables. The result of the computation can be displayed or stored.
Channels Dedicated to Computations

Model
DX2004, DX2008
DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, DX2048
Number of Channels
12
60
Channel Numbers
101 to 112
101 to 160
Computation Types
In the table below, [001] represents the measured value of channel 001.
Type
Four arithmetic
operation
Power
Square root
Absolute value
Common logarithm
Natural logarithm
Exponent
Relational
computation
Example
001+002
001-002
001*002
001/002
001**002
SQR(001)
ABS(001)
LOG(001)
LN(001)
EXP(001)
001.LT.002
001.LE.002
001.GT.002
001.GE.002
001.EQ.002
001.NE.002
Logical computation
001AND002
001OR002
001XOR002
TLOG computation*
NOT001
TLOG.SUM(001)
TLOG.MAX(001)
TLOG.MIN(001)
TLOG.AVE(001)
TLOG.P-P(001)
Description of the Example

Determines the sum of [001] and [002].
Determines the difference between [001] and [002].
Determines the product of [001] and [002].
Divides [001] by [002].
Determines [001] to the power of [002]. y = Xn
Determines the square root of [001].
Determines the absolute value of [001].
Determines the common logarithm of [001]. y =
log10x
Determines the natural logarithm of [001]. y = lnx
Determines e to the power of [001]. y = ex
The result is 1 when [001] is less than [002] or 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is less than equal to [002]
or 0 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is greater than [002] or 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is greater than equal to
[002] or 0 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is equal to [002] or 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is not equal to [002] or 0
otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] and [002] are nonzero or
0 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] or [002] or both are
nonzero or 0 otherwise.
The result is 0 when [001] and [002] are nonzero or
1 otherwise.
The result is 1 when [001] is zero or 0 otherwise.
Determines the sum of [001].
Determines the maximum value of [001].
Determines the minimum value of [001].
Determines the average value of [001].
Determines the difference between the maximum
value and minimum value of [001].
* Usage is explained on page 1-42.
1-46
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Type
CLOG computation
1
Special computation
Example
Description of the Example
CLOG.SUM(001.002.003)
Determines the sum of [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.MAX(001.002.003)
Determines the maximum value among [001], [002],
and [003].
CLOG.MIN(001.002.003)
Determines the minimum value among [001], [002],
and [003].
CLOG.AVE(001.002.003)
Determines the average value of [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.P-P(001.002.003)
Determines the difference between the maximum
value and the minimum value among [001], [002], and
[003].
PRE(001)
Determines the previous value of [001].
101=HOLD(001.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried
out to derive the computed value. When [001] exceeds
K01, the previous computed value is held.
2
3
4
5
K01
Description
HOLD(a):b
When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed

value. Otherwise, the previous computed value is held.
RESET(101.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
out to derive the computed value. When [101] exceeds
K01, the previous computed value is reset, and TLOG.
SUM(001) is carried out.
K01
7
8
Reset
Description
RESET(a):b
When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed

value. Otherwise, the previous computed value is
reset, and b is carried out to derive the computed
value.
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
out to derive the computed value. When the computed
value is greater than or equal to K01, the computed
result is the excess (computed value K01).
K01
9
10
11
Description
CARRY(a):b
Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the

computed value X of b is less than a, the computed
result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a, the
computed result is the excess (X a).
Conditional equation [001.GT.K01?001:001+002]
When [001] is greater than K01, the computed value
is set to the value of [001]. Otherwise, the computed
value is set to the value of [001] + [002].
Description
[a?b:c]
If the computed result of a is nonzero, b is carried out.
Otherwise, c is carried out.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-47
Data That Can Be Used in Equations

The data listed below can be used.
Data
Measurement channel data
Computation Channel data*1
External input channel data*1
Constant
Communication input data
Status of the remote control*1 input
Notation
001, etc.
101, etc.
201, etc.
K01 to K60
C01 to C60
D01 to D08*2
Pulse input*1
P01 to P08*2
Q01 to Q08*2
S01 to S30
I01 to I36
F01 to F08
Internal switch status

Alarm output relay*1 status
Flag*1
Recording (memory sample) status M01 to M12
Description
Specify the computed data using a channel number.
A value.
Data set through communications.
The value is 1 when the remote control input is ON or 0 when
it is OFF.
Counts the number of pulses per scan interval.
Counts the number of pulses per second.
1 or 0.
The value is 1 when activated or 0 when deactivated.
1 or 0. Set the flag using the event action function (see section
1.6).
The value is 1 when recording is taking place and 0 when
recording is stopped. When the multi batch function is not
being used (release number 3 or later; /BT2 option), M01
indicates the recording (memory sample) status. When the
multi batch function is being used, M01 to M06 indicate the
recording (memory sample) statuses of each batch. The
recording status of an inactive batch group is 0. This function
is available for release numbers 3 and later.
*1 An option.
*2 Values such as 01 are terminal numbers.
Only the data that are checked in the table below can be used in TLOG, CLOG, and
PRE.
Data
Comp. Type
Ext.
Comp.
Constant Comm.
Meas.
Input
Input
Channel Channel Channel
Remote
Pulse
Internal
Switch
Relay
Flag
PRE
Other computations
Example: TLOG.SUM(S01), CLOG.AVE(001.002.K01), and PRE(S01) are not allowed.

TLOG
Record
status
CLOG
Processing Order of Computation

Computation is processed in order from the smallest event action number for each
scan interval.
Example: If you specify 102 = 101 + 103, the value of the previous scan interval is
used for the 103 value.
Handing of the Unit in Computations

In computations, measured values are handled as values without units. For example,
if the measured data from channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel
002 is 20 V, the computed result of 001 + 002 is 40.
Displaying the Computed Data

The computed data is displayed by setting a measurement span for each computation
channel. Computation channels can be displayed on various operation screens in the
same fashion as the measurement channels.
Alarm
Up to 4 alarms can be assigned to each computation channel. The alarm types are
high limit alarm (H), low limit alarm (L), delay high limit alarm (T), and delay low limit
alarm (t).
Saving Computed Data

As with the measured data, the computed data can be saved to display data, event
data, manual sampled data, and report data.
1-48
IM 04L42B01-01E
Computation Data Dropout
Numeric Display and Recording

The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999
excluding the decimal point. The decimal place corresponds to the decimal place of
the lower limit span of the computation channel. On the numeric display, values are
displayed if the computed result is within the above range regardless of the upper and
lower limits of span. The following table indicates special displays.
Display/Recording
+Over
Over
Computed Data Status

+Display over: When the computed result exceeds 99999999
+Computation over: When the value exceeds approximately 3.4
1038 in the middle of the computation
When a computation error* occurs (select +Over or Over.)
Display over: When the computed result is less than 9999999
Computation over: When the value is less than approximately 3.4
1038 in the middle of the computation
When a computation error* occurs (select +Over or Over.)
* Computation error occurs when the following computation is carried out.

X/0, SQR(X), or LOG(X)
If a channel number set to skip or Off is used in the equation
Rolling Average
The rolling average of the computed result of the equation specified for the
computation channel is determined, and the result is the computed data for that
channel. The number of samples and the sampling interval can be specified for each
computation channel. The rolling average is applied over the time corresponding to the
number of data samples the sampling interval. The maximum sampling interval is 1
hour, and the maximum number of samples is 1500.
1
A computation data dropout occurs if the computation is not completed within the scan
interval. For the operating procedure, see section 9.4.
The computation icon in the status display section turns yellow.
When a computation data dropout occurs, the computed data of the scan interval in
which the dropout occurred is set to the data immediately before the dropout.
If computation data dropout occurs frequently, lessen the load on the CPU by
reducing the number of computation channels or setting a longer scan interval.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Starting the Computation
You can configure the DX to start the computation when you press the START key.
Usage of TLOG Computations
11
Timers That Are Used
12
TLOG computation determines the sum, maximum, minimum, average, or the

difference between the maximum and minimum of a specific channel for each interval
determined by a timer.
The timer that is used is assigned to each channel.
Unit of Sum Computation
13
Set the sum scale when using sum computation (TLOG.SUM).

Select Off, /s, /min, or /h. For details, see the next page.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-49
Resetting the TLOG Computed Value

You can select whether to reset the TLOG computed value at each interval. The figure
below illustrates the reset operation for sum computation (TLOG.SUM).
Example: Result of the TLOG.SUM computation
Timer timeout
Reset: On
Reset
Reset
Reset

Reset: Off
When reset is On, the sum value is calculated over each interval. When set to Off, the
sum value from computation start is calculated.
Power Failure Operation, Handling of Error Data, and Handling of

Overflow Data
See page 1-42.
1-50
IM 04L42B01-01E
Report Function
Report Data Types
You can select from four types among maximum value, minimum value, average
value, sum value, and instantaneous value.
Report Type
Type
Hourly report
Daily report
Weekly report
Monthly report
This function is used to create hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports.
Description
Creates report data every hour on the hour for the previous one hour.
Creates report data every day at a specified time for the previous one day.
Creates report data every week at a specified time at a specified day of
the week for the previous one week.
Creates report data every month at a specified time at a specified day for
the previous one month.
3
4
Combinations of Reports That Can Be Created

You can select from hourly reports only, daily reports only, hourly and daily reports,
daily and weekly reports, and daily and monthly reports.
Source Channels
You can select from measurement channels, computation channels, and external input
channels. The report data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or Off.
Model
DX2004 and DX2008
DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048
Number of Report Channels

12
60
6
7
Unit of Sum Computation

In the sum computation, data are summed over the scan interval. However, for flow
values that have units /s, /min, /h, or /day a simple summation results in the actual
value not matching the computed result, because the scan interval and the unit of the
input values are different. In such cases, set the sum scale to match the unit of the
input value. In effect, the sum value with the same unit as that of the input value is
calculated.
For example, if the scan interval is 2 s, and the input value is 100 m3/min, a simple
summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute. However, if
the sum scale is set to /min, then 2 s/60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the
value is added giving a result that has an m3/min unit.
The following converting equations are used to compute the sum. The unit of the scan
interval is seconds.
Off:
(measured data every scan interval)
/s:
(measured data every scan interval) scan interval
/min: (measured data every scan interval) scan interval/60
/h:
(measured data every scan interval) scan interval/3600
/day: (measured data every scan interval) scan interval/86400
Displaying the Report Data

You can display the report data using keys.
8
9
10
11
12
13
Saving the Report Data

See section 1.4, Data Storage Function.
Numeric Display and Recording

The numeric range of the report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the
decimal point (except 3.41038 to 3.41038 for sum values).
For the data handling of special cases, see page 1-42.
For details on the report file format, see appendix 3.
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-51
App
Index
Special Data Handling

This section explains the handling of special data in TLOG computation, CLOG
computation, and reports.
Power Failure Operation (TLOG and Reports)

If a power failure occurs when the report function is enabled or in the middle of the
TLOG computation, the report operation and TLOG computation resume when the
DX recovers from the power failure. The operation varies depending on whether the
DX recovers from the power failure before or after the time to create a report or TLOG
data.
Time of Recovery
After the time to create the data
Before the time to create the data
Operation
The report or TLOG data is created immediately after the
DX recovers. The measured data up to the time of the
power failure is used. At the time the next report or TLOG
data is created, the data after the recovery is used.
After the DX recovers, report or TLOG data is created at
the normal time to create the data. The measured data
excluding the power failure period is used.
Error Data Handling (TLOG, CLOG, and Reports)

If an error occurs in the channel data, the error data is discarded, and the computation
continues. If all the data are in error, an error results.
The following types of data are considered error data.
Channels set to skip or Off.
The measured result on a measurement channels is error (A/D converter failure,
etc.).
The computed result on a computation channel is error.
The input of the measurement channel is in a burnout condition.
The external input channel is Off or there is no data (communication failure, etc.)
Handling of Overflow Data*

* Refers to over range on a measurement channel, computation overflow on a computation
channel, and over range of an external input channel.
For TLOG, CLOG, and Reports

When the channel data is overflow data, the DX handles the data as follows:
Computation Type
Average value or sum
value
Maximum, minimum,
Maximum minimum
Description
Set the handling to ERROR, SKIP, or LIMIT.
ERROR: Considers the data to be a computation error.
SKIP:
Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
LIMIT:
Replaces the data with the limit value and continues the
computation.
The limit value is the span upper or lower limit or the scale
upper or lower limit of the channel.
Set the handling to OVER or SKIP.
OVER:
Computes by using the overflow data.
SKIP:
For Multiplication and Relation Computation EQ and NE

Computation Type
Multiplication
.EQ.
.NE.
1-52
Computation
0*(+Over)
0*(Over)
(+Over)*0
(Over)*0
(+Over).EQ.(+Over)
(Over).EQ.(Over)
(+Over).NE.(+Over)
(Over).NE.(Over)
Computed Result
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
IM 04L42B01-01E
1.9
FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 and /F2

Options)
When a failure occurs in the CPU of the DX, a relay contact signal (1 signal) is output.
The relay is energized when the CPU is normal and de-energizes when a CPU failure
occurs. Therefore, relay output is carried out also when the power is turned OFF (including
a power failure). You cannot change this behavior.
Relay Operation
FAIL Output
2
3
4
NO
NC
During normal operation
NO
NC
When a failure occurs
NO
NC
When power is turned OFF
If a failure occurs, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-53
1.9 FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 and /F2 Options)
Status Output
Outputs the status below with a relay contact signal (1 relay). You can select whether
each status is output to the relay. The relay is energized when the status occurs. You
cannot change this behavior.
Status
Status of the internal
memory or CF card
Measurement error
Communication error
Description
Error in the internal memory.
Corrective Action
Contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer for
repairs.
When the auto save function to the CF card is On.
The free space on the CF card
Replace the CF card.
dropped to 10% of the total size (only
when the media FIFO (see section 1.4)
is disabled).
Error in the CF card.
Replace the CF card with
a normal one.
Format the CF card on the
DX (the data on the CF
card will be erased).
However, the status of the internal
Insert a CF card.
memory is output when the CF card is
not inserted.
10 MB or less of available space*
remaining in internal memory.
The number of files in internal memory
for which Auto Save to the CF card
has not been completed has exceeded
390.
When the auto save function to the CF card is Off.
Save the data in the internal
10 MB or less of available space*
remaining in internal memory.
memory to the CF card.
The number of files in internal memory
for which Manual Save has not been
completed has exceeded 390.
Error in the A/D converter.
YOKOGAWA dealer for
repairs.
Burnout is detected.
Replace the thermocouple
that has burned out.
A Modbus master or Modbus client
Check the error in the
communication error occurred.
Modbus master or Modbus
client screen and carry out
the corrective action.
A PROFIBUS-DP communication error
occurred.
Memory stop
Alarm occurrence
(Release number 3
or later)

An alarm has occurred.

YOKOGAWA dealer for
repairs.
Start the data acquisition.
Check the alarm.
* The internal memorys available space refers to the following quantities.

Unused regions.
Regions of data for which Auto Save or Manual Save (see page 1-33) has been
completed.
Relay Operation
NO
NC
During normal operation
1-54
NO
NC
NO
NC
When specified status occurs When power is turned OFF

IM 04L42B01-01E
1.10 Other Functions
1
Time Related Functions
Time Correction
The DX internal clock can be changed in the following manner.
Method
Key operation
Event action function
SNTP client function
Description
Sets the DX internal clock to the specified time.
Synchronizes the DX internal clock to the nearest hour.
Sets the DX internal clock to the time retrieved from an SNTP
server.
Time Correction Operation

The time correction operation varies depending on whether the memory sampling is in
progress or not.
Status
Memory sampling stopped
Memory sampling
Operation
The DX internal clock is changed immediately.
The DX internal clock is gradually corrected. While the time is
being gradually adjusted, the date/time in the status display
section is displayed in yellow.
Operation of Gradually Correcting the Internal Clock

If the time deviation between the time of the DX internal clock and the correct time (the
specified time) is within a specified value, the DX clock is adjusted gradually at 40 ms
for each second. Otherwise, the clock is corrected immediately. The maximum value
of time deviation (tm in the figure below) can be selected in the range of 10 s to 5 min.
Time specified using keys or
Time on retrieved from an SNTP server
the DX
Time when the remote control

signal is applied
Nearest (Time on the DX)
hour
Time deviation
tm
tm
Range in which the time is gradually

adjusted
Example:

6
7
8
Time deviation
tm
tm
Range in which the time is gradually

adjusted
When changing the time to 12 hours 55 minutes 35 seconds when the

internal clock is 12 hours 55 minutes 32 seconds
The time deviation of 3 seconds is adjusted 40 ms per second. The
internal clock will be synchronized to the specified time 75 seconds later.
10
11
Date Format
You can select the display format of the data from 2005/09/28, 09/28/2005,
28/09/2005, and 28.09.2005.
12
Time Zone
Set the time difference between the location where the DX is used and GMT.
13
DST (Daylight Saving Time)

If you are using the DX in an area with daylight saving time, enter the daylight
saving time starting and ending dates, and the DX will automatically change the time
accordingly.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-55
System Display
Displays the total number of inputs on the DX, the size of the internal memory, the
communication functions, the external storage drive, the options, the remote controller
ID, the operation of the devices connected to the USB port (/USB1 option), the MAC
address, and the firmware version number.
Language
The displayed language can be set to English, Japanese, German, French, or, Chinese.
VGA Output Terminal (/D5 Option)

Shows the DX display on a monitor through the RGB output.
24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter (/TPS4 or /TPS8 Option)

Provides 24-VDC power supply to up to four (/TPS4) or eight (/TPS8) two-wire system
transmitters. The measured values of the transmitter correspond to a current signal of
4 to 20 mA on the same cable. Therefore, the signal can be connected to the DX input
terminal and displayed.
DX
+
Current
Transmitter power
supply output terminal
Input terminal
Transmitter
Shunt resistor: 250
Easy Text Entry Option (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)

You can control the DX using the keys on the remote control terminal.
Set the remote controller ID on the DX and the ID number on the remote control
terminal to the same value.
You can set a value between 0 and 31 for the remote controller ID and ID number.
By changing the ID number on the remote control terminal, you can control DXs with
different remote controller IDs from a single remote control terminal.
Infrared signal
output section
Light-receiving
section
1-56
IM 04L42B01-01E
USB Interface (/USB1)
External Input Channels (/MC1)

These channels handle measured data of other devices that is read with the
communication function. There are 240 channels available. As with measurement
channels, the data of these channels can be displayed and saved.
For the setting procedure, see sections 10.1 and 10.2.
You can connect keyboards, barcode readers , or USB flash memory to two USB ports,
one on the front and one on the back of the DX.
You can operate the DX using a keyboard or barcode reader.
You can save measured data and setup data to the USB flash memory and also load
from it.
For the operating procedure, see sections 2.11 and 2.12.
2
3
4
Temperature Unit
You can set unit when measuring temperature with the thermocouple or RTD to C or F.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
1-57
Chapter 2
2.1
Common Operations
Setting the Date/Time
Set the date/time. If you are using the DX in a region that uses DST, specify the date/time
for switching between DST and standard time.
Common Operations
Setup Screen
Date/Time
P
ress MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Date/Time >
Time Settings
4
5
6
DST
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Date/Time >
Daylight savings time
8
9
10
11
Setup Items
Time set
Enter the date and time and press DISP/ENTER.
12
Daylight savings time > Use/Not
To set a daylight saving time period, select Use.
Daylight savings time > Start time
Specify the date and time when daylight saving time starts.
Item
Month
Day order (week order)
Day of the week
Hour of the day
Description
Specify the month.
Specify the week within the month. Specify [Last] for the last week in
the month.
Specify the day of the week.
Specify the hour using a value from 0 to 23.
13
App
Daylight savings time > End time
Specify the date and time when daylight saving time ends. The settings here are the
same as those for Start time.
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-1
Index
2.2
Setting the Time Difference from GMT

Set the time zone of the region in which the DX will be used. Make sure to set this value
if you are using the Internet network functions or the DST function.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Time settings
Setup Items
Date & Time > Time zone
Set the time zone of the region in which the DX will be used in terms of the time
difference from GMT. Specify a value in the range of 1300 to 1300 (where the first
two digits denote the hour and the last two digits denote the minute). A negative value
indicates that the local time is behind the GMT.
Example: The standard time in Japan is ahead of the GMT by 9 hours. In this case,
enter 900.
2-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.3
Setting the Time Correction Operation during

Memory Sampling
This function gradually corrects the time when the time is changed while Memory
Sampling is in progress.
For a description of the time correction operation, see section 1.10.
2
Common Operations
Setup Screen
4
5
6
7
Setup Items
Time deviation limit
Current time
Specified time
Time deviation limit
When the time deviation between the time on the DX and the specified time is within
(the value specified here), the time on the DX is gradually corrected. Otherwise, the
clock is corrected immediately.
Settings
10 s to 5 min
Off
Description
The time deviation limit.
Disables the function that gradually corrects the time.
10
11
Example: If Time deviation limit is set to 10s and the time on the DX is 10 hours 21
minutes 15 seconds, the time on the DX is gradually corrected if the specified time is
between 10 hours 21 minutes 5 seconds and 10 hours 21 minutes 25 seconds.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-3
2.4
Setting the Date Format

Select the display format of the date.
Setup Screen
Setup Items
Date format
Settings
Display Example
(November 30, 2005)
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
D.M.Y
2005/11/30
11/30/2005
30/11/2005
30.11.2005
Display Example of the Time at the

Grid Position in the Trend Display
(example: 8 Oclock on November 30)*
11/30 08
11/30 08
30/11 08
30.11 08
* Only if the trend interval is set greater than or equal to 1 h/div. A function available on DXs
with release number 2 or later.
Applied Range
The format is applied to the date displayed on the screen. It does not change the
date format on the setup screen of the date/time, the date in the output data via
communications, the date saved along with the data, and the date used in the data file
names.
2-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.5
Viewing the DX Information
Show the DX information on the system information screen and the network information
screen.
Common Operations
Procedure
Displaying System Information Screen
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.

The FUNC key menu appears.
2. Press the System info soft key.
The system information screen is displayed.
Displaying Network Information Screen

2. Press the Network info soft key.
The network information screen is displayed.
Explanation
System Information Screen
ANALOG
Number of measurement channels
(C) denotes the clamped input
terminals (/H2 option)
MATH
Number of computation channels
(/M1 and /PM1 options)
EXTCH
Number of external input channels
(/MC1 option)
MEMORY
Internal memory size
OPTIONs
8
9
Remote controller ID
(/KB1 and /KB2 options)
10
MAC address
Version
Firmware version
The following items are displayed:

Number of measurement channels.
Number of computation channels.
Internal memory size
Options
Remote controller ID (/KB1 and /KB2 options)
Connected USB HID devices (/USB1 option)
MAC address
Firmware version
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-5
2.5 Viewing the DX Information
Network Information Screen

The following values set on the DX are displayed.
IP address, MAC address, DNS server, host name, and domain name
There are two pages of network information. Use the left and right arrow keys to
switch the screen. The following items are displayed:
IP address
Subnet mask IP address
Default gateway IP address
MAC address
DNS server IP address
Host name
Domain name
The server function setting conditions listed below.
FTP, Web, Modbus, SNTP, and EtherNet/IP
PROFIBUS-DP information (/CP1 option)
Node address and serial number (maintenance information)
2-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.6
Changing the Displayed Language
Set the displayed language.
Setup Screen
Common Operations
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating environment
3
4
5
6
Setup Items
Operating environment > Language

Set the displayed language to English, Japanese, German, French, or Chinese
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-7
2.7
Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight

Saver
Change the LCD brightness. In addition, set the backlight saver function to prolong the
service life of the LCD backlight.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend,
Bar graph, LCD, Monitor
Setup Items
LCD > Brightness
Select a value from 1 to 6 (2 by default). Larger the value, brighter the display
becomes.
LCD > Backlight saver > Mode

Settings
Off
Dimmer
Timeoff
Description
Disables the backlight saver
Dims the display if there is no operation for a given time.
Turns the backlight OFF if there is no operation for a given time.
LCD > Backlight saver > Saver time

Select a value from 1 min to 1 h. If the specified time elapses without any key
operation or alarm occurrence, the LCD backlight switches to the specified mode.
LCD > Backlight saver > Restore

Settings
Key
Key+Alm
Description
The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed.
The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed or
when an alarm occurs.
Note
If the backlight is dimmed or turned OFF by the backlight saver function, pressing any key
on the DX causes the backlight to return to the original brightness. In this operation, the key
does not perform its intended function.
The degradation of the brightness and the discoloration of the screen (become yellowish)
tend to progress faster as the brightness is set higher. Extended use at an unnecessary high
setting should be avoided. It is also recommended that you use the backlight saver function.
2-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.8
Initializing Settings and Clearing the Internal

Memory
Initialize the settings to default values. In addition, clear the data in the internal memory.
For the default settings, see the DX2000 Operation Guide (IM04L42B01-02E).
setting mode), and select the File/Initialize tab > Initialize
Common Operations
Setup Screen
2
3
4
5
6
7
Setup Items
Initialize
Settings
Clear 1
Clear 2
Clear 3
Description
Initializes the settings of the basic setting mode and setting mode and
clears the data in the internal memory.
Initializes the settings of the setting mode and clears the data in the
internal memory.
Clears the data in the internal memory.
8
9
Data in the Internal Memory That Is Cleared

Display data, event data, manual sampled data, report data (/M1 and /PM1
options), and log information.
10
Procedure
1. Press the Clear 1, Clear 2, or Clear 3 soft key.
11
2. Press DISP/ENTER.
A confirmation window opens.
3. Select Yes and press DISP/ENTER.
The specified operation is executed, and the DX returns to the operation mode.
12
If you do not want to initialize, select No and press DISP/ENTER.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-9
2.9
Outputting the DX Status via the Relay Contact

(/F1 and /F2 Options)
A signal is output to a dedicated relay when an error occurs in the DX CPU. In addition, a
signal is output to a different relay when the a specified status occurs.
For a description of the FAIL/status output function, see section 1.7.
Setup Screen
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Status relay
Setup Items
Memory/Media status
On: Outputs the internal memory and CF card statuses to the relay.
Measurement error
On: Outputs a relay signal when a measurement error occurs.
Communication error
On: Outputs a relay signal when a communication error occurs.
Memory stop
On: Outputs to the relay when the memory sampling is stopped.
Alarm (Release number 3 or later)

On: Outputs a relay signal when one or more alarms occur. Alarms whose indications
are hidden (see section 3.6 for details) do not cause relay signal output. Relay output
ceases after all alarms are released (if no other relay output conditions are met).
Procedure
FAIL Output
There are no settings or operations that are required. A signal is output to the relay
contact when a CPU error is detected. A signal is also output to the relay contact when
the DX is turned OFF.
Status Relay
A signal is output to the relay contact when a specified status occurs.
2-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control

Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)
Handling Precautions
Preparing the DX
2
Common Operations
If the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal or the light-receiving
section on the DX becomes dirty or receives scratches, it can hinder the transmission/
reception of the infrared signal. Clean the infrared signal output section of the remote
control terminal or the light-receiving section on the DX.
When cleaning, wipe using a dry soft cloth. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or
thinner, since these may cause discoloring and deformation.
Do not apply shock to the remote control terminal.
Do not operate the remote control terminal with wet hands.
The transmission/reception sensitivity of the infrared signal may deteriorate if used in
the following types of locations.
Location where the receiver of the DX is exposed to direct sunlight or fluorescent lamp.
Near magnetic field sources such as a transceiver.
If you carry the remote control unit in your pocket, for example, keys may be pressed
unintentionally and cause the DX to be controlled. Handle the remote control terminal
properly so that keys are not pressed inadvertently.
When you are near the DX, press the keys on the remote control terminal only when
controlling the DX. If you are going to press the keys on the remote control terminal
but do not wish to control the DX, take measures so that the signal does not reach
the DX such as by covering the infrared signal output section of the remote control
terminal.
The distance at which the DX can be controlled using the remote control terminal
varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the
presence or absence of external light.
There is a possibility that DXs with the same remote controller ID be controlled
simultaneously. It is recommended that different remote controller IDs be set on each DX.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Set the remote controller ID.
Setup Screen
10
11
12
13
Remote Controller ID
Select the remote controller ID from 0 to 31. When not using the remote control
terminal, select Off.
App
Checking the Remote Controller ID
You can check the DX remote controller ID on the system information screen.
See section 2.5.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Index
2-11
2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)
Preparing the Remote Control Terminal

Names of Parts
Keys
Battery cover

Infrared signal
output section
Loading Batteries
1. While pressing the projection
on the battery cover, open
the cover.
Positive polarity
Positive polarity

2. Load the batteries.
3. Close the battery cover.
Setting the ID Number

Set the ID number of the remote control terminal to match the remote controller ID of
the DX that you are to operate.
The ID number of the remote control terminal is not displayed anywhere. If you are
not sure which ID number the remote control terminal is set to, set the appropriate ID
number according to the following procedure.
1. Press ID.
2. Enter the ID number (0 to 31) by pressing the keys
from 1 (A1) to 0 (N0).
Example For ID number 16
Operation: Press 1 (A1) and 6 (G6).
3. Press ID.
Note
If you enter an ID number other than 0 through 31, the ID number retains the original setting.
Pressing the ID key once causes the remote control terminal to enter the ID number setup
mode. If none of the keys on the remote control terminal is pressed for 8 s, the remote
control terminal automatically exits from the ID number setup mode. In this case, the ID
number of the remote control terminal retains the original setting.
If you remove the batteries, the ID number is reset to 0. After loading the batteries, set the
appropriate ID number again.
Affixing the ID Number Label

If you are using the remote control terminal with a fixed ID number (such as when
there is a one-to-one correspondence between the DX to be controlled and the remote
control terminal), you can enter the ID number on the label and affix the label on the
remote control terminal.
Affix the ID number label on the battery cover
of the remote control terminal.
2-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
Controlling the DX
Control the DX by pointing the infrared output section of the remote control terminal to
the light-receiving section on the DX. Control the DX while checking the results on the
DX screen.
Note
Common Operations
The remote control terminal cannot be used to control the Favorite key.
When a specific key operation is possible on the DX, the corresponding key on the remote
control terminal is activated. For example, the operation for entering a character string is
activated when a window for entering a character string is displayed on the DX screen.
You cannot control the DX using the remote control terminal, if the remote control terminal is
in the ID number setup mode.
3
4
Correspondence with the DX Keys
Character input
keys
Up arrow key
User key
DISP/ENTER key
Right arrow key
ESC key
Left arrow key
Hold down SHIFT

and press F3/F7.
Hold down SHIFT
and press F2/F6.
Hold down SHIFT
and press F1/F5.
Down arrow key

MENU key
FUNC key
Character input
keys
6
7
Soft keys
START key
Character type switch key for character input keys (see the next page)
STOP key
Delete key
Deletes the character at the cursor position when inputting characters.
Space key
Enters a space at the cursor position when inputting characters.
Entering Strings
When a character input window is displayed on the DX screen, pressing the A/a/1
key switches the character type assigned to the character input keys as shown in the
following figure.

Uppercase alphabet
characters and symbols
Lowercase alphabet
characters and symbols
Numbers
Uppercase Alphabet Characters and Symbols/Lowercase Alphabet

Characters and Symbols
13
Each time the MARK key is pressed, the displayed symbol switches
in the following order.
The display switches in a cyclic pattern.
IM 04L42B01-01E
11
12
Alphabet (A to Z or a to z)
Number of times
the key is pressed
Symbol
10
10
11
App
12 13
*
2-13
Index
Numbers
Number (1 to 9 and 0)
Decimal point
However, when setting a constant to be used in the computation
on the DX with the /M1 or /PM1 option, the display switches
in the order ., +, and E each time the key is pressed.
The display switches in a cyclic pattern.
Minus sign
When a window for entering an equation is displayed on the DX with the /M1 math
option, the character strings of computing elements are assigned to each key as shown
in the following figure.
The character string switches in the following order each time the key is pressed. The
display switches in a cyclic pattern.
key
Number of times the key is pressed
2-14
.EQ.
.NE.
.GT.
.LT.
AND
NOT
XOR
OR
SQR(
ABS(
LOG(
EXP(
PRE(
RESET(
CARRY(
HOLD(
TLOG.AVE( TLOG.MAX( TLOG.MIN( TLOG.SUM( TLOG.P-P(
CLOG.AVE( CLOG.MAX( CLOG.MIN( CLOG.SUM( CLOG.P-P(
.GE.
.LE.
LN(
IM 04L42B01-01E
Troubleshooting
The DX does not react when you try to control it using the remote control terminal.
Are the correct batteries loaded in the remote control terminal?

Check the voltage and polarity of the batteries.
Are the batteries flat?

Does the ID number of the remote control terminal match the remote
controller ID of the DX that you are trying to control?
Check the remote controller ID on the DX, and set the ID number of the remote control
terminal to the same value.
Is the remote control terminal in ID number setup mode (condition in

which the ID key is pressed once)?
Common Operations
Replace the batteries with new ones.
3
4
Wait 8 seconds without pressing any keys to exit from ID number setup mode.
Is the remote control terminal too far away from the DX?
Get closer to the DX. Control from as close to the front of the DX as possible.
Is a strong light hitting the light-receiving section of the DX?

Take measures to prevent strong light from hitting the light-receiving section of the DX.
Is there a magnetic field source such as a transceiver nearby?

Move the magnetic field source away from the DX.
Is the infrared output section of the remote control terminal or the lightreceiving section on the DX dirty?
Clean them.
6
7
Is the DX in a condition that allows the relevant key operation?

Check the condition of the DX, and start from an operation that is possible.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-15
2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode

Reader (/USB1 Option)
This section explains how to connect and use a USB keyboard or barcode reader.
Barcode readers can be used if the DX release number is 3 or later.
Connecting and Disconnecting a Keyboard or Barcode Reader

Connection
1. Connect the keyboard or barcode reader to a DX USB port.
POWER
USB
CF CARD
USB port
A display appears asking whether you have connected a keyboard or a barcode

reader.
2. Select the type of device that you have connected, and then DISP/ENTER.
You can now use the device that you connected.

*If you change the display without selecting a device, the device type is automatically set to
keyboard.
*This setting is unrelated to the connection of USB flash memory.
Removal
Remove the keyboard or barcode reader cable from the DX USB port.
Note
You can connect and remove keyboards and barcode readers at any time, regardless of the
display and whether the DX is on or off.
You can only connect one human interface device (HID) to the DX. You cannot use a
keyboard and a barcode reader at the same time.
Use a keyboard appropriate for the language setting on the DX.
The statuses of the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys are retained even if the USB keyboard is
removed (release number 2 and later). However, if a bar code reader is connected, the key
statuses will be initialized to off.
The device that is currently connected is indicated in the system information display (see
section 2.5 for details).
2-16
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 Option)
Operating from the Keyboard

Use the keyboard while watching the DX screen. An operation that can be carried out on
the DX can be carried out from the keyboard.
Example: Switch to setting mode
2
Common Operations
When the DX is in the operation mode, press Ctrl+M.

The DX switches to setting mode, and the setting menu appears.
Mapping of the Keys on the DX to the Keys on the Keyboard

Keys on the Keyboard
104 Keyboard (US)for the PC
Keys on the DX
Enter
Num Enter
Esc
F1 to 7
F9
F12
Left-Windows
Right-Windows
Application
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+P
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+M
Ctrl+F
Tab, Shift+Tab
DISP/ENTER
Left arrow key
Up arrow key
Down arrow key
Right arrow key
DISP/ENTER
ESC
Soft key 1 to soft key 7
FUNC
Hold down FUNC for 3 seconds
MENU
MENU
Favorite key
START
STOP
USER
MENU
Favorite key
Arrow keys*
4
5
6
7
* Press Tab to move the cursor to the next item, or Shift+Tab to move to the previous item.
However, this does not work in the following screens:
Operation screens, Menu screens for Setting mode and Basic setting mode, screens for
entering values and characters, Menu customize and Save/Load screens in Setting
mode, and Load setting, Initialize screen in Basic setting mode
Entering Alphabets, Numbers, and Symbols

When alphabets, numbers, and symbols can be entered on the DX, you can enter
them from the keyboard. The operation is the same as with normal keys. However,
symbols that cannot be used on the DX are invalid.
Symbols That Can Be Entered Using the Keyboard

The symbols below can be entered. However, symbols that cannot be used on the
DX are invalid. For example, the characters &, *, /, :, and ? cannot be used in the data
save destination directory name.

&
10
11
* Press ^ on the keyboard to enter the temperature degree symbol.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-17
Invalid Keys
Keys enclosed in frames are invalid.
The 104 Keyboard for a PC (US)
2-18
IM 04L42B01-01E
Barcode Reader Operations (Release number 3 or later)
Note
Barcode reader operations are treated as key operations.

Barcode reader operations except the operation using UD command are limited by the
settings of the key lock and login functions.
3
4
Barcode Reader Settings
Configure the barcode reader to the settings in the table below.

USB host parameter
USB device type
USB keyboard type
2
Common Operations
When you scan communication commands with a barcode reader, the DX will respond
as follows.
The DX will accumulate key codes until it reaches a terminator. Then it will execute
the accumulated character string. The terminator is the enter key code.
The DX can accumulate up to 200 characters, not including the terminator. The DX
will process a character string when it reaches 200 characters in length.
The DX can read ASCII characters (128 characters: numbers, symbols, and
uppercase and lowercase letters of the alphabet).
Setting
HID keyboard simulation
English (U.S.) standard USB keyboard
How to Use
Follow the standard operating procedure for the barcode reader that you are using.
Operate the barcode reader while checking the status of the DX. An operation can be
carried out using the barcode reader when it can be carried out on the DX.
Commands
Scan the communication commands encoded in bar codes to operate the DX with
a barcode reader. The communication commands that you can use are listed in
the table below. For information about communication command syntax, see the
Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L41B01-17E).
Command
KE
PS
EV
MS
TL
IR
AK
CV
EM
CU
BJ
BV
BT
BU
CL
LO
LI
MA
YC
EJ
YO
UD
IM 04L42B01-01E
Description
Performs key operations
Starts or stops memory sampling
Starts manual sampling
Causes triggers to occur
Takes snapshots
Saves display data
Saves event data
Writes messages
Starts or stops computation
Resets computation
Clears the computation data dropout display
Resets the relative timer
Releases alarm output (alarm ACK)
Switches the trend interval
Starts or stops e-mails
Manually recovers the Modbus master or client
Writes free messages
Inserts characters
Sets batch names
Sets batch comments
Executes manual SNTP
Reads the setting mode setup data
Saves setup data
Resets the single match time timer
Clears measured and computed data and initializes setup data
Changes login passwords
Loads setup files (for basic setting mode)
Switches the screen
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
2-19
Command Example
The command to write message number 8 in group 1 is: MS8,GRPUP,1. There must
be a terminator (an enter key code) at the end.
Note
You can read multiple commands (as many as 10) by putting sub delimiters (semicolons)
between them.
Example: PS0;MS8,GRPUP,1
When you enter commands using bar codes, you can enter them separated or all at
once. You can separate commands however you want to. For example, you can separate
the command to write message number 8 in group 1, MS8,GRPUP,1, into the following
components: MS > 8 > , > GRPUP > , > 1 > ENTER key code.
If you use a barcode reader that automatically attaches a footer and a header to every
transmission, the result will be the same if MS is set to the header, the enter key code is set
to the footer, and you scan 8,GRPUP,1.
When the DX receives an unsupported key code, it clears all of the key codes that it has
accumulated so far.
2-20
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.12 Using the USB Flash Memory (/USB1 Option)
Connecting/Removing a USB Flash Memory
Connecting a USB Flash Memory

2. In operation mode, possible operations are shown. Select the desired operation
using the arrow keys and press DISP/ENTER.
When set to auto save
Common Operations
1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the DX.
3
4
5
6
7

When set to manual save
8
9

10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-21
2.12 Using the USB Flash Memory (/USB1 Option)

Setting
Save Manual
DATA SAVE MODE
Load Settings
Cancel
Description
Saves unsaved data in the internal memory to the USB flash memory.
Switches to the DATA SAVE MODE display. For the procedure to save
the internal memory data, see section 4.8.
This item only appears when the DX is configured to display DATA SAVE
MODE in the display menu (release number 2 or later)*.
* If the DX is configured so that any of the items below are shown in the
display selection menu, DATA SAVE MODE can be executed. You can
change the items shown in the display selection menu using the MENU
CUSTOMIZE function.
SELECT SAVE, M.SAMPLE SAVE, REPORT SAVE, or ALL SAVE
Moves to the setup load display of the setting mode. For the procedure
to load the setup data, see section 6.9.
Load Settings will not be displayed:
When Media/USB loading is locked (see chapter 8 for details).
When the DX is accessing storage media (formatting, saving, or FTP
communication).
Closes the operation selection window.
Removing the USB Flash Memory

2. Press the Media eject soft key and then the USB soft key.
A message Media can be removed safely. appears.
3. Remove the USB flash memory.
Note
One USB flash memory can be connected.

Be sure to carry out the procedure above when removing the USB flash memory. If you
remove the USB memory without performing the above procedure, the data stored on it
could be damaged.

The following data save/load and file operations can be carried out.
Save/Load setup data files (see section 6.9).
Save display data and event data files (see sections 4.8 and 6.4).
Load display data and event data files (see section 6.8).
List files and delete files (see section 6.7).
Format (see section 6.7).
2-22
IM 04L42B01-01E
2.13 Setting the Decimal Point Type (Release

number 3 or later)
You can set the decimal point type for the display and files saved in text format.
Setup Screen
Common Operations
MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic setting
mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating environment
3
4
5
6
Setup Items
Decimal Point Types

Setting
Point
Comma
Display Example
1234.56
1234,56
Explanation
Decimal Point Types
The decimal point type setting affects the following kinds of files and displays. The
decimal point of any file or setting not listed below (the setup screen for example) is
displayed using a period.
Type
File output
Display
Webpage
E-mails
Item
Manual sampled data file
Report file
Trend display
Digital display
Bar graph display
Overview display
Historical trend
Report data display
All channel display
The instantaneous value data in alarm e-mails and scheduled e-mails.
The report data in report e-mails
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
2-23
2.14 Showing or Hiding the Menu Item for Switching

from Setting Mode to Basic Setting Mode
(Release number 3 or later)
Set whether or not to display a menu item in the setting mode menu for switching to
basic setting mode.
Setup Screen
mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating environment
Setup Items
Basic Setting Mode > Menu display
Setting
On
Off
Description
Displays Basic setting mode in the setting mode menu.
Basic setting mode is not displayed in the setting mode menu.
Operations
When Basic setting mode appears in the setting mode menu, you can perform the
following operation:
1. Press MENU and select the Menu tab > Basic setting mode. Then press DISP/
ENTER.
2. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER.

The basic setting mode menu appears.
Note
Regardless of this setting, you can switch from setting mode to basic setting mode by holding
down the FUNC key for 3 seconds.
2-24
IM 04L42B01-01E
Chapter 3
3.1
Setting the Scan Interval and the Integration

Time of the A/D Converter
Select the scan interval and the integration time of the A/D converter.
For a description of the scan interval and the integration time of the A/D converter, see
section 1.1.
Setup Screen
P
ress MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > A/D, Memory
3
4
5
6
7
Setup Items
Scan interval > Scan mode
Normal: Measures at the normal mode scan interval.
FAST: Measures at a scan interval of 25 ms (DX2004 and DX2008) or 125 ms (DX2010,
DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048).
Scan interval > Scan interval
8
9
The selectable settings appear.
Scan interval > A/D integrate

When the scan mode is set to Normal, select the A/D integration time as necessary.
Only the selectable settings are displayed.
Settings
Auto
50Hz
60Hz
100ms
600Hz
Description
The DX automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the integration
time to 16.7 ms and 20 ms for 60 Hz and 50 Hz, respectively. Fixed to 20 ms on
/P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply.
Sets the integration time to 20 ms.
Sets the integration time to 16.7 ms.
Sets the integration time to 100 ms (when the scan interval is 2 s or 5 s).
The A/D integration time for fast sampling mode. You cannot change this value.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-1
3.2
Setting the Burnout Detection and the

Reference Junction Compensation of the
Thermocouple Input
Set the function that detects burnouts in the sensor for thermocouple input and 1-5V
input and the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple.
Setup Screen
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Burnout, RJC
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
Select the target channels.
Burnout set > Mode

Detects thermocouple and 1-5V input sensor burnouts.
Settings
Off
Up
Down
Description
Does not detect burnouts in the sensor.
When the sensor burns out, the measured result is set to +over range. The
measured value displays Burnout.
For 1-5V input, the DX assumes that the sensor has burned out when the
measured value exceeds the scale upper limit by 10% of the scale width.
(Example: When the measured value is greater than 110 when the scale is from
0 to 100)
When the sensor burns out, the measured result is set to over range. The
measured value displays Burnout.
For 1-5V input, the DX assumes that the sensor has burned out when the
measured value falls below the scale upper limit by 5% of the scale width.
(Example: When the measured value is less than 5 when the scale is from 0 to
100)
RJC > Mode

Sets the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple input. Select
Internal or External.
Settings
Internal
External
Description
Uses the reference junction compensation function of the DX.
Uses an external reference junction compensation function. When set to
External, Volt is displayed.
RJC > Volt

The compensation voltage to be added to the input. Set the value in the range of
20000 V to 20000 V.
3-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.3
Setting the Input Range
Set the input range for each channel.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Range, Alarm
3
5
6
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
Range > Mode
Settings
Skip
Volt, TC, RTD, DI, 1-5V
Delta, Scale, Sqrt
Description
Not measured.
Input type. Represents DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, ON/OFF
input, and 1-5V inputs, respectively.
Difference computation, linear scaling, and square root computation.
8
9
Set the items with check marks in the table below according to the mode value.
Setup Item
Type
Range
Span Lower
Span Upper
Scale Lower
Scale Upper
Unit
Ref. CH
Low-cut
Low-cut value
Volt
TC
RTD
DI
Mode
Delta Scale
Sqrt
1-5V
10
Skip
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-3
3.3 Setting the Input Range
Range > Type

Input type when Mode is Delta or Scale. See the description on Mode above.
Range > Range

Input type details.
Setting
20mV
60mV
200mV
2V
6V
20V
20V
Pt
JPt
Level
Contact
1-5V
Setting
Kp
PLATI
PR
NiMo
W/WRe
N2
XK
Pt50
Ni1
Ni2
Ni3
J263
Cu53
Cu100
Pt25
Pt100G
Cu100G
Cu50G
Cu10G
Pt46G
Input Type
Notes
20.000 mV to 20.000 mVDC Standard

60.00 mV to 60.00 mVDC
200.00 mV to 200.00 mVDC
2.000 V to 2.000 VDC
6.000 V to 6.000 VDC
20.000 V to 20.000 VDC
50.00 V to 60.00 VDC
Pt100
JPt100
ON/OFF(Voltage)
ON/OFF(Contact
0.800V to 5.200V
Input Type
Kp vs Au7Fe
PLATINEL
PR40-20
NiNiMo
W/WRe26
Type N (AWG14)
XK GOST*
Pt50
Ni100 (SAMA)
Ni100 (DIN)
Ni120
J263*B
Cu53
Cu100: a = 0.00425 at 0C
Pt25
Pt100 GOST*
Cu100 GOST*
Cu50 GOST*
Cu10GOST*
Pt46 GOST*
Notes
/N3
option
Setting
R
S
B
K
E
J
T
N
W
L
U
WRe
Setting
Cu1
Cu2
Cu3
Cu4
Cu5
Cu6
Cu25
Notes
Input Type
Type R
Type S
Type B
Type K
Type E
Type J
Type T
Type N
Type W
Type L
Type U
type WRe
Input Type
Standard
Cu10 (GE)
Cu10 (L&N)
Cu10 (WEED)
Cu10 (BAILEY)
Cu10: a = 0.00392 at 20C
Cu10: a = 0.00393 at 20C
Cu25: a = 0.00425 at 0C
Notes
/N1
option
* A function available on DXs with release number 3 or later.
Range > Span Lower, Span Upper

Input range. The selectable range is displayed on the screen.
Note
You cannot set the same value to Span Lower and Span Upper.
When the Mode is 1-5V or Sqrt, Span Lower must be less than Span Upper.
Range > Scale Lower, Scale Upper

Input range after converting the unit.
The selectable range is from 30000 to 30000. The decimal place is determined by
the Scale Lower setting. It can be set to the following positions: X.XXXX,
XX.XXX, XXX.XX, XXXX.X, or XXXXX.
Note
The DX converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point
from the value span specified by Scale Lower and Scale Upper. For example, if the scale
setting is 5 to 5, the value is converted to a value within the span of 10; if the scale
setting is 5.0 to 5.0, the value is converted to a value within a span of 100. In this case,
the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a
span of 100. To prevent the display from becoming rough, it is recommended that the scale
be set so that this value is greater than 100.
You cannot set the same value to Scale Lower and Scale Upper.
When the Mode is 1-5V or Sqrt, Scale Lower must be less than Scale Upper.
3-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.3 Setting the Input Range
Range > Unit

Set the unit (up to 6 characters,
A a # 1).
Range > Ref. CH
The reference channel for difference computation.
Range > Low-cut

Select On to use the low-cut function.
* The low-cut value for 1 to 5 V input is fixed to 0% value of the input span.
On a square root computation channel, set the low-cut value in the range of 0.0% to
5.0% of the input span.
Measured value
Result of square root computation
Range > Low-cut value
4
5

Low-cut value
Input value
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-5
3.4
Setting the Moving Average of the Input

Set the moving average function of the measurement channel. This function suppresses
the effects of noise.
For a description of the function, see section 1.1.
Setup Screen
Moving average
Setup Items
Scan Interval
Average value
Average value
Count
First-CH/Last-CH
On/Off
To use moving average, select On.
Count
Set the number of data points of the moving average in the range of 2 to 400.
3-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.5
Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function
Set the alarm display and output relays.

For a description of the functions, see section 1.2.
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Alarm
Setup Screen
5
6
7
Setup Items
Basic setting > Reflash
To set the reflash operation on the alarm output relay, select On. The reflash function
is set on the first three output relays.
Basic setting > Rate of change

Decrease
Set the interval for the rate-of-change calculation of the low limit on rate-of-change
alarm in terms of the number of sampled data points (1 to 32). The actual interval is
obtained by multiplying the value specified here by the scan interval.
Increase
Set the interval for the rate-of-change calculation of the high limit on rate-of-change
alarm in the same manner as the interval for the low limit on rate-of-change alarm.
Basic setting > Indicator

You can choose to make the alarm displays behave in the following ways. When you
use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the setting follows the
annunciator sequence.
Settings
Nonhold
Hold
Description
Clears the alarm indication when the alarm condition is released (returns to
normal condition).
Holds the alarm indication until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-7
3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function
Switch, Relay
Internal Switch > AND
Select the internal switches that are to operate using AND logic. Set the range
of internal switches (from the first internal switch) to take the AND logic. All
subsequent switches will be set to OR logic.
Relay > AND

Select the relays that are to operate using AND logic. Set the range of relays (from
the first alarm relay) to take the AND logic. All subsequent relays will be set to OR
logic. Available settings are None, I01 (I01 only), I01-I02 (I01 and I02), I01-I03 (I01
to I03), etc. Only alarm output relays that are installed are valid.
Note
When reflash is turned ON, the operation of the first three output relays is fixed to OR logic.
Specifying AND produces no effect.
Relay > Action

Select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an alarm
occurs. The setting applies to all alarm output relays.
Relay > Hold

You can choose to make the alarm output relays behave in the following ways. This
setting applies to all relays. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release
number 3 or later), the setting follows the annunciator sequence.
Settings
Nonhold
Hold
Description
Turns the output relay OFF when the alarm condition is released (returns to
normal condition).
Holds the output relay at ON until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed.
Note
When reflash is turned ON, the operation of the first three output relays is set to nonhold.
Specifying Hold produces no effect.
Relay > Relay Action on Ack

You can select the relay output status that is enabled after the AlarmACK operation
from the following two settings. When you use the alarm annunciator function
(release number 3 or later), the setting follows the annunciator sequence.
Settings
Normal
Reset
Description
The relay output is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed. If the
condition for activating the alarm output relay is met in the next scan interval, the
relay output is activated.
This operation is valid only when the alarm output relay is set to Hold.
The relay output is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed. If a
new condition for activating the alarm output relay is met, the relay is activated.
An example of the relay action when alarm ACK is executed is shown below. This
example is for the case when the output relay AND item is set to None.
Normal
Alarm Alarm ACK
occurrence
Alarm 1
Alarm
occurrence
Alarm 2
Alarm output relay
Activated
Deactivated
Relay is activated in the next scan interval
3-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function
Reset
Alarm Alarm ACK
occurrence
Alarm 1
Alarm
occurrence
Alarm 2
Alarm output relay
Activated
Deactivated
Relay is activated on the next alarm occurrence
Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence/release of the high/low limit alarm
specified on measurement channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span or scaling width
Delta High/Low
Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence/release of the difference high/low
limit alarm specified on measurement channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span
Hysteresis > Math CH (/M1 and /PM1 options) and Ext. CH (/MC1 option)
Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence/release of the high/low limit alarm
specified on computation and external input channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the measurement span
Hysteresis > Meas CH

High/Low
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-9
3.6
Hiding the Alarm Indication

Select whether to enable the alarm hide function.
Setup Screen
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Alarm > Action
Setup Items
Alarm action > No logging
To enable the function that turns off the alarm indicator and logging, select On. The
Detect setup item is displayed in the alarm setting screen (see section 3.7).
This function disables the alarm indicator and the logging of alarm events to the alarm
summary. Alarms are also not displayed by the alarm annunciator (release number 3
or later).
Settings for Each Channel and Each Alarm

See section 3.7.
3-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.7
Setting Alarms on Channels
Setup Screen
2
3
Set the alarms after setting the range. All alarm settings of a channel are cancelled in the
following cases.
When the input type (Volt, TC, etc.) is changed.
When the input range is changed.
When the upper or lower limit of the span or scale is changed on channels that are set
to linear scale, square root computation, or 1-5 V (including changes in the decimal
point position).
Alarms for Each Channel

Range, Alarm
5
6
7
8
Alarm Delay Time
Tag, Memory sample, Alarm delay
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-11
3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels
Alarm Levels and Colors (Release number 3 or later)

setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Alarm > Level/Color
3-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
Select the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that
are displayed on the screen.
Alarm > 1, 2, 3, and 4

For each alarm, 1 to 4, select On to enable it.
Alarm > Type

Settings Name
H High limit alarm
L Low limit alarm
h Difference high limit alarm
l Difference low limit alarm
Description
Can be specified on channels set to difference computation.

Can be specified on channels set to difference computation.
R
r
T
t
High limit on rate-of-change alarm

Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Delay high limit alarm

Delay low limit alarm
Input value
4
5
Alarms on channels set to difference computation are inserted at the following

positions.
H, L, T, t
Select the alarm type.
R, r, h, l
Measured value
Measured value on the reference channel
Alarm > Value
Set the alarm value for the selected alarm type.
When the Mode of the Channel Is Set to Volt, TC, RTD, or DI

Type
H, L
R, r
T, t
Value
Value in the measurable range
1 digit to the upper limit of the width of
the measurable range
However, less than or equal to 30000
excluding the decimal point.
Same as H and L.
Example of a Range of Alarm Values

2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
0.0001 to 3.0000 V for 2 V range
0.1 to 1760.0C for thermocouple type R

Same as H and L.
10
When the Mode of the Channel Is Set to Delta

Type
H, L
h, l
R, r
T, t
Value
1 digit to the width of the measurable
range
However, less than or equal to 30000
Same as H and L.

2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
0.0001 to 3.0000 V for 2 V range
11
12
Same as H and L.
When the Mode of the Channel Is Set to Scale, Sqrt, or 1-5V

Type
H, L
R, r
T, t
Value
5% to 105% of the scale width.
However, within 30000 to 30000
Within 1 to 30000 excluding the decimal
point.
Same as H and L.

5.0 to 105.0 when the scale is 0.0 to 100.0
120.00 to 300.00 when the scale is 100.00
to 300.00
0.1 to 3000.0 when the scale is 0.0 to 100.0
0.01 to 300.00 when the scale is 100.00 to
300.00
Same as H and L.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-13
Alarm > Relay

Select whether to turn On or Off the relay output.
Alarm > Number

Set the output relay number or internal switch number when performing relay output.
Alarm > Detect

This item appears when the alarm hide function (see section 3.6) is turned On. Select
whether to show or hide the alarm indication when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, a
signal is output to the alarm output relay or internal switch when an alarm occurs, but
it is not indicated on the screen. The alarm is also not recorded in the alarm summary,
and alarms are not displayed by the alarm annunciator (release number 3 or later).
Alarm delay > Time (for delay high/low limit alarms)

Set the alarm delay time using an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
Note
The alarm delay time takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval. For
example, if the alarm delay time is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s, the actual delay
time is 6 s.
The delay alarm has the following special operations.
If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the
alarm setting when a delay alarm is set on a computation channel, the alarm is turned
On after the specified period (delay period) elapses.
The alarm detection operation is reset if a power failure occurs. The operation restarts
after the power recovers.
If the alarm setting of the delay high limit alarm is changed when an alarm is already
activated and the input is greater than or equal to the new setting, the alarm continues.
For all other cases, the alarm detection operation starts at the new setting. This is also
true for the delay lower limit alarm.
Alarm display > Level (Release number 3 or later)

When multiple alarms occur, the display of alarms with higher levels is given higher
priority. This setting applies to all channels.
Setting
1>2>3>4
1>4>2>3
1>4>3>2
Description
The order of alarm level preference, from highest to lowest preference, is 1,
2, 3, 4.
4, 2, 3.
4, 3, 2.
Alarm display > Color (Release number 3 or later)

Determines the alarm color for each alarm level. This setting applies to all channels.
Item
1
2
3
4
3-14
Setting
Sets the alarm level 1 color to red, orange, yellow, or pink.
Sets the alarm level 2 color.
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.8
Releasing the Alarm Output (Alarm ACK

Operation)
1
2
This operation is valid when the DX is set as follows:
DX with release number 3 or later

When Annunciator mode is set to On in the basic setting mode.
When Annunciator mode is set to Off, the operation is the same as described for DX
with release number 2 below.
When Indicator is set to Hold in the basic setting mode.
When Relay Hold is set to Hold and Relay action on ACK is set to Normal in the
basic setting mode.
When Relay action on ACK is set to Reset in the basic setting mode.
DX before release number 2
DX with release number 2
3
4
5
When Indicator is set to Hold in the basic setting mode.

When Relay Hold is set to Hold in the basic setting mode.
For the procedure to set the relay action, see section 3.5.
Procedure
This operation is carried out after an alarm occurs.

2. Press the Alarm ACK soft key.

The alarm output is released.
Explanation
Alarm Acknowledge (ACK) Operation
When an alarm acknowledge operation is carried out, the indications and outputs
(relays and switches) of all activated alarms are cleared.
In annunciator mode (release number 3 or later), the alarm indications and outputs
follow the annunciator sequence.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-15
3.9
Performing Calibration Correction (/CC1

Option)
The input value is corrected using segments, and the result is used as a measured value.
Setup Screen
Calibration correction
Setup Items
Condition
X1 < X2 < X3 < X4 < X5
Y5
Y4
MES val
Calibration set points
Y3
Y2
Y1
Number of set points

X1 X2
X3 X4
X5
True val
First-CH/Last-CH
Select the target channels. You can set consecutive channels whose range is set to
the same value as the first channel.
Calibration correction > Number of set points
Select the number of points that make up the segments (including the start and end
points) in the range of 2 to 16.
To disable calibration correction, select Off.
Calibration correction > MES val, True val
Press the Input soft key and enter the value.

For the MES value, set a value that is greater than the previous value.
Press the Measure soft key to set the measured value at that point to MES val. If
you press the Measure soft key when setting multiple channels simultaneously, the
measured value of the first channel are set to the MES val of all channels.
Selectable Range of MES and True Values

Channels on which linear scaling is specified
30000 to 30000 (the decimal place is the same setting as the scale value)
Other channels
Value in the measurable range of the selected range
Example: 2.0000 to 2.0000 for 2 V range
Note
The calibration correction setting is set to Off if you change the Mode or Range setting.
Calibration correction cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
3-16
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 Option)
The pulses applied to the pulse input terminal are counted on a computation channel.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Calculation expression, Alarm
Setup Screen
5
6
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
Select the target computation channels.
Math range > Math On/Off
Select On.
Math range > Calculation expression
Enter the equation using symbols.

Q01 to Q08: Displays the number of pulses per second.
P01 to P08: Displays the number of pulses per scan interval.
* The numbers 01 to 08 correspond to the pulse input terminal numbers.
For the procedure to set the computation channels, see section 9.1.
10
The procedure is explained below using an example.
Example 1: Pulse Sum Value
Display the sum value of the pulse signal applied to pulse input terminal number 6.
Pulse input
Scan interval
Time
P6
Number of pulses
per scan interval
12
(Sum)
13
TLOG.SUM
Pulse sum value
Expression
Assign the computation channel and set the expression. Set the span lower/upper
limit and unit according to the application.

IM 04L42B01-01E
Channel
101
11
Equation
TLOG.SUM(P6)
Description
Sum of the number of pulses per scan interval
App
Index
3-17
Example 2: Number of Pulses per Minute

Count the pulse signal applied to pulse input terminal number 6 on the DX2004 (scan
interval set to 250 ms), and calculate and display the number of pulses per minute.
(Moving average over a minute)
Pulse input
Time
Sampling interval
(250 ms)
101ch
Number of pulses
per second
(60x)
102ch
Number of pulses
per minute
Expression
Assign the computation channel as shown below and set the expressions. Set the
span lower/upper limit and unit according to the application.
Channel
101
102
Q6
101*K01
Constant
K01
60
Channel
101
Equation
Value
Rolling average
Sampling interval: 1s
Number of samples: 60
Description
Number of pulses per second
Number of pulses per minute
Description
Coefficient for converting the number of
pulses per second to the number of
pulses per minute
Description
Moving average over a minute
Channels
The computation is performed in order from the channel with the smallest channel
number in one scan interval.
Use a channel of a channel number larger than that of the channel counting the
number of pulses per second for the computation channel that is to calculate the
number of pulses per minute.
Example 3: Reset When the Pulse Sum Value Exceeds a Certain Value
Reset the sum value when the pulse sum value exceeds a specified value (reset
value) and carry over the value exceeding the reset value to the sum after the reset.
Count the number of resets and calculate the total sum value up to that point.
Expression
Assign expressions to the computation channels as shown below and set the
constants.
3-18
Channel
101
102
103
Expression
((102+P01).GE.K01)+101
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(P01)
K01*101+102
Application
Pulse sum value reset count
Pulse sum value
Total sum value
Symbol
P01
K01
Description
Counts the number of pulses per scan interval.
Constant. The reset value. The sum value is reset when this value is exceeded.
IM 04L42B01-01E

Pulse input
Time
Scan interval
P01
Number of pulses
per scan interval
101ch
Reset count
3
(Sum)
102ch
Sum value
K01
reset value
(Resets the value below the reset value)
Channel 101: Reset Count

Calculates the number of times the pulse sum value is reset.
The expression ((102+P01).GE.K01) is set to 1 when the previous pulse sum value
(102) + the current pulse count (P01) is greater than the reset value (K01). Otherwise,
the expression is set to 0. The value of channel 101 is incremented when the pulse
sum value exceeds the reset value.
Channel 102: Pulse Sum Value

Calculates the pulse sum value.
Under normal conditions, the pulse sum value TLOG.SUM (P01) is calculated. When
the pulse sum value is greater than or equal to the reset value (K01), the pulse sum
value is set to the amount exceeding K01.
6
7
8
Channel 103: Total Sum Value

Multiplies the reset value (K01) by the reset count (101) and adds the pulse sum value
(102) to derive the total sum value.
Note
The computation is performed in order from the channel with the smallest channel number
in one scan interval. If the channel number in the expression is greater than or equal to the
channel number in which the expression is assigned, the previous computed result (previous
value) is used for the channel in the expression.
Because the accuracy of the computation function is single-precision floating point, we
7
recommend a reset value less than or equal to 10 .
If the pulse input value of the scan interval is greater than the reset value, correct
computation cannot be achieved.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-19
3.11 Setting the Method of Detecting Over-Range

Values of Linearly Scaled Measurement
Channels
Setup Screen
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > View, Message, Input, Tag
Setup Items
Input > Value on over-range
Settings
Free
Over
Description
The value is set to over range if the value is less than 30000 and +over range
if the value is greater than 30000 excluding the decimal point. The value is
displayed as Over and +Over, respectively.
The value is set to over range if the value is less than 5% of the scale and
+over range if the value is greater than 105%. The value is displayed as Over
and +Over, respectively.
Example: If the scale is 0.0 to 200.0, the value is set to over range if the value
is less than 10.0 of the scale and +over range if the value is greater than 210.0.
Note
For computations such as TLOG, CLOG, and report, the handling of the scale over-range value
can be set in advance.
See section 9.1.
3-20
IM 04L42B01-01E
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release

number 3 or later)
This section explains how to use the alarm annunciator function.

Annunciator Mode
Setup Screen
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Alarm > Action
4
5
6
7
Alarm Levels and Colors

See section 3.7.
Display
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display >
Annunciator
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-21
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)
Setup Items
Alarm action > Annunciator mode
Select On to use the annunciator function.
Alarm action > Sequence

Select the annunciator sequence. For details about the annunciator sequence, see
Explanation in this section.
Setting
ISA-A-4
ISA-A
ISA-M
Description
A no lock-in sequence.
A lock-in sequence.
A double lock-in sequence.
Alarm action > Time off color

The window display color when no alarms are activated. You can select white or
green.
Levels and Colors

See section 3.7.
Annunciator position
The position of the annunciator window. See the explanation for the next item.
Annunciator position > On/Off

Set the annunciator position that you want to use to On.
Starting with 1, consecutively set all annunciator positions that you want to use to On.
After a position has been set to Off, all of the positions after it will also be turned off
even if they are set to On. The annunciator display changes depending on how many
annunciator windows you use. For details, see Explanation.
Annunciator position > Channel, Level

You can assign alarms to annunciator windows by specifying channel numbers and
alarm levels.
You can set Level to 1, 2, 3, 4, or All. If you select All, all of the alarms in the specified
channel are assigned to the specified window.
Annunciator position > Comment txt block No.

You can select a text string (label) to display in the annunciator window by selecting a
comment text block number.
For information about how to set comment text blocks, see section 5.19.
3-22
IM 04L42B01-01E
Procedure
Opening the Display
The annunciator display appears when you turn on the power. You can switch to the
annunciator display from other displays by following the procedure below.
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to select Annunciator, and then press DISP/
ENTER.
3
5
6
The display appears. The example below is for when there are four annunciator windows.
7
8

9
10
Alarm ACK
Perform this operation after an alarm has occurred. This operation affects all alarms.
1. In operation mode, press FUNC.
11
2. Press the Alarm ACK soft key.
The alarm indications and outputs are cleared according to the annunciator sequence. For
details, see Explanation.
Alarm Display Reset (When the annunciator sequence is set to ISA-M)

The alarm display reset operation will not take place unless the alarm ACK operation
is performed first. The alarm display reset operation affects all alarms.
13
App
2. Press the Alarm DispRST soft key.
The alarm displays are reset. They are reset according to the annunciator sequence. For
details, see Explanation.
IM 04L42B01-01E
12
3-23
Index
Explanation
Display Window Layouts and Labels
The annunciator display layouts and labels change as indicated in the table below.
Displayed
Windows
Window Layout
Labels (max number of displayable characters)
Characters
Vertical Horizontal Lines
When displayed on 1 screen.
4
22
5
32
6
32
5
32
8
42
5
32
10
52
5
32
12
62
4
32
16
82
3
32
20
10 2
3
32
24
83
4
32
30
10 3
3
32
40
10 4
3
26
50
10 5
3
20
60
10 6
3
16
70
10 7
3
14
80
10 8
3
12
When assigned to the 4-Panel display.
4
22
5
26
6
32
5
26
8
42
4
26
10
52
3
26
12
62
2
26
16
82
2
26
20
10 2
1
26
24
83
2
17
30
10 3
1
17
40
10 4
1
13
50
10 5
1
10
60
10 6
1
8
70
10 7
1
7
80
10 8
1
6
Font Size
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Display Positions
Annunciator windows are assigned to positions starting with the left column.
Annunciator windows are assigned in ascending order. The example below is for an
annunciator display with eight windows.
Annunciator
position number
Labels
The number of characters that can be displayed varies depending on the number of
annunciator windows.
Window Colors
State
When an alarm is released
When an alarm is occurring
Color
Time off color (green or white)
The alarm color. If multiple alarms are occurring, the window is
displayed using the color of the alarm with the highest priority.
Displayed windows not in use Gray
3-24
IM 04L42B01-01E
Annunciator Sequence
ISA-A-4
Sequence diagram
Process
Sequence
Display
Relay output
Alarm icon
Normal
Normal
Normal
Deactivated
No display
To abnormal
3
Return to normal
Process
Abnormal
Acknowledged
Sequence
On
Display
Relay output Deactivated
Alarm icon
On (red)
Return to normal
Alarm ACK
while abnormal
Process
Abnormal
Sequence
Alarm
Display
Flashing
Relay output
Activated
Alarm icon Blinking (red)
Sequence pattern
Alarm ACK
Alarm
Display
8
Relay output
When multiple alarms have been assigned to a single annunciator window

If multiple alarms are occurring, the window is displayed using the color of the alarm with the highest priority.
When two alarms have been assigned to a single relay
When the relay is set to OR logic
ACK
10
ACK
Alarm A
Occurrence
11
Release
Alarm B
Occurrence
12
Release
Relay
Activated
Deactivated
13
An alarm has occurred, and the relay has been activated.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-25

When the relay is set to AND logic
ACK
ACK
Alarm A
Occurrence
Release
Alarm B
Occurrence
Release
Relay
Activated
Deactivated
Alarm B has occurred, so now all alarms have occurred.
This causes the relay to be activated.
3-26
IM 04L42B01-01E
Process
Sequence
Display
Relay output
Alarm icon
Normal
Normal
Normal
Deactivated
To abnormal
No display
Process
Abnormal
Acknowledged
Sequence
On
Display
Relay output
Deactivated
Alarm icon
On (red)
Alarm ACK
while abnormal
Sequence
Display
Relay output
Alarm icon
Alarm ACK
while normal
Return to normal
Process
ISA-A
Sequence diagram
Abnormal or
normal
Alarm
Flashing
Activated
Blinking (red)
Sequence pattern
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Alarm
7
Display
Relay output
If an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the annunciator blinks with the color that is displayed
when no alarms are activated.
If an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the alarm icon blinks green.

9
10

When the relay is set to OR logic
ACK
11
ACK
Alarm A
Occurrence
Release
12
Alarm B
Occurrence
Release
13
Relay
Activated
Deactivated
Relay hold
App
An alarm has occurred so the relay has been activated.
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
3-27

When the relay is set to AND logic
ACK
ACK
Alarm A
Occurrence
Release
Alarm B
Occurrence
Release
Relay
Activated
Deactivated
Relay hold
Alarm B has occurred, so now all alarms have occurred.
This causes the relay to be activated.
3-28
IM 04L42B01-01E
ISA-M
Sequence diagram
Process
Sequence
Display
Relay output
Alarm icon
Normal
Normal
Normal
Deactivated
No display
Alarm display reset while

normal
Sequence
Display
Relay output
Alarm icon
Process
Abnormal or
normal
Acknowledged
On
Deactivated
On (red)
Sequence
Display
Relay output
Alarm icon
Alarm ACK
Process
To abnormal
Abnormal or
normal
Alarm
Flashing
Activated
Blinking (red)
4
5
Sequence pattern
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Display
reset
Display reset
Display
reset
Alarm
7
Display
8
Relay output
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Display
reset
Alarm
10
Display
11
Relay output
12
Even if an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the annunciator continues to blink with the color
that is displayed when an alarm has occurred.
Even if an alarm is released before the alarm display reset operation is performed, the annunciator continues to blink with
the color that is displayed when an alarm has occurred.
Even if an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the alarm icon continues to blink red.
Even if an alarm is released before the alarm display reset operation is performed, the alarm icon stays red.
App

Same as for ISA-A.
IM 04L42B01-01E
13
Index
3-29
Chapter 4
4.1
Operations in Operation Mode
Switching the Screen with the DISP/ENTER Key and Arrow Keys
Press DISP/ENTER and arrow keys to show the display selection menu and sub menu
to switch the display. The flow of operation is indicated below.
DISP/ENTER key and arrow keys
TREND
Sec. 4.2
GROUP 1
2
3
GROUP n
GROUP 1
Display selection menu

About tag display
Long tags may not fit into their display areas.
When this is the case, they are displayed as follows:
After the screen is displayed, the tag automatically
scrolls through the display area once.
Press ESC to scroll the tag through the display
area again.
Sec. 4.2
BAR
GROUP 1
Sub menu
GROUP n
GROUP n
OVERVIEW
Sec. 4.4
Sec. 4.2
DIGITAL
REPORT DATA
Sec. 4.5
RELAY
Sec. 4.5
COLUMN BAR
EVENT SWITCH
Sec. 4.10
Sec. 4.5
6
7
8
INFORMATION
ALARM
SUMMARY
Sec. 4.6
TREND
HISTORY
Sec. 4.3
LOG
MESSAGE
SUMMARY
Sec. 4.7
MEMORY
SUMMARY
Sec. 4.8
9
10
MODBUS
MASTER
MODBUS
CLIENT Sec. 4.5
11
Sec. 4.9
Login log, error log, communication log,
FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log,
DHCP log, and Modbus status log
CUSTOM
DISPLAY
12
Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 5.18.
13
IM04L41B01-04E
Annunciator
App
Sec. 3.12
Appears when the annunciator function is being used.
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-1
4.1 Operations in Operation Mode
Operations Using Other Keys

Soft keys (see below)

FUNC key (see below)
Favorite key (see section 5.16)
USER key (see section 7.1)
START and STOP keys (see section 6.4)
Operation Using the FUNC Key

Press FUNC to display the FUNC key menu at the bottom of the screen. Press the
Next soft key to switch the menu. Press the desired soft key.
FUNC key menu

Next soft key
Press the desired soft key.
4-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.1 Operations in Operation Mode
Refer to
Section 3.8
Section 3.12
Section 5.4
Section 5.4
Section 6.6
Section 6.5
Section 6.4
Section 6.4
Section 6.4
Section 4.8
Section 9.4
Section 9.4
Section 9.4
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
Section 8.1
Section 8.3
Section 8.3
Section 5.3
Section 6.3
Section 6.3
IM04L41B01-04E
Section 5.15
Section 4.10
Section 5.14
Section 2.5
Section 2.5
IM04L41B01-17E
IM04L41B01-17E
IM04L41B01-17E
IM04L41B01-17E
2
3
4
Menu Item
Alarm ACK
Alarm DispRST
Message
Free message
Media eject
Snap shot
Manual sample
Trigger
Save display
Save event
Save stop
Math start/stop
Math reset
Math ACK
Edge Switch
Timer reset
Match T Reset
Keylock
Logout
Password change
Normal speed/Second speed
Batch
Text field
Builder
Favorite regist
Four panel display
Standard display
System info
Network info
SNTP
E-Mail start/stop
E-Mail test
FTP test
5
6
7
8
Customizing the Menus

The display selection menu that appears when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed and
the FUNC key menu that appears when the FUNC key is pressed can be changed.
See section 5.18
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-3
4.2
Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms,

Values, or Bar Graphs
This section explains how to use the trend, digital, and bar graph displays.
Procedure
Showing the Display
2. Press the arrow keys to select TREND, DIGITAL, or BAR, and press DISP/
ENTER.
The selected display appears.
Changing the Displayed Contents

2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.
Trend display sub menu
Group name:
Displays the group
ALL CHANNEL:
Displays the waveforms of all channels
GROUP CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of the
channels registered to groups
AUTO ZONE ON:
AUTO ZONE OFF:
Displays trend waveforms

separately by assigning each
channel in the group to separate
display areas (zones)
Does not display waveforms in zones
SCALE ON:
SCALE OFF:
Displays the scale

Clears the scale
FINE GRID ON:

FINE GRID OFF:
Displays the fine grid

Clears the fine grid
TAG DETAIL ON:
When a tag does not fit into the typical tag display
space, the alarm and measured values are covered
so that the tag can be displayed completely.
Priority is not given to tag display.
TAG DETAIL OFF:

DIGITAL OFF:
DIGITAL ON:
Clears the numeric display section

Displays the numeric display section
MESSAGE DISP1:
MESSAGE DISP2:
Displays the messages using display method 1

Displays the messages using display method 2
TREND SPACE ON: Inserts a space at the right edge (horizontal display)
or the top edge (vertical display) in the waveform
display section
TREND SPACE OFF: Does not insert a space
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 5.18.)
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the

displayed groups
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch
the displayed groups
4-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs
Digital display sub menu
Group name:
Displays the group
TAG DETAIL ON:
When a tag does not fit into

the typical tag display space,
the alarm and measured values
are covered so that the tag can
be displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF:
AUTO SCROLL OFF:
Automatically switches the

displayed groups
Does not automatically switch
AUTO SCROLL ON:
Bar graph display submenu
6
7
Group name:
Displays the group
TAG DETAIL ON:
When a tag does not fit into

the typical tag display space,
the alarm and measured values
are covered so that the tag can
be displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF:

AUTO SCROLL ON:
AUTO SCROLL OFF:
8
9
Automatically switches the

displayed groups
Does not automatically switch
10
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents.
To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.
Starting the Waveform Display of the Trend Display/Stopping the

Waveform Updating
11
Press START to start the waveform display of the trend display. Press STOP to stop
the waveform updating.
12
Writing Messages
See section 5.4.
Switching the Displayed Group Using Arrow Keys

Press the right arrow key to switch the displayed group in ascending order. Press the
left arrow key to switch the displayed group in reverse.
Switching the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Displays Using the Arrow
Keys
App
Press the down arrow key while showing the trend, digital, or bar graph display to
switch the display in the order trend, digital, bar graph, trend, and so on. Press the up
arrow key to switch the display in reverse order.
IM 04L42B01-01E
13
4-5
Index
Explanation
*
ALL CHANNEL /GROUP CHANNEL on the Trend Display

On the group display, the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed. In all
channel display, the waveforms of all channels that are configured to record data are
displayed on the current group display.
* All channel display is disabled when the trend interval is 30 s/div or less on the DX2010,
DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, or DX2048 with the external input function (/MC1 option).
SCALE ON/OFF and DIGITAL ON/OFF on the Trend Display

Select whether to show or hide the scale and numeric display sections.
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF

The displayed groups can be automatically switched at a specified interval by
selecting AUTO SCROLL ON. The display switches in ascending group order.
For the procedure to set the auto scroll interval of groups, see section 5.14.
MESSAGE DISP 1 and MESSAGE DISP 2 on the Trend Display

Switches the message display method.
AUTO ZONE (Release number 3 or later)

Displays trend waveforms separately by evenly dividing display areas (zones) among
a groups channels.
With AUTO ZONE OFF
With AUTO ZONE ON
FINE GRID (Release number 3 or later)

Display the fine grid when the normal grid is too wide for reading measured values.
The fine grid can be used in the trend and historical trend displays. The fine grid
places an additional four lines between the normal grid lines.
With FINE GRID OFF
With FINE GRID ON
4-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF (Release number 3 or later)

When TAG DETAIL is set to ON and a tag does not fit into the typical tag display
space, it covers the alarm and measured values so that it can be displayed
completely. Depending on display space limitations, it may not be possible to display
the entire tag. If the tag comment and number do not fit within a display area, they can
be scrolled. The TAG DETAIL setting made in one display affects the settings in all of
the other displays.
The figure below shows an example for when ten channels are being displayed.
When the Tag Number Is Not Displayed
If TAG DETAIL is on, the tag comment is displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF
With TAG DETAIL ON
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-7

When the Tag Number Is Displayed
When TAG DETAIL is set to off, display priority is given to the tag number. If TAG
DETAIL is on, the tag number and comment are displayed as much as possible. When
there is enough space, the tag number and comment are displayed completely, even
if TAG DETAIL is off.
With TAG DETAIL OFF
With TAG DETAIL ON
4-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
TREND SPACE ON/OFF

With TREND SPACE ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-9
4.3
Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical

Trend Display)
There are five methods to display the past measured data.

Recall from the display selection menu (see this section).
Display from the alarm summary (see section 4.6).
Display from the message summary (see section 4.7).
Display from the memory summary (see section 4.8).
Show the measured data stored on an external storage medium (see section 6.8).
Procedure
Showing the Display
Carry out the procedure below while memory sampling is in progress.

2. Press the arrow keys to select TREND HISTORY, and press DISP/ENTER.
The display appears.

Historical trend display sub menu
Group name:
4-10
Displays the group
ALL CHANNEL:
Displays the waveforms of all channels
GROUP CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of the
channels registered to groups
AUTO ZONE ON:
Displays trend waveforms separately by
assigning each channel in the group to
separate display areas (zones)
AUTO ZONE OFF:
Does not display waveforms in zones
SCALE ON:
Displays the scale
SCALE OFF:
Clears the scale
FINE GRID ON:
Displays the fine grid
FINE GRID OFF:
Clears the fine grid
TAG DETAIL ON:
When a tag does not fit into the typical
tag display space, the alarm and
measured values are covered so that the
tag can be displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF:
MESSAGE DISP2: Displays the messages using display
method 2
MESSAGE DISP1: Displays the messages using display
method 1
CURSOR VALUE:
With display data, shows the maximum
data value at the cursor position. With
event data, shows the data at the cursor
position.
DIGITAL MAX/MIN: Displays the maximum and minimum
values at the cursor position and the
maximum and minimum values within
the displayed data in the digital value
display area
CURSOR TIME ON: Shows the time at the cursor position in
the top right of the display
CURSOR TIME OFF: Displays the date/time of the data at the
right edge of the screen
RELATIVE TIME:
Displays the time that has elapsed since
memory start
ABSOLUTE TIME:
Displays the time when data was
recorded
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)
Historical trend display sub menu
Switches to the specified display
Returns to the display that was shown before the historical trend
3
4
Displays the alarm summary in the loaded data file
Displays the message summary contained in the loaded data file

Displays information about the loaded data file
8
9
10
Displays the trend waveform and scale markers of the selected

channel in front of all the others. (List items like "ABC-1" are
tags.)
11
12
13
App
Adjusts the display span of the selected channel.

Select OFF to return to the original span. (List items like
"ABC-1" are tags.)
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-11

Expands or reduces the time axis
Sub menu when the alarm summary is being displayed
INFORMATION: Shows information about the measured

data that is currently displayed
For an explanation of the other menu items, see section 4.6.
Sub menu when the message summary is being displayed
INFORMATION: Shows information about the measured

data that is currently displayed
For an explanation of the other menu items, see section 4.7.
4-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
Moving the Cursor and Scrolling the Waveform
Cursor
Moves the cursor to the right by 1 dot.
Hold down an arrow key to move

the cursor by 2 divisions.
Use the up and down arrow keys on the vertical trend display.
5
6
Displaying the Continuing Data

Approximately one screen of data is shown on the historical trend display. The
continuing data can be shown as follows:
Displayed
Moves the cursor to the left by 1 dot.
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and

continue to press the arrow key to shift a half a page
and display the continuing data (release number 3 or
later).
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and
continue to press the arrow key to shift a half a page
and display the continuing data (release number 3 or
later).
Use the up and down arrow keys on the vertical trend display.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-13
Specifying the Display Range

Specify the display range. Items inside the parentheses are for the vertical trend display.
1. Press the up (right) arrow key.
The waveform of the entire data range is displayed at the top (right ) section of the screen.
All data display (all of the
data in the display memory)
Loads as much of the
continuous data as the display
memory can hold and shows
the data when switching to the
all data display.
Frame indicating the

display range
Displayed highlighted.
These icons are not displayed
if the scale is displayed.
2. Press the left and right (up and down) arrow keys to set the display position
by moving the frame that indicates the display range. If you hold down one of the
arrow keys, the frame that indicates the display range will move continuously in
the direction of the arrow that you hold down.
3. Press the down (left) arrow key.
The specified range is displayed.
If the Data Does Not Fit in the All Data Display (Release Number 2 or Later)
Specify the range to be displayed in the all data display.
Below is the procedure to display data that is older than the data displayed currently.
Items inside the parentheses are for the horizontal trend display.
1. Press the up (right) arrow key.
The waveform of all the data in the display memory is displayed at the top (right) of the
screen. At the same time, the data area in the internal memory that can be loaded is
displayed. In addition, the data position of 8 MB that is displayed in the all data display is
indicated using a rectangular frame in the loadable data area.
Loadable data in the
internal memory
All data display
(all the display data in the
display memory amounting
to 8 MB)
A frame indicating the range
shown in the screen.
The green arrow indicates
that loadable data exists in
the arrow direction.
A frame indicating the 8 MB
that is shown in the all data
display.
2. Press the left (down) arrow key to move the frame indicating the display range
to the edge of the all data display. If you press the left (down) arrow key again,
the message Overwrite old data? appears.
3. Select Yes and press DISP/ENTER to replace 4 MB of data in the display

memory.
4. Press the left/right (up/down) arrow key to move the frame indicating the
display range to specify the range you want to display.
5. Press the down (left) arrow key.

4-14
IM 04L42B01-01E
Dividing the Screen into Halves and Displaying the Current Trend and
Historical Trend Simultaneously
This operation is possible only when the historical trend of the display data is being
displayed. Items inside the parentheses are for the vertical trend display.
* This operation is not possible when the scale is displayed.
Press the down (left) arrow key.

The current trend is displayed in the right half (top half), and the historical trend is
displayed in the left half (bottom half) of the screen.
1
2
3
Current trend
4
Historical trend
To revert to the original screen, press the up (right) arrow key.
Writing Add Messages

8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-15
Displaying Measured Data from the Specified Date and Time (Release
number 3 or later)
You can search for measured data from the specified date and time and display the
results. You can search the display data or event data in the DX internal memory.

2. Select DATA SEARCH using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
A calendar appears for the month of the data at the cursor position.
3. Use the arrow keys and the soft keys to change the date, and then press DISP/
ENTER.
If there is display data and event data at that date, a data type selection window appears.
Red square: Indicates the selected day

Use the up, down, left, and right arrow keys
to move the red square and select a day.
D: Indicates that there is display data
E: Indicates that there is event data
Changes the displayed year

Changes the displayed month
Searchable Range
You can search for data between the year 2000 and the year 2079.
Appearance of D and E
D appears when there is display data for the specified day and the DX is
configured to record display data (see section 6.1 for details).
E appears when there is event data for the specified day and the DX is configured
to record event data (see section 6.1 for details).
4-16
IM 04L42B01-01E
4. Select Display or Event, and press DISP/ENTER.

A search time input window appears.
2
3
If there is data for the time that you specify, the data appears in the historical trend display.
5. Enter the time you want to search for, and press DISP/ENTER.
5
6
7
Display Example
10

11
12
Display Conditions
The cursor is located at the time that you specify for the search.
All other display conditions are the same as those of the display before the search.
If there is no data at the date and time that you specify, data from a later time in the
same day is displayed. If there is no such data, an error message appears.
If the display group that was being displayed before the search does not exist in the
data that you have specified, the display group in the data with the lowest number
is displayed.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-17

You can configure the calendar so that weeks start with Sunday or Monday.
Procedure
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to
basic setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Time Settings > Calendar display
> 1st weekday
You can set the first weekday (the day that appears on the far left side of the
calendar) to SUN (Sunday) or MON (Monday).
4-18
IM 04L42B01-01E
Explanation
ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL
The waveforms of channels assigned to the group or waveforms of all channels that
are configured to record data are displayed on the current group display.
2
3
4
AUTO ZONE
Displays trend waveforms separately by assigning display areas (zones) to the set
channels.
With AUTO ZONE OFF
With AUTO ZONE ON
6
7
8
9
10
SCALE ON/OFF
Select whether to display the scale. The current value mark of the scale indicates the
value at the cursor position.
With SCALE ON
11
With SCALE OFF
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-19
FINE GRID
With FINE GRID OFF
With FINE GRID ON
TAG DETAIL
When TAG DETAIL is set to ON and a tag does not fit into the typical tag display
space, it covers the alarm and measured values so that it can be displayed completely.
If the tag comment and number do not fit within a display area, they can be scrolled.
The TAG DETAIL setting made in one display affects the settings in all of the other
displays.
The figure below shows an example for when six channels are being displayed.
If TAG DETAIL is on, the tag comment is displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF
With TAG DETAIL ON

DETAIL is on, the tag number and comment are displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF
With TAG DETAIL ON
4-20
IM 04L42B01-01E
MESSAGE DISP 1, MESSAGE DISP 2

Switch between message displays.
CURSOR VALUE/DIGITAL MAX/MIN
Switch between numeric displays.

With DIGITAL MAX/MIN
With CURSOR VALUE
3
4
5
6
CURSOR TIME
With CURSOR TIME ON
7
8
9
10
ABSOLUTE TIME/RELATIVE TIME

With ABSOLUTE TIME
With RELATIVE TIME
11
12

13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-21
TOP CHANNEL (Release number 3 or later)

The following example is for when the top channel is set to channel 8. The displayed
scale marker and grid are those of the channel selected as the top channel.
If you switch from the trend history display to another display, the top channel setting
is cleared. Channels other than the top channel are displayed in their assigned order
within their group.
AUTO SPAN (Release number 3 or later)

Before AUTO SPAN
Using AUTO SPAN for channel ABC-1
4-22
IM 04L42B01-01E
TIME AXIS > ZOOM+ and ZOOMThe time axis can be expanded or reduced around the cursor position.
Display data: 2 times the trend display to 1/60 minimum
Event data: Reduction only, up to 1/60 minimum
The minimum magnification and the factor by which the display can be expanded
or reduced with one operation vary depending on the trend interval for the display
data and on the sampling interval for the event data. To expand or reduce further,
repeat the procedure.
With TIME AXIS ZOOM+
With TIME AXIS ZOOM-
1
2
3
4
INFORMATION (Information on the Displayed Measured Data)
The following information is displayed.

Page switch mark
Comments and text fields are displayed on and
after the second page when the batch function
is in use.
Use the left and right arrow keys to switch
the page.
8
9
10
Display
File name
Data type
Serial number
Batch number, Lot number
Start time and End time
User name
Description
Data in the internal memory is displayed as Memory. For a file
on the external storage medium, the file name is displayed.
Display corresponds to display data, and Event corresponds to
event data.
The serial number of the DX that was used.
Displayed when the file is created using the batch function.
The start time and end time of recording.
Name of the user who performed the operation. Displayed when
the login function was used.
Note
11
12
13
When measured data on the external storage medium is displayed, the serial number
corresponds to that of the DX that was used to save the data.
App
Background Color of the Historical Trend

You can change the background color of the historical trend.
For the procedure to change the background color of the historical trend, see section
5.13.
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-23
Index
4.4
Display the Statuses of All Channels on One

Screen (Overview Display)
This section explains how to use the overview display.
Procedure
Showing the Display
2. Press the arrow keys to select OVERVIEW, and press DISP/ENTER.

Overview display sub menu
TAG DETAIL ON:
TAG DETAIL OFF:
When a tag does not fit into the

typical tag display space, the
alarm and measured values are
covered so that the tag can be
displayed completely.
(Appears when Tag Number is set to Use. See section 5.2 for details.)
CURSOR OFF:
Clears the cursor
CURSOR ON:
Displays the cursor
JUMP TO ALM SUM: Switches to the alarm summary
JUMP TO TREND: Switches to the trend display of
the smallest group number that
includes the channel selected
with the cursor.
JUMP TO DIGITAL: Switches to the digital display of
the smallest group number that
with the cursor.
JUMP TO BAR:
Switches to the bar graph display
of the smallest group number that
with the cursor.
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 5.18)
Showing the Trend, Digital, Bar Graph Display Containing the Specified
Channel
1. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor, and select a channel.
Cursor (white Frame)
2. Switch to the trend, digital, or bar graph display according to the procedure
described in Changing the Displayed Contents.
4-24
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.4 Display the Statuses of All Channels on One Screen (Overview Display)
TAG DETAIL
The same as the TAG DETAIL setting in other displays.
The following example is for the DX2048 OVERVIEW display.
When the Tag Number Is Not Displayed (the TAG DETAIL does not appear)
Tag comments are displayed.
2
3
4
5
6

DETAIL is on, the tag number and comment are displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF
With TAG DETAIL ON
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-25
4.5
Displaying Various Information

This section explains how to display reports (/M1 and /PM1 options) and how to use the
status display.
Procedure
Showing the Display
2. Press the up and down arrow keys to select INFORMATION.
Information display submenu
ALARM SUMMARY:
Displays an alarm summary

See section 4.6.
MESSAGE SUMMARY: Displays a message summary

See section 4.7.
MEMORY SUMMARY:
Displays a memory summary

See section 4.8.
MODBUS CLIENT:
Displays the Modbus

client status
Displays the Modbus master
status
Displays the relay status
MODBUS MASTER:
RELAY:
REPORT DATA:
Displays report data
COLUMN BAR:
Displays report data using

stacked bar graphs
Displays the status of the
event level switches
EVENT SWITCH:
Displaying the Report

Switching the Displayed Report Data
The Index item on the report display shows the number of the report data being
displayed/the number of report data saved in the internal memory. The largest
report data number corresponds to the most recent report data.
Number of the report data being displayed
Number of report data saved to the internal memory
4-26
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.5 Displaying Various Information

Carry out the procedure below to switch the displayed report data.
Up arrow key:
Report data being displayed + 1.
Down arrow key: Report data being displayed 1.
Left arrow key: Report data being displayed + 10.
Right arrow key: Report data being displayed 10.
Note
The display is not updated even if a new report is created while displaying the report data.
Perform either of the operations below to display the most recent report data.
Hold down the left arrow key until the latest report data is displayed.
Press DISP/ENTER and display the report data again from the display selection menu.
4
Switching the Report Channels

Up to 30 report channels can be shown on one screen. If there are more than 30
report channels, you can switch the displayed report channels.

3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select CHANGE REPORT CH.
The displayed report channels are switched.

Lists the statuses of the alarm output relays and internal switches. You cannot change
the settings on this display.
Red: ON
Green: OFF
7
8
9
10
Modbus Status Display
11
Lists the statuses of the Modbus client or Modbus master commands.

For the operating procedure, see the Communication Interface Users Manual
(IM04L41B01-17E).
Communication conditions
12
13
Communication destination
DX channels
Status
Command
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-27
4.5 Displaying Various Information
Event Level Switch Status Display (Release number 3 or later)

Displays the status of the event level switches. You cannot perform operations in this
display.
Red: On
Green: Off
4-28
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.6
Using the Alarm Summary
This section explains how to use the alarm summary.

Procedure

Display name:
TO HISTORY (DISP): Switches to the display data

historical trend display
TO HISTORY (EV):
Switches to the event data
TO OVERVIEW:
Switches to the overview display
TAG DETAIL ON:
When a tag does not fit into the

typical tag display space, the
alarm and measured values are
covered so that the tag can be
displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF:

CHANGE SORT KEY:
Sorts alarm information by

channel or alarm time
ASCENDING ORDER:
DESCENDING ORDER:
Sorts in ascending order

Sorts in descending order
Sort symbol
Ascending sort
Descending sort
4
5
6
7
8
9
Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling the Alarms

Scrolls the alarm information up by half a page
Moves the cursor up
Scrolls the alarm information down by half a page
10
11
Moves the cursor down
Recalling the Historical Trend Display at the Point When the Alarm
Occurred
12
1. Select an alarm with the cursor.

2. Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the
Displayed Contents.
13
Explanation
CHANGE SORT KEY, ASCENDING ORDER, and DESCENDING ORDER
IM 04L42B01-01E
The alarms are sorted in ascending or descending order by the following keys. The
sort symbol is displayed next the sort item (see the figure above).
Channel number: Sorts the alarms by channel number even if tags are being
used. Alarms in a channel are sorted by the alarm level number.
Time of alarm occurrence/release
4-29
App
Index
4.6 Using the Alarm Summary
TAG DETAIL
The same as the TAG DETAIL setting in other displays.
Tag comments are displayed in their entirety.

Tag numbers and comments are displayed.
4-30
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.7
Using the Message Summary
This section explains how to use the message summary.

Procedure
3
4
Sort symbol
Ascending sort
Descending sort
Display name:
TO HISTORY (DISP):
Switches to the display data

Switches to the event data
TO HISTORY (EV):
CHANGE SORT KEY:
Sorts messages by message

number, time, group, or user
name
ASCENDING ORDER: Sorts in ascending order
DESCENDING ORDER: Sorts in descending order
CHANGE DISP ITEM:
Switches between displaying

message times and groups
and displaying the message
user names
Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling the Messages

Scrolls the messages up by half a page
Moves the cursor up
10
Scrolls the messages down by half a page

Recalling the Historical Trend Display at the Point When the Message
Was Written
1. Select a message with the cursor.
11
12
Displayed Contents.
13
Explanation
CHANGE DISP ITEM
Switches between the following two message display methods.

Message, time, and group
Message, user name
App
CHANGE SORT KEY, ASCENDING ORDER, and DESCENDING ORDER

The messages are sorted in ascending or descending order by the respective key.
The sort symbol is displayed next the sort item (see the figure above).
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-31
Index
4.8
Using the Memory Summary

This section explains how to use the memory summary.
Procedure
The displayed data type is
indicated with a green mark.
Display name:
DATA SAVE MODE:
Switches to the specified

display
Switches to the historical trend
display
Switches to data save mode
SELECT SAVE:
Saves the selected file
M.SAMPLE SAVE:
Saves all manually sampled data
REPORT SAVE:
Saves all report data
ALL SAVE:
Saves all data
TO HISTORY:
CHANGE DATA KIND: Switches between display

data and event data
FILENAME DISPLAY: Displays the file name
For information about file names, see section 1.4.
TIME DISPLAY:
Displays the times of the first
and last items of data in the file
Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling the Memory Information

Scrolls the memory information up by half a page
Moves the cursor up
Scrolls the memory information down by half a page

Displaying the Historical Trend for the Data Specified by Memory

Summary
1. Select the data with the cursor.
Displayed Contents.
4-32
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.8 Using the Memory Summary
Saving the Data

Save the data in the internal memory to the CF card or the USB flash memory (/USB1
option).
1
2
2. Press the right arrow key to display the submenu.
3. Select DATA SAVE MODE with the up and down arrow keys.
The display switches to DATA SAVE MODE.
5. To save a specified file, select it with the cursor. This operation is not necessary in
other cases.
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
7. Use the up and down arrow keys to select SELECT SAVE, ALL SAVE, M.
SAMPLE SAVE, or REPORT SAVE.
* If you are using a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option), the message Which
media do you want save to? appears. Select the destination medium using the arrow
13
keys, and press DISP/ENTER.
The measured data is saved.
Note
App
To abort the data saving operation in progress, carry out the procedure below.
Press FUNC and press the Save Stop soft key.
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-33

Progress Display When Saving All Data of the Internal Memory (Release Number
2 or Later)
If you carry out All Save* on the memory summary screen, a pop-up window appears
showing the progress of the save operation.
* Function for saving all data in the internal memory to a CF card or USB flash memory.
Note
The pop-up window appears only when the memory summary display is showing.
If you press the ESC key, the pop-up window clears temporarily and reappears
approximately 10 seconds later.
The time estimate for saving all data is indicated in the table below (when the memory is full
of data). It may take longer depending on the operating conditions of the DX.
Save Destination
Standard memory
(internal memory size suffix code -1)
Large memory
(internal memory size suffix code -2)
Time to Save All Data (Estimate)

CF Card
USB Flash Memory
4 minutes
5 minutes (16 minutes)*
10 minutes
15 minutes (40 minutes)*
* Values for the DXs with firmware version 2.02 or later. Values inside the parentheses are
for the DXs with firmware version 2.01 or earlier.
To abort the data saving operation in progress, carry out the procedure below.

4-34
Press FUNC and press the Save Stop soft key.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Explanation
Save directory
The data is saved by creating a directory each time the save operation is carried out.
Directory name: Specified string_YYMMDD_HHMMSS (where YY to SS is the date
of operation)
File list example

Save directory
4
Display data or event data that is in the process of adding data cannot be saved.
The save operation explained here merely copies the data in the internal memory.
It does not save the unsaved data in the internal memory (see page 1-33).
Data saving is aborted when there is insufficient free space on the storage medium.
Use a storage medium with sufficient free space when saving data.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-35
4.9
Displaying a List of Operation Logs

Displays the following operation logs.
Login log, error log, communication log, FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log, DHCP
log, and Modbus status log
Procedure
Displaying the Log
2. Press the up and down arrow keys to select LOG.
* To show LOG on the menu, see section 5.18.

Sub menu items are LOGIN, ERROR, COMMUNICATION, FTP, MAIL, WEB, SNTP,
DHCP, and MODBUS.
Explanation
Login Log
The log number of the last line and the
total number of logs

User name
Operation method (see the table below)
Operation (see the table below)
Date/time
4-36
Action
Login
Logout
NewTime
TimeChg
PowerOff
PowerOn
TrevStart
TRevEnd
TimeDST
SNTPtimset
Description
Login
Logout
Time change while memory is stopped
Time change through key operation
Power OFF (power failure occurred)
Power ON (recovered from a power failure)
Start the operation of gradually adjusting the time
End the operation of gradually adjusting the time
Switch the daylight savings time
Time change by SNTP
Factor
KEY
COM
REM
ACT
SYS
Description
Key operation
Operations via communication
Operation through the remote control function
Operation through event action
Operation by the system
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs
Error Log

Error message*
Error code*
Date/time
* See section 11.1, A List of Messages.
Communication Log
Message*
Input/output symbol (>: input, <: output)
User name
User ID number (0: serial, 1 to 3: Ethernet)
Date/time
* See the Communication Interface Users Manual (IM04L41B01-17E).
FTP Log
File Name
FTP connection destination
(P: primary, S: secondary)
Error message (detail code)*
Date/time
10
Web Log
11
12

Operation (see the table on the next page)
Error code*
Requested operation (see the table below)
Date/time
13

Request
Screen
Key
Message
App
Description
Screen switch
Key operation
Message assignment/write
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-37

Parameter
TREND
DIGIT
BAR
HIST
OV
DISP
UP
DOWN
LEFT
RIGHT
FAVOR
Messages
Description
Trend display
Digital display
Bar graph display
Historical trend display
Overview display
DISP/ENTER key
Up arrow key
Down arrow key
Left arrow key
Right arrow key
Favorite Key
Character strings that are written.
E-mail Log
Recipient (mail address, message)

Recipient (1: recipient 1, 2: recipient 2)
Error code*
Event (see the table below)
Date/time
Type
Alarm
Time
Report
Fail
Full
Test
Error
Description
Alarm mail
Scheduled mail
Report timeout mail
Power failure recovery mail
Memory full mail
Test mail
Error message mail
SNTP Log

Error code*
Date/time
4-38
IM 04L42B01-01E
DHCP Log

Error code*
Date/time
Modbus Status Log
4
5
Command number, command type

(R: read, W: write)
Communication status*
Communication type (C: client, M: master)

Date/time
* See the Communication Interface Users Manual (IM04L41B01-17E).
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
4-39
4.10 Showing the Four Panel Display

This section explains how to use the four panel display.
Procedure
Showing the Display
2. Press the arrow keys to select 4 PANEL. Then, select the desired four panel
name, and press DISP/ENTER.
Switching the Display

Press the right arrow key to change the display in the order four panel 1, four
panel 2, four panel 3, four panel 4, four panel 1, and so on. Press the left arrow
key to switch the display in reverse order.
Changing the Displays Assigned to the Four Panel Display

Carry out the procedure below on the four panel display.
The title bar of one of the four panels turns dark blue.
2. Select the panel you wish to change the display using the arrow keys (the panel
of which the title bar is dark blue is the selected panel).
The title section of the

selected quadrant
displayed in dark blue.

4. Press the arrow keys to select the display to be assigned.
5. Press DISP/ENTER to assign the specified display to the selected panel.
To close the menu without assigning the display, press ESC.
Registering the Four Panel Display with a New Combination of Screens

Operate as described in Changing the Name of the Four Panel Display on next
page.
* If you switch to other screens and return to the four panel display without registering the
display, the new combination of four panels returns to the original.
Note

When the four panel display is showing, screens that you cannot assign to the four panel
display (LOG, TREND HISTORY, and CUSTOM) do not appear in the menu.
When the DX is showing the four panel display, you cannot switch between TAG DETAIL
ON and TAG DETAIL OFF. Tags are displayed with the same setting as was specified prior
to switching to the four panel display.
4-40
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.10 Showing the Four Panel Display
Expanding One of the Panels to Full Screen

The title bar of one of the panels turns dark blue.
2. Select the panel you wish to expand using the arrow keys (the panel of which the
title bar is dark blue is the selected panel).
4. Press the right arrow key to show the sub menu.
5. Press the up and down arrow keys to select EXPAND.
2
3
* To show EXPAND on the screen menu, see section 5.18.
4
Select EXPAND
6
7
This EXPAND is not shown under the initial conditions. To show, operate as follows:
Press MENU and select Menu customize > Display menu. Set EXPAND on the
display menu to View.
6. Press DISP/ENTER to expand the specified panel.
To close the menu without expanding the screen, press ESC.
Changing the Name of the Four Panel Display

If you change the name of a four panel display, the specified name appears in the
display menu.
Carry out the following procedure when the four panel display is shown.
1. Press FUNC to display the FUNC key menu.

2. Press the 4Panel soft key to display a list of four panel names.
10
11
12
13
3. Press any of the 4Panel 1 to 4panel 4 soft keys to display a window used to enter
the display name.
4. Enter the display name (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )

5. Press DISP/ENTER to activate the specified display name and return to the four
panel display.
Index
To cancel the change, press ESC.

IM 04L42B01-01E
App
4-41
4.11 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1

options; release number 3 or later)
This section explains how to use stacked bar graphs.
Procedure
2. Press the right arrow key to display the submenu.
Display name:
SINGLE GRAPH:
DUAL GRAPH:
Displays a single graph

Displays two graphs
SELECT GROUP: Use the arrow keys to switch

between displayed report groups.
SELECT COLUMN: Use the arrow keys to select a bar
graph.
REPORT GROUP 1 through 6*: Select the report group that you
want to display.
* Varies according to the model.
For information about report channels, see section 10.5.
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.
To close the menu without changing the display contents, press ESC.
Changing Groups, Selecting Bar Graphs, and Moving the Cursor

The amount of data that the up and down arrow keys scroll through depends on the
type of report data. For example, with an H+D report, you can use the arrows to
scroll through the data one day at a time.
SELECT GROUP: Switches to the display for the report group with
the next smallest number
SELECT COLUMN: Moves the bar graph selection cursor to the left
Switches to the previous day, week, or months data
SELECT GROUP: Switches to the display for the report group with
the next highest number
SELECT COLUMN: Moves the bar graph selection cursor to the right
Switches to the next day, week, or months data
4-42
IM 04L42B01-01E
4.11 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1 options; release number 3 or later)
Explanation
SINGLE GRAPH/DUAL GRAPH
You can display one or two bar graphs. The sums of the first channel in a group and of
all other channels that have the same unit as it are displayed.
SINGLE GRAPH
Numeric
display
section
2
3
4
Display area 1
Display area 2
The report data displayed in display areas 1 and 2 varies depending on the report
data type.
Report Data Type
H+D
Day+Week
D+M
Display Area 1
Hourly data
Daily data
Daily data
6
7
Display Area 2
Daily data
Weekly data
Monthly data
Note
DUAL GRAPH
Shows the data from two consecutive periods at the top and bottom of the display.
In 4-panel display, the numeric display section only contains channel numbers or tags.
Channel number or tag

Numbers are abbreviated.
10
Display area 4
11

Display area 3
Display area 1
12
Display area 2
The report data displayed in display areas 1, 2, 3, and 4 varies depending on the
report data type. Display areas 1 and 2 contain the same report data listed above
for SINGLE GRAPH display.
Report Data Type
H+D
Day+Week
D+M
IM 04L42B01-01E
Display Area 4
The hourly and daily data of the day before the data in display area 3
The daily and weekly data of the week before the data in display area 3
The daily and monthly data of the month before the data in display area 3
4-43
13
App
Index
4.11 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1 options; release number 3 or later)
Note
The numbers on the vertical axis of display area 4 (the top display area) and the dates on the
horizontal axis are abbreviated.
Display area 4 (the top bar graph) can only display the data from the period immediately
preceding that of display area 3.
Selecting a Bar
When SINGLE GRAPH is selected, you can move the cursor to a bar that you want to
check, and view the sums of each channel.
The sums of all channels

at the cursor position
Cursor
Power Failure and Time Adjustment Indications
Indicates a power failure

A C appears if more than one
report has been filed for the
same time period.
Power failure
A P indicates when a power failure occurred and a report was supposed to be
filed. A P also indicates when the DX recovered from a power failure and the next
report was filed.
Time adjustment
When a time adjustment causes a report to be filed twice because the time was
moved back, the time adjustment is marked with a C, and the bar graph of the
report that was filed first is used.
If the data for a period does not exist because of a power failure or time adjustment, a
bar graph for the period will not be displayed.
4-44
IM 04L42B01-01E
Chapter 5
5.1
Setting Display Groups
Assign channels and set the group name for each display group. Set lines at specified
positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Group set,
Trip line
3
4
5
6
7
Setup Items
Group number
Select the target group number (1 to 36).
Group set
On/Off
Turn On the groups you want to use.
Group name
Set the group name. (up to 16 characters,
Aa#1)
CH set
Set up to 10 channels from measurement channels, computation channels (/M1
and /PM1 options), and external input channels (/MC1 option).
Enter the channel number using two or three digits.
Separate each channel with a period.
To specify a range of consecutive channels numbers, use a hyphen.
Example: To assign channels 1 and 5 to 8, enter 001.005-008.
10
11
Note
The trend, digital, and bar graph displays are shown in the specified order.
A channel can be assigned to multiple groups.
The same channel cannot be assigned multiple times in a group.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-1
5.1 Setting Display Groups
Note
The channel settings of a display group can be copied to another group on a DX with release
number 2 or later.
Procedure
1. Select the copy source channel settings.
2. Press the Copy soft key.
3. Select the copy destination channel settings.
4. Press the Paste soft key. The channel settings are copied.
Trip line
Set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display.
On/Off
Turn On the trip lines you want to display.
Position
Set the position in the range of 0 to 100% of the display width.
Color
The default colors are red, green, blue, and yellow. If you want to change the color,
select from the 24 available colors.
Line width
Set the line width of the trip line in dots (1 to 3).
5-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.2
Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers
Display the channels using tags or channel numbers. On DX release numbers 3 and
later, tags have tag numbers and tag comments. The tag number is a fixed number that
corresponds to the measurement source. The tag comment can be used to list details
about the channel. You can choose whether or not to use tag numbers.
Setup Screen
2
3
Tag/Channel
4
5
6
7
Tag Number Use/Not (Release number 3 or later)

8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-3
5.2 Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers
Tag
5-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.2 Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers
Setup Items
Operating environment > Tag/Channel
This setting applies to all channels.
Setting
Description
Tag Displays tag numbers and comments.

If an allotted display space is not large enough to display a tag number and a tag
comment, priority is given to the tag number.

Depending on display space limitations, it may not be possible to display the
entire tag.

If a channel is not configured to display tag numbers or comments, the channel
number is displayed.
Channel
Displays channel numbers.
2
3
4
* Tag numbers are available for release numbers 3 and later.
Tag Basic settings > Tag No. Use/Not (Release number 3 or later)
To display tag numbers, select Use. This setting applies to all channels.
First-CH/Last-CH
Tag > Comment

Sets the tag comment. On a DX with a release number of 3 or later, you can enter up
to 32 characters. On a DX with a release number of 2 or earlier, you can enter up to
16 characters. The characters that can be entered are:
Aa#1
Tag > No. (Release number 3 or later)

This setting only appears when you have enabled the use of tag numbers.
Sets the tag number. (Up to 16 characters:
A a # 1)
Text is displayed depending on the tag and channel settings as shown in the figure
below.
*
Not input
Channel
Not
Use
Not
Displayed Text
Tag
Comment
Input
Not input
Input
Not input
Input
Not input
Items Displayed for Different Tag and Channel Settings
Operating
Tag Basic Tag
Environment Settings
Tag/Channel Tag No.
Tag No.
Use/Not
Tag
Use
Input
Set the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that are
displayed on the screen.
Channel
Tag Number Tag
Number
Comment
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes means that the item is displayed
No means that the item is not displayed
10
11
12
* Input means that characters are input.

Not input means that no characters are input.
means that the setting does not affect the display.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-5
5.3
Setting the Trend Interval and Switching to the

Secondary Trend Interval
Set the trend interval. Switch the trend interval to the secondary trend interval while the
memory sampling is in progress. Automatically write messages when the trend interval is
switched.
Setup Screen
Switching the Trend Interval and Writing Messages (When Using the
Secondary Trend Interval)
Trend interval [/div] and Secondary interval [/div]

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend/
Save interval
Setup Items
View > Trend rate switching
On: Enables the function that switches the trend interval while the memory sampling
is in progress. The Second interval [/div] item is displayed in the setting mode.
* When the trend rate switching function is On, the DX cannot be configured to record both the
display and event data (see section 6.1).
Message > Change message

On: Writes the time the interval is switched and the new trend interval as a message
when the trend interval is switched.
5-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.3 Setting the Trend Interval and Switching to the Secondary Trend Interval
Trend interval [/div] and Second interval [/div]

Select the time corresponding to 1 division of the time axis on the trend display from
below: You cannot specify a trend interval that is faster than the scan interval.
*1
*1
*2
5s , 10s , 15s , 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2h, 4h, and
10h
*2 Selectable on the DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048 when the scan interval
is set to fast sampling mode (release number 3 or later).
Note
If the trend interval is set greater than or equal to 1h/div on a DX with release number 2 or later,
the month, day, and hour at the grid position are displayed on the screen. The display format
can be changed by setting the date format.
1
2
3
4
5
Month, day, and hour

at the grid position.
Procedure
Switching the Trend Interval

2. Press the Normal speed soft key or Second speed soft key.
The trend interval is switched. A message is written on the trend display (when the change
message is turned ON).
Display example: 10:53 1min/div
Changing the Trend Display Time Axis While Recording (Memory

sampling) Is in Progress (Release number 3 or later)
10
11
On a DX whose release number is 3 or later, you can change the secondary trend
interval even while recording (memory sampling) is in progress. If you are using the
secondary trend interval to display waveforms and you change it, the time axis will
change immediately afterwards.
Note
12
13
Only the displayed time axis changes when you switch to the secondary trend interval.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-7
5.4
Writing Messages
Write messages.
Setup Screen
Message Write Group
Setting the Messages

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Message
Setup Items
Message
Write group
This setting applies only for messages that are written using keys.
Settings
Common
Separate
Description
Write the message to all groups.
Write the message to the displayed group.
Power-fail message
See section 5.17.
Change message
See section 5.3.
5-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.4 Writing Messages
Message No.
Select the message number (1 to 100). Messages 1 to 10 are common with free
messages.* If a message is changed as a free message, the old message is
overwritten.
* Messages that are written by creating the message on the spot.
Message > Characters

Set the message. (up to 32 characters,
Aa#1)
Procedure
Writing Messages
Messages cannot be written when the memory sampling is stopped.
1. Display the group to write the message.
2. Press FUNC.
5
If a screen unrelated to a group such as the overview is displayed, messages are written to
all groups even when Write group is set to Separate. For the four panel display, messages
are written to the displayed groups.
Messages are written to all groups regardless of the displayed screen when Write group is
set to Common.
3. Press the Message soft key.

4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired message number range
(example: [1-10]).
A list of message is displayed.
8
9
10
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the number of the message you want to write.

A message mark, time, and message are shown on the trend display.
11
12
13
App
Message
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-9
5.4 Writing Messages
Writing Free Messages

Create a message on the spot and write it.
1. Display the group to write the message.
2. Press FUNC.
3. Press the Free message soft key.

4. Press a message number soft key.
The message entry window appears.
5. Enter the message. (up to 32 characters,

Aa#1)
A message mark, time, and message are shown on the trend display.
Writing Add Messages

Add messages to the past data positions. This operation can be carried out on the
past section of the data that is currently being memory sampled.
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the historical trend of the data that is
currently being memory sampled.
Press DISP/ENTER and select TREND HISTORY > (group name) > DISP/
ENTER
2. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position you want to write the
message.

3. Write the message according to the procedure given in Writing Messages or
Writing Free Messages. Use the Add Message or Add Free Message soft key.
Add message
Cursor
(yellow line)
Explanation
Display Color of Messages
The message colors on the trend display are shown below. You cannot change them.
No.
Color
1
Red
2
Green
3
Blue
4
Blue violet
5
Brown
6
Orange
7
Yellow-green
8
Light blue
9
Violet
10
Gray
The colors for messages 11 to 100 are repetitions of the colors above.
Add Message
The message timestamp is the time that the message is written. It is not the time
stamp of the data at the position where the message is written.

Display example on the

message summary
Add message
(displayed in blue)
Up to 50 messages can be written.

Messages cannot be added to data in the internal memory that has already been
saved to a file or data that has been loaded from the external storage medium.
5-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.5
Changing the Channel Display Colors
Change the channel display colors. The settings are applied to the trend and bar graph
displays.
Color
Setup Screen
5
6
7
Setup Items
Group of channel
Color
To change the color, select from the following 24 colors.
Red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark
gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-11
5.6
Displaying Channels in Display Zones

Specify a waveform display zone for each channel so that waveforms do not overlap.
Setup Screen
Zone, Scale, Bar graph
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
Zone > Lower, Zone > Upper

Sets the zone in which the waveform is displayed. You can set Lower and Upper as
a position (%) when taking the maximum display width to be 100%. Set Upper greater
than Lower, and the zone width (Upper Lower) greater than or equal to 5%.
Lower: 0 to 95%
Upper: 5 to 100%
5-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.7
Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
Display a scale on the trend display.

Setup Screen
Scale Position and Number of Scale Divisions
3
4
5
6
7
Number of Displayed Scale Digits and Current Value Indicator

8
9
10
11
Showing the Scales
To show scales on the trend display, press DISP/ENTER (show the display
selection menu) > the right arrow key (show the sub menu), and select SCALE
ON (see section 4.2).
12
13
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
App
Scale > Position

Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 10. Select Off if you do
not wish to display the scale.
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-13
Index
5.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
Scale > Division

Select the number of main scale marks on the trend display from 4 to 12 and C10.
C10: The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks, and scale
values are indicated at 0, 30, 50, 70, and 100% positions on the trend display.
The figure below is an example in which each scale is displayed with the position
shifted.
Horizontal Trend Display

Scale display position
10 9
Number of scale divisions: 4

Number of scale divisions: C10
Vertical Trend Display

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Number of scale divisions: C10
Scale display position
5-14
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
Note
Trend > Scale > Digit

Fine: If the scale value is two-digit display, it can be changed to three digits. For

example, if the scale range is 49.0 to 51.0, the scale values are displayed

using 3 digits as shown below.

1
2
3
4
5
If the scales of multiple channels are set to the same position, the scale of the channel
assigned first to the group is displayed.
Example: If the order of assignment of a group is 003.002.001, and the scale display
position of all channels is set to 1, the scale of channel 3 is displayed at display position 1.
Even if some of the scale display positions are skipped, the scale is packed towards display
position 1.
Example: Suppose the assignment of channels to a group is 001.002.003, and the display
positions of the scales are set to 1, 3, and 6, respectively. The scales are actually displayed
at positions 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections by the main scale marks. The section between
the main scale marks is divided into 10 subsections by medium and small scale marks.
However, small scale marks are not displayed in the following cases.
When the resolution of the input range is smaller than the total number of small scale
marks.
When zone display is used.
When partial expanded display is used (numbers are displayed at the ends of the scale
and at the boundary position).
The scale values are displayed according to the following rules.
If the number of scale divisions is 4 to 7 for the vertical trend display7, values are
displayed at all main scale marks. If the number of scale divisions is greater, the values
are displayed at every other main scale marks.
Scale upper and lower limits are displayed at the ends of the scale.
Scale values are displayed up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign. However, if the
integer part of values at the ends of the scale is both 1 digit or the integer part is zero, 2
digits are displayed.
Example: If the scale is 0.05 to 0.50, the lower limit is 0.0 and the upper limit is 0.5.
If the integer part of either end of the scale is 2 or 3 digits, the fractional part is truncated.
Example: If the scale is 0.1 to 100.0, the lower limit is 0 and the upper limit is 100.
If the integer part of either end of the scale is 4 or more digits, the value is displayed
2
using a 3-digit mantissa and exponent like 10 or 10 .
Example: If the scale is 10 to 2000, the lower limit is 1 and the upper limit is 200 10.
The unit is displayed near the center of the scale. If partial expanded display is used,
the display position is offset from the center. For the vertical trend display, the number of
characters that can be displayed is up to six. For the horizontal trend display, the number of
characters that can be displayed is up to four.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Trend > Scale > Value indicator

The current value is displayed as a mark or a bar graph.
12
13

App
Bar graph
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-15
5.8
Displaying Alarm Point Marks and Color Scale

Band on the Scale
Display alarm point marks on the scale. Display the specified range with a color band.
Setup Screen
Alarm mark, Color scale band
Setup Items
Alarm point mark

Color band
First-CH/Last-CH
5-16
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.8 Displaying Alarm Point Marks and Color Scale Band on the Scale
Alarm Mark Indication
Alarm mark > Mark kind
Displays marks indicating the values of the high and low limit alarms, delay high and
low limit alarms, and difference high and low limit alarms. This setting is common with
the bar graph display.
Settings
Alarm
Fixed
Description
The alarm mark is green under normal conditions. It changes to the
specified alarm color when an alarm occurs (release number 3 or
later; see section 3.7 for details).
Displays a fixed color.
Mark
or
Alarm mark > Indicate on Scale
To display alarm point marks, select On.
Alarm mark > Alarm mark color > Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm 3, and Alarm 4
If the Mark kind is set to Fixed, specify the color of the alarm point marks.
If one of the colors under Alarm mark color is set to Auto, its corresponding point
mark will appear in the specified alarm color (release number 3 or later; see section
3.7 for details).
5
Color Scale Band
Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the
scale. This setting is common with the bar graph display.
Color scale band > Band area

Settings
In
Out
Off
Description
Displays the area inside using the color band.
Displays the area outside using the color band.
Disables the function.
Color scale band > Color

Set the display color.
Color scale band > Display position > Lower and Upper
Specify the display position. Set a value within the span or scale range.
Lower: Lower limit of the area.
Upper: Upper limit of the area.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-17
5.9
Partially Expanding the Waveform

Partially expand a waveform (reduce the other sections) on the display.
We recommend that you display the scale when viewing partially expanded channels.
The numbers for the ends of the scale and the boundary position are displayed, and
you can identify the expanded and reduced areas easily. However, numbers are not
displayed for other scale marks.
Setup Screen
Turning ON/OFF the Partial Expanded Display Function
Partially Expanded Display Method

Partial
Setup Items
View > Partial
If you select On, the Partial setup item appears in the setting mode.
First-CH/Last-CH
Partial > On/Off

To enable partial expanded display, select On.
Partial > Expand

Set the position where the value specified by Boundary is to be displayed within the
display span in the range of 1 to 99.
5-18
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.9 Partially Expanding the Waveform
Partial > Boundary

Set the value that is to be the boundary between the reduced section and the
expanded section in the range of minimum span value + 1 digit to maximum span
value 1 digit. For channels that are set to scaling, the selectable range is minimum
scale value + 1 digit to maximum scale value 1 digit.
Example: Input range: 6 V to 6V. Expand: 30. Boundary: 0

The 6 V to 0 V range is displayed in the 0% to 30% range, and the 0 V
to 6 V range is displayed in the 30% to 100% range.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-19
5.10 Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the

Waveform at Start, Message Display Direction,
Waveform Line Width, and Grid
Change the display layout, clearing of the waveform at start, waveform line width, and
grid.
Setup Screen
Setup Items
Trend > Direction
Set the display direction of the trends to Horizontal, Vertical, Wide, or Split.
Trend > Trend clear

Settings
On
Off
Description
Clears the displayed waveform when the memory sampling is started.
Does not clear the waveform when the memory sampling is started.
Trend > Message direction

Set the display direction of messages to Horizontal or Vertical. When the trend is set
to Vertical, the message direction is fixed to Horizontal.
Trend > Trend line

Set the line width of the trend in dots (1 to 3).
Trend > Grid

Select the number of grids to be displayed in the waveform display area of the trend
display.
Settings
4 to 12
Auto
5-20
Description
Displays a grid that divides the display width into 4 to 12 sections.
Displays the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the
first assigned channel of the group.
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method
Change the bar graph display method.

Setup Screen
Display Direction
3
4
5
6
7
Base Position and the Number of Scale Divisions

8
9
10
11
Setup Items
Bar graph > Direction
12
Set the display direction of bar graphs to Horizontal or Vertical.
First-CH/Last-CH
Set the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that are
displayed on the screen.
13
Bar graph > Base position

Set the base position of bar graphs to Normal, Center, Lower,* or Upper.*
The setting is applied when displaying the bar graph and when displaying the current
value on the scale using the bar graph.
App
* You can select Lower and Upper on DXs with release number 2 or later.
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-21
When the Display Direction of the Bar Graph Is Vertical

Normal
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Span lower limit or span upper limit (or scale
lower limit or scale upper limit), whichever is less
Value at the top of the bar graph: Span lower limit or span upper limit (or scale lower
limit or scale upper limit), whichever is greater
Starting point of the bar: Bottom edge
Center
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Same as with Normal.
Value at the top of the bar graph: Same as with Normal.
Starting point of the bar: Center
Lower
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
Value at the top of the bar graph: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Starting point of the bar: Bottom edge
Upper
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Same as with Lower.
Value at the top of the bar graph: Same as with Lower.
Starting point of the bar: Top edge
Normal
Center
Lower
Upper
VL
VL
Vupper
Vupper
VS
VS
Vlower
Vlower
Vupper:
Vlower:
VL:
VS:
:
Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)

Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
Vlower or Vupper, whichever is greater
Vlower or Vupper, whichever is less
Starting point of the bar
Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input
range are 0.0 and 100.0, respectively
Normal
Center
Lower
Upper
5-22
0.0
0.0
100.0
100.0
-100.0
-100.0
0.0
0.0
IM 04L42B01-01E
When the Display Direction of the Bar Graph Is Horizontal

The span lower limit (or scale lower limit) becomes the left edge of the bar graph, and the
span upper limit (or scale upper limit) becomes the right edge of the bar graph.
Normal: Left edge or right edge, whichever is less
Center: Center
Lower: Left edge
Upper: Right edge
Normal
Vlower
(Vlower < Vupper)
Vupper
Lower
Vlower
Vupper
Upper
Vlower
Vupper
Vupper: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)

Vlower: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
:
Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input
range are 0.0 and 100.0, respectively
0.0
100.0
Normal
Center
Lower
Upper
0.0
100.0
0.0
100.0
0.0
100.0
7
8
9
When Displaying the Current Value on the Scale Using the Bar Graph
Normal
Center
Lower
3
4
Center
Vlower
Vupper
(Vlower > Vupper)
Vlower
Upper
Vupper
Normal
(Vlower < Vupper)
10
Vupper
11
(Vlower > Vupper)
Center
12
Lower
Vlower
13
Upper
Bar graph > Division

Select the number of main scale marks from 4 to 12.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-23
5.12 Using the Circular Display

Use a circular display in place of the trend display.
Setup Screen
Circular Display
Time per Revolution
Circular/Save interval
5-24
IM 04L42B01-01E
Operation at One Cycle
Circular, Bar graph, LCD, Monitor
2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-25
Setup Items
View > Trend type
Select Circular.
Circular/Save interval > Time per revolution [/rev]

Select the time of revolution from 20min to 4week.
* You can specify 20min on DX2004s or DX2008s with release number 2 or earlier.
Circular/Save interval > Save interval (when recording display data)

Select the size of a record data file. The recorded data is divided by the file size
specified here. The available settings vary in the range of 10min to 31day depending
on the Time per revolution setting.
*
For the setting procedure to record the event data, see section 6.1.
Circular/Save interval > Offset time

The time at the reference position on the circle can be offset in unit of an hour. The
available settings vary depending on the time of revolution setting. The figure below
is an example in which the time per revolution is 6h and indicates the time positions
when the offset time is Off and 1h.
Offset time set to Off
Offset time set to 1h
Hour 5, 11, 17, and 23
Hour 1, 7, 13, and 19 Hour 4, 10, 16, and 22
Hour 5, 11, 17, and 23

1h
Hour 0, 6, 12, and 18
Hour 4, 10, 16, and 22
Hour 2, 8, 14, and 20
Hour 3, 9, 15, and 21
Hour 1, 7, 13, and 19
Hour 0, 6, 12, and 18
Hour 2, 8, 14, and 20
Hour 3, 9, 15, and 21

Time per Revolution
20min, 30min, 1h
2h
6h
8h
12h
16h
1day, 2day, 1week, 2week, 4week
Selectable Offset Times
1h
1h to 5h
1h to 7h
1h to 11h
1h to 15h
1h to 23h
Circular > Full circle action

Settings
Allclear
Divclear
5-26
Description
Clears the entire waveform when one revolution of waveform is recorded and
continues the recording of the next revolution.
Clears one division of the old waveform when the remaining amount of
waveform to be recorded falls to one division and continues the recording.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Procedure
Circular Display
2. Select TREND using the arrow keys and press DISP/ENTER.


3. Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys.
Group name:
4
5
Displays the group.
SCALE ON:
SCALE OFF:
Displays the scale.

Clears the scale.
1/4 CIRCLE:
Displays a quarter of the cycle.
FULL CIRCLE: Displays the full cycle.
DIGITAL OFF: Clears the numeric display section.

DIGITAL ON: Displays the numeric display section.
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the displayed
groups.
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch the
displayed groups.
7
8
To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press ESC.
Displaying the Quarter Cycle Display

Select 1/4 CIRCLE as described in the Changing the Displayed Contents. The most
recent quarter cycle is displayed expanded.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-27
Simplified Historical Trend

Press the up arrow key while showing the quarter cycle to show the historical trend of
the displayed quarter cycle.
Carry out the procedure below to switch the display in unit of quarter cycle.
Full cycle
Quarter cycle
1/4 CIRCLE
Up arrow key
Simplified historical trend

Up arrow key
Up arrow key
...

FULL CIRCLE
Down arrow key
Down arrow key
Down arrow key
FULL CIRCLE
Historical Trend
There are five methods to display the past measured data.
For the procedure to recall from the display selection menu, see below.
For the procedure to display from the alarm summary, see section 4.6.
For the procedure to display from the message summary, see section 4.7.
For the procedure to display from the memory summary, see section 4.8.
To show the measured data stored on an external storage medium, see section 6.8.
Showing the Display

Carry out the procedure below while memory sampling is in progress.

2. Select TREND HISTORY using the arrow keys and press DISP/ENTER.
One screen of data is displayed.
5-28
IM 04L42B01-01E

3. Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys.
Group name: Displays the group.

SCALE ON: Displays the scale.
SCALE OFF: Clears the scale.
4
5
Switches to the specified display.

Return to the display that was shown before the
historical trend.
Displays the alarm summary in the loaded data file.

Displays the message summary in the loaded data file.
Displays the information of the loaded data file.
Expands/Reduces the time axis.
10
To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press ESC.
Moving the Cursor

Move the cursor in the

past direction
Move the cursor in the
current direction
11
Hold down an arrow key to move the

cursor by a division.
Displaying the Continuing Data (Loading Data to the Display Memory)

Approximately one screen of data is shown on the historical trend display. The
continuing data can be shown as follows:
Displayed
13
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and press

the arrow key yet again to display the continuing data.
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and press
the arrow key yet again to display the continuing data.
IM 04L42B01-01E
12
5-29
App
Index
Specifying the Display Range

Select the display range.
1. Press the up arrow key.
The waveform of the entire data range is displayed at the top section of the screen. The
white frame indicates the data range that is currently displayed. The yellow horizontal line is
the cursor.
All data display

Displayed data range
(White frame)
2. Press the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor.
Cursor
a
b
Displayed

A
B
A is selected when the cursor position is at a.
B is selected when the cursor position is at b.
3. Press the down arrow key.
Selecting Another File

To display data from another file, select the file from the memory summary.
Message
On the historical trend, up to eight newest messages that exist before the cursor
position can be displayed.
5-30
IM 04L42B01-01E
Explanation
Scale Marks
The number of scale marks varies depending on the time corresponding to one cycle.
Scale marks consist of main scale marks and subscale marks. Main scale marks are
used to divide the cycle into sections; subscale marks are used to divide between the
main scale marks. The number of divisions created by main scale marks and subscale
marks are as follows:
Time/rev
Number of Divisions
Created by Subscale
Marks
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
7
Time per
Scale Mark
Display
Update Rate
1 min
1 min 30 s
2 min 30 s
5 min
15 min
30 min
30 min
1h
1h
2h
6h
12 h
24 h
0.5 s
1s
2s
4s
10 s
20 s
20 s
40 s
1 min
2 min
4 min
8 min
20 min
4
5
6
Event Data
When displaying event data using the historical trend, the time corresponding to one
cycle is automatically determined from the sampling interval (Sample rate) of the
event data to be displayed as follows:
Sample rate
Time/rev
25 ms
125 ms
250 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
5 min
10 min
15 min
20 min
30 min
1min/rev
5 min/rev
10 min/rev
20 min/rev
30 min/rev
1 h/rev
2 h/rev
6 h/rev
12 h/rev
1 day/rev
2 day/rev
1 week/rev
2 week/rev
3 week/rev
4 week/rev
6 week/rev
Number of Divisions Created

by Main Scale Marks
6
5
5
5
5
12
12
12
12
12
12
7
7
7
4
7
20min
30min
1h
2h
6h
8h
12h
16h
1day
2day
1week
2week
4week
Number of Divisions
Created by Main Scale
Marks
5
5
12
12
12
8
12
8
12
12
7
7
4
Number of Divisions Created

by Subscale Marks
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
3
7
3
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-31
5.13 Changing the Background Color of the Display

Change the background color of the display. This setting is applied to the operation
screens.
Setup Screen
Setup Items
Monitor > Background > Display
Set the background color of the operation screen to White (default setting) or Black.
Monitor > Background > Historical trend

Select the background color of the historical trend display from the following:
Settings: White, Black (default setting), Cream, and Lightgray
5-32
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.14 Automatically Switching Display Groups
Automatically switch the displayed group at a specified interval.
Setup Screen
3
4
5
Setup Items
Monitor > Scroll time

Set the switching interval from the available settings between 5 s and 1 min. The
groups switch in ascending order.
Select whether to automatically switch on the display selection menu.
See section 4.2
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-33
5.15 Automatically Reverting to the Specified

Display
Show a preset display when there is no operation for a specific time.
Setup Screen
Setup Items
Monitor > Jump default display
Returns to a preset display if there is no key operation for a specific time.
Settings
1min to 1h
Off
Description
Time until switching the display.
Procedure
Specifying the Display to be Shown
1. Show the operation display you want to designate.
3. Press the Standard display soft key.

The display is registered.
5-34
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.16 Using the Favorite Key
Register a frequently used display to the Favorite key and enable the display to be
shown through simple operation.
2
3

Favorite key
Setup Screen
FAVORITE Key action (Release number 3 or later)
FAVORITE Key action
5
6
7
8
9
Setup Items
Action (Release number 3 or later)
Setting
History
Favorite
Description
The historical trend of the currently displayed data appears when you press
the favorite key.
The displays that have been registered to the favorite key appear when you
press the favorite key.
Select Favorite when you want to register displays to the favorite key and use
it to switch between them.
10
11
Group display (Release number 3 or later)

Specify this setting when Action is set to Favorite.
Setting
Current
Saved
Description
Of the displays that have been registered to the favorite key, those that
display groups (the trend, digital, bar graph, and historical trend displays) are
displayed using the currently displayed group.
Registered displays are displayed as they were registered.
Time axis zoom (Release number 3 or later)
12
13
Specify this setting when Action is set to Favorite.

Setting
Current
Saved
Description
Historical trend displays that have been registered to the favorite key are
displayed using the current time axis zoom.
Historical trends are displayed using the time axis zooms that they were
registered with.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-35
5.16 Using the Favorite Key
Procedure
Registering the Display
Up to 8 displays can be registered.
1. In the operation mode, show the display you want to register.

2. Press FUNC.
3. Press the Favorite regist soft key. Then, press a registration number soft key.
4. Press the Regist soft key.
A window appears for you to enter the display name.

* To delete a registration, press the Delete soft key.
5. Enter the display name (using up to 16 characters,
A a # 1 ).
The display is registered.
Switching the Display

When You Set Action to History
The historical trend of the currently displayed data appears when you press the
favorite key. Press the key again to return to the previous display.
When You Set Action to Favorite

The displays change in the order that they were registered in each time you press the
favorite key. Pressing the favorite key after the last registered display appears returns
the display to what it was before the favorite key was pressed.
5-36
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.17 Writing a Message When the DX Recovers

from a Power Failure
A message is written to the trend display when the DX recovers from a power failure
while memory sampling is in progress.
Setup Screen
Power-fail message
3
4
5
6
7
Setup Items
Message > Power-fail message
Settings
On
Off
Description
A message is written when the DX recovers from a power failure while memory
sampling is in progress.
Display example: 15:12 Power Off 2005/10/25 15:12:57
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-37
5.18 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display

Selection Menu
Change the FUNC key menu that appears when the FUNC key is pressed and the
display selection menu that appears when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed.
Setup Screen
FUNC Key Menu
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Menu customize
> Function menu
Number indicating
the display order

Menu name
White: Used
Gray: Not used
Display Menu
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Menu customize
> Display menu
Separator
Setup Items
Enabling/Disabling the FUNC Key Menu
Items whose menu name is white are shown.
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.

2. Press the View or Hide soft key.
If you press the Hide soft key, the menu name is displayed in gray, and does not appear in
the FUNC key menu.
5-38
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.18 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display Selection Menu
Changing the Display Order of the FUNC Key Menu

Menu items are displayed in order by number. In addition, menu items appear when
the corresponding function can be used.
1
2
2. Press the Select soft key.
The menu item is enclosed in a red frame.
3. Press the arrow keys to select the destination.

4. Press the Transfer soft key.
The menu item moves to the selected number position.
Description of the FUNC Key Menus

For a description of each item, see section 4.1.
Enabling/Disabling the Display Menu and Sub Menu

Items whose menu name is white are shown.
2. Press the View or Hide soft key.
If you press the Hide soft key, the menu name is displayed in gray, and does not appear in
the display selection menu.
Changing the Display Menu/Sub Menu Positions

2. Press the Select soft key.
The menu item is enclosed in a red frame.
3. Press the arrow keys to select the destination.

4. Press the Transfer soft key.
The menu item moves to the selected position.
Showing/Hiding Separators
2. Press the Separate soft key.
A separator (line) is displayed between the current item and the lower item.
If you select a menu item whose separator is already shown, this operation hides the
separator.
You can set up to three separators in the display selection menu and each sub menu.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-39
Description of the Display Selection Menus and Sub Menus

Items with asterisk (*) are set to Hide by default.
Display Selection Menu
TREND
TREND HISTORY
DIGITAL
BAR
CUSTOM DISPLAY
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATOR
5-40
Sub Menu
GROUP 1 to GROUP 36
1/4 CIRCLE
ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL
SCALE ON/OFF
DIGITAL OFF/ON
MESSAGE DISP2/1
* TREND SPACE ON/OFF
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF
FINE GRID ON/OFF
AUTO ZONE ON/OFF
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF
EXPAND
GROUP 1 to GROUP 36
GROUP 1 to GROUP 36
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF
EXPAND
GROUP 1 to GROUP 36
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF
EXPAND
INTERNAL 1 TO INTERNAL 3
EXTERNAL 1 TO EXTERNAL 25
NEW
CURSOR OFF/ON
JUMP TO ALM SUM
JUMP TO TREND
* JUMP TO DIGITAL
* JUMP TO BAR
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF
EXPAND
EXPAND
Reference Section
Section 5.12
Section 4.2
Section 4.2
Section 4.2
Section 4.2
Section 4.10
Section 4.3
Section 4.2
Section 4.2
Section 4.2
Section 4.10
Section 4.2
Section 4.2
Section 4.10
IM04L41B01-04E
IM04L41B01-04E
Section 4.4
Section 4.4
Section 4.4
Section 4.4
Section 4.4
Section 4.4
Section 4.10
Section 3.12
IM 04L42B01-01E
Display Selection Menu
INFORMATION
*
*
*
* Log
4 PANEL
* EXPAND
1
2
3
4
5
*
*
Sub Menu
Reference Section
ALARM SUMMARY
Section 4.5
MESSAGE SUMMARY
Section 4.5
MEMORY SUMMARY
Section 4.5
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF
Section 4.6
MODBUS CLIENT
Section 4.5
MODBUS MASTER
Section 4.5
RELAY
Section 4.5
EVENT SWITCH
Section 4.5
REPORT DATA
Section 4.5
COLUMN BAR
Section 4.11
TO HISTORY
TO HISTORY(DISP)
TO HISTORY(EV)
TO OVERVIEW
Section 4.6
CHANGE SORT KEY
ASCENDING ORDER/
DESCENDING ORDER
DATA SAVE MODE
Section 4.8
SELECT SAVE
Section 4.8
M.SAMPLE SAVE
Section 4.8
REPORT SAVE
Section 4.8
ALL SAVE
Section 4.8
CHANGE DISP ITEM
Section 4.7
CHANGE DATA KIND
Section 4.8
FILENAME DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY Section 4.8
CHANGE REPORT CH
Section 4.5
SINGLE GRAPH/DUAL GRAPH
Section 4.11
SELECT COLUMN/SELECT GROUP Section 4.11
REPORT GROUP 1 to 6
Section 4.11
EXPAND
Section 4.10
LOGIN
Section 4.9
ERROR
Section 4.9
COMMUNICATION
Section 4.9
FTP
Section 4.9
MAIL
Section 4.9
WEB
Section 4.9
SNTP
Section 4.9
DHCP
Section 4.9
MODBUS
Section 4.9
MIX
Section 4.10
ALL TREND
Section 4.10
ALL DIGITAL
Section 4.10
ALL BAR
Section 4.10
Section 4.10
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-41
5.19 Displaying Comments (Release number 3 or

later)
Register text strings to comment text fields and combine comment text fields to create
comment text blocks.
You can display the text from a comment text block when a certain event occurs (an
alarm for example).
You can use comment text block text for annunciator window labels (see section 3.12
for details).
Setup Screen
Entering Comments
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Message,
Comment Text > Comment txt fields
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Message,
Comment Text > Comment txt block
Displaying Comments
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Event action
See section 7.1.
5-42
IM 04L42B01-01E
5.19 Displaying Comments (Release number 3 or later)
Setup Items
Comment txt field no, Text info
You can register a comment to a specified comment text field (field 1 to 200).
Text info: you can enter up to 32 characters ( A a # 1 ).
Comment txt block no, Comment txt field no

You can register a comment to a specified comment text block (block 1 to 100).
Register comments to comment text blocks by combining up to 5 comment text fields.
The text from the selected comment text fields appears on the right of the screen.
Logic box number, Event, Action, Comment Txt Block No
Use the event action function to specify the event that will cause a comment to be
displayed. For information about how to set the event action function, see section 7.1.
Example: If even one alarm occurs, the text from comment text block 2 is displayed.
Setting
Alarm
CommentDisplay
2
5
Item
Event
Action
Comment Txt Block No
6
7
8
9
A comment appears when an alarm occurs. Pressing any key makes the comment
disappear.
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
5-43
Chapter 6
6.1
Setting the Recording Conditions of the

Measured Data
Set the method for recording the measured data.

Setup Screen
Data Type
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > A/D, Memory
3
4
5
Measurement Channels
7
8
9
10
File Save Interval (Display Data)
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend/
Save interval or Circular/Save interval
T-Y Display
Circular Display
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-1
6.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data
Recording Conditions of Event Data

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save >
Event data
Setup Items
Memory > Data kind
Settings
Display
E+D
Event
Description
Records display data.
Records display data and event data.
Records event data.
Memory sample > On/Off

Turn On the target channels.
Trend/Save interval > Trend interval [/div] (when recording display data)
See the table below. You can only set trend intervals that are longer than the scan
interval you set in Basic Setting Mode.
Trend/Save interval > Save interval (when recording display data)

specified here. The available settings vary depending on the Trend interval setting.
Trend interval*1
Sample rate
Selectable range
of auto save
interval
Trend interval*1
Sample rate
Selectable range
of auto save
interval
Trend interval*1
Sample rate
Selectable range
of auto save
interval
5 s*2
125 ms
10 min to 12
hours
10 s*2
250 ms
10 min to 1
day
15 s*3
500 ms
10 min to 3
days
30 s
1s
10 min to 7
days
1 min
2s
10 min to 14
days
2 min
4s
10 min to 14
days
5 min
10 s
10 min to 31
days
10 min
20 s
10 min to 31
days
15 min
30 s
10 min to 31
days
20 min
40 s
1 hour to 31
days
30 min
1 min
1 hour to 31
days
1h
2 min
1 hour to 31
days
2h
4 min
2 hours to
31 days
4h
8 min
4 hours to
31 days
10 h
20 min
8 hours to
31 days
*1 You cannot set a trend interval that corresponds to a sampling interval that is faster than the
scan interval.
*3 Selectable in fast sampling mode on the DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048
Trend/Save interval > Second interval [/div]

See section 5.3.
Circular/Save interval
6-2
See section 5.12.

IM 04L42B01-01E
6.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data
Event data (when recording event data)

Sample rate
Select the data recording interval. Use the table under Data length for reference.
Mode
Settings
Free
Single
Repeat
Description
Records data continuously.
Records data when the trigger condition is met.
Records data each time the trigger condition is met.
Data length
specified here. The available data lengths vary depending on the Sample rate
setting.
*1
25 ms
10 min to 4
hours
125 ms
10 min to 1
day
250 ms
10 min to 2
days
500 ms
10 min to 3
days
1s
10 min to 7
days
2s
10 min to 14
days
5s
10 min to 31
days
10 s
10 min to 31
days
30 s
1 hour to 31
days
1 min
1 hour to 31
days
2 min
1 hour to 31
days
5 min
1 hour to 31
days
10 min
1 hour to 31
days
15 min*3
1 hour to 31
days
20 min*3
1 hour to 31
days
5
6
Sample rate
Selectable
range of data
length
Sample rate*1
Selectable
range of data
length
Sample rate*1
Selectable
range of data
length
Sample rate*1
Selectable
range of data
length
*2
30 min*3
1 hour to 31
days
*1 You cannot choose an interval that is faster than the scan interval.
*2 Selectable on the DX2004 and DX2008.
*3 Release number 3 or later.
Pre-trigger
Specify the range when recording data before the trigger condition is met. Select
the range as a percentage of the data length from 0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, and 100%.
If you do not want to record the data existing before the trigger condition is met,
select 0%.
Trigger signal > Key
Select On if you want to activate the trigger using key operation.
Note
9
10
11
Triggers can be applied using event action (see section 7.1).

If the trigger condition is already met when you press START, recording starts.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-3
6.2
Setting the Method for Saving the Data

Set the method for recording the measured data to the storage medium.
Setup Screen
Auto save
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Security, Media save, Batch
File header, Data file name

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save > File
header, Data file name
Save directory
Save directory
6-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
6.2 Setting the Method for Saving the Data
Setup Items
Save > Auto save
Settings
On
Off
Description
Automatically saves the measured data to the CF card. Specify On to
enable the media FIFO function.
Does not automatically save the data. Save the measured data manually
to the CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
2
3
Save > Media FIFO (Release Number 2 or Later)

This item appears if Auto save is set to On.
Settings
On
Off
Description
Enable media FIFO. Constantly retains the most recent data files in the
CF card.
Disable media FIFO. Replace the CF card if the free space on the CF
card drops low.
4
5
File header > Characters

Set the header comment to be written to the data file. (Up to 50 characters,
Aa#1)
Data file name > Structure
Sets the structure of the file name when saving data.

Description
Serial number + user-assigned character string + date
Serial number + user-assigned character string
Serial number + batch name (when using the batch function)
Settings
Date
Serial
Batch
Data file name > Identified strings

Set the user-assigned section of the file name. (Up to 16 characters,
Symbols that can be used: #, %, (, ), +, -, ., @, , and _.
For details on the data file name, see section 1.4.
Aa#1)
Save directory > Directory name

Set the name of the directory on the storage medium for saving the data on the
external storage medium. (Up to 20 characters, A a # 1 )
Strings that cannot be used: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, COM1 to COM9, and
LPT1 to LPT9.
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-5
6.3
Using the Batch Function

Set the batch function.
Setup Screen
Batch Function
Data file name

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save > File
header, Data file name
Text Field
Batch text
6-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
6.3 Using the Batch Function
Setup Items
Batch > On/Off
Select On to use the batch function.
For details on MultiBatch, see IM04L41B01-03E.
Batch > Lot-No. digit

Select the number of digits of the lot number from 4, 6, or 8. Select Off to disable the
lot number.
Batch > Auto increment

Settings
On
Off
Description
Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to the lot number of
the current measurement + 1.
Disables the operation described above.
3
4
Data file name > Structure

Batch: Sets the name of the display data files or event data files to sequence number
+ batch name.
For details on the data file name, see section 1.4.
Text field number
Select a number from 1 to 24 on a DX whose release number is 3 or later. Select a

number from 1 to 8 on a DX whose release number is 2 or earlier.
2. Press the Batch soft key.
Text field > Title of field, Text field > Characters

Set the string.
Title of field: (Up to 20 characters,
A a # 1 ),
Characters: (Up to 30 characters,
Aa#1)
Procedure
Setting the Batch name and Comment

A window appears for you to enter the batch name and comment.
3. Set the batch number. (Up to 32 characters,
Aa#1)
10

If you are using the lot number, set the lot number.
4. Set batch comments 1, 2, and 3. (Up to 50 characters each,
Aa#1)
11
Note
Batch numbers and lot numbers cannot be changed after memory start.
You can change the comment as many times as you wish before executing memory start.
After memory start, only the comments that are not specified can be entered. You can
change the comment as many times as you wish while the window for setting the comment
is displayed. The last specified comment is valid.
The comment is cleared when memory stop is executed.
The batch number, lot number, and comments are saved to the display data file or event
data file. They are not saved to the setup file.
Displaying the Text Field Settings
12
13
App

2. Press the Text field soft key.
Index
The text field settings are displayed.
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-7
The text field contents are displayed on page 3. Use the left and right arrow keys to
switch pages (release number 3 or later).
Starting Recording (Memory start)

1. Press START to open the start recording screen (release number 3 or later).
2. After setting a batch number (Batch name-No.), a lot number (Lot No.), and
comments, move the cursor (blue) to START, and then press DISP/ENTER.
The internal memory icon in the status display section changes from the icon that indicates
that memory sampling is stopped to the icon that indicates that memory sampling has
started.
If you are recording display or event data in Free mode, recording will start.
If you are recording event data in a trigger mode (Single or Repeat), the DX will enter a
trigger-wait state.
6-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
Stopping Recording (Memory stop)

1. Press STOP. A confirmation window opens.
2
3
4
5
2. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER.
If the DX is equipped with computation functions (/M1 and /PM1 options), select
Mem+Math or Memory and press DISP/ENTER.

The internal memory icon in the status display section changes to the icon that indicates
that memory sampling is stopped.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-9
6.4
Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving

the Measured data
Start the recording and save the measured data to the external storage medium.
Procedure
Starting the Recording (Memory Start)
Press START. The internal memory icon in the status display section changes from
the stop icon to memory sampling icon.
When recording display data or event data in free mode, recording starts.
When recording event data in trigger mode, the DX enters the trigger-wait
condition.
* For the procedures when using the batch function, see section 6.3.
Applying a Trigger to Start the Recording

Carry out the procedure below when the DX is waiting for a trigger.
Trigger through Key Operation

The procedure below can be carried out when recording event data in trigger mode
and the DX is configured so that the start trigger is applied through key operation.
1. Press FUNC.
2. Press the Trigger soft key.

The recording starts.
Trigger by an Event (Event action function must be configured. See

section 7.1.)
Recording starts when an event occurs.
Automatically Saving Measured Data

Automatic saving takes place when Auto save is set to On (see section 6.2 for details).
The save destination is the CF card.
Have the CF card inserted in the slot at all times. While the memory sampling is in
progress, the measured data recorded in the internal memory is automatically saved
to the CF card.
Action when Media FIFO is not enabled: If data storage to the storage medium is not
complete such as due to insufficient free space, the unsaved data is saved the next
time the data is automatically saved.
Saving the Display Data or Event Data during Memory Sampling through
Key Operation
The save destination is the CF card.
This operation can be carried out when recording display data or when recording
event data in Free mode. Unsaved measured data is saved to the CF card.

2. Press the Save display or Save event soft key.
The display data or event data is saved to the CF card.

Save operation
Time

File
File
File
Saved the previous time
6-10
Saved this time

IM 04L42B01-01E
6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured data
Saving Measured Data Manually (Collectively Storing Unsaved Data)

Automatic saving takes place when Auto save is set to Off (see section 6.2 for details).
You can save to a CF card or to USB flash memory (/USB1 option). The procedure for
saving unsaved data to a CF card is described below.
For the procedure to save data to the USB flash memory, see section 2.12.
1
2
1. Insert the CF card.
A confirmation window containing the message There is data which is not saved to media.
Do you want to store to media? appears.
The unsaved data in internal memory will be saved to the CF card.
3. Follow these steps to remove the CF card.
Press FUNC (display the FUNC key menu) > Media eject soft key > CF soft key
When the message Media can be removed safely appears, remove the storage medium.
Note
If there is not enough free space on the storage medium, the message Not enough free
space on media appears, and the data is not saved. If this message appears, replace the
storage medium. Then, carry out the procedure again.
You cannot abort the data save operation while it is in progress.
4
5
6
Stopping the Recording (Memory Stop)
* For the procedures when using the batch function, see section 6.3.
1. Press STOP. A confirmation window is displayed.
7
8
9
10
2. Select Yes using the arrow keys and press DISP/ENTER.
On models with the computation function (/M1 or /PM1 option), select Mem+Math or
Memory, and press DISP/ENTER.
The internal memory icon in the status display section changes to the stop icon.
11
Saving the Data in the Internal Memory Collectively or Selectively

through Key Operation
12
See section 4.8.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-11
6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured data
Explanation
Operations That Start Simultaneously with Memory Start
Waveform display updating on the trend display.
Report (/M1 and /PM1 options)
The computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options) can be configured to start
simultaneously with memory start.
See section 9.4.
Operations That Stop Simultaneously with Memory Stop

Waveform display updating on the trend display.
Report (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options): When selected in the procedure
described above.
Performance While Data Is Being Saved

If the internal memory or external storage medium is continuously accessed, the
following phenomena may occur. When such phenomena occur, the storage medium
access indicator frequently illuminates.
Files being saved to the external storage medium drop out.
Accessing the DX through communications takes a long time
In such case, take the following measures.
If you are creating data files at short intervals consecutively using the event action
function, increase the data file save interval.
If you are creating numerous files in a single directory on the external storage
medium, change the destination directory name at approximately every 1000 files.
6-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
6.5
Manually Saving the Measured Data (Manual

Sample)
Save the instantaneous values of all channels (excluding those set to Skip or Off)
through key operation. On models with the external input channels (/MC1 option), the
instantaneous values of specified channels (among 120 channels) are saved.
Setup Screen
2
3
Channel to be Manual Sampled

This setting applies to models with the external input channels (/MC1 option).
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode) and select the Menu tab > Data save >
Manual sample
4
5
6
Setup Items
Manual sample number
Select a number from 001 to 120. The instantaneous values are output in this order.
ManualSample
On/Off
Select On when assigning a channel to the manual sample number.
Channel
Enter a channel number of a measurement channel, computation channel (/M1 and

/PM1 options), or external input channel (/MC1 option).
10
11
Procedure
2. Press the Manual sample soft key.

Manual sampling is executed.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-13
6.5 Manually Saving the Measured Data (Manual Sample)
Explanation
Number of Manual Sampled Data Set in the Internal Memory
The number of manual sampled data set in the internal memory is displayed on the
memory summary display (see section 1.9)
Saving Measured Data to the CF Card
If auto save is On, the manual sampled data is saved to the CF card when you
carry out manual sampling.
If auto save is Off, save the manual sampled data to the CF card according to the
procedure for manually saving the data (see section 6.4).
The manual sampled data can be saved manually to a CF card or USB flash
memory (/USB1 option) regardless of whether the auto save function is set to On/
Off. For the manual save operation, see section 4.8.
6-14
IM 04L42B01-01E
6.6
Saving the Screen Image Data (Snapshot)
Save the current screen image data to the CF card. This operation is called snapshot,
and the screen image data file is called snapshot data file.
Procedure

2. Press the Snap shot soft key.
The snapshot data file is saved to the CF card.

Image of the soft keys and the message window are not saved.
Note
If you assign the snapshot function to the USER key, you can carry out snapshots in all modes
(operation mode, setting mode, and basic setting mode). However, error messages are not
saved.
5
6
Explanation
File Format
The snapshot data file is in PNG format.
File Name
See section 1.4.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-15
6.7
Managing the Files on the Storage Medium

This section explains how to display a list of files on the storage medium, check the free
space, delete files and directories, and format the storage medium.
Procedure
Displaying a List of Files on the Storage Medium, Deleting Files, and
Checking the Free Space
Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > File list/delete >
press the CF or USB soft key* > and press DISP/ENTER.
* When a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option) are being used.
Displaying a List of Files in a Directory and Checking the Free Space

Press the arrow keys to select a directory, and press DISP/ENTER. The files in the
directory are displayed. The root directory is denoted by [/].
Sorting Files and Directories (Release Number 2 or Later)

The files and directories can be sorted by the update date/time.
Each time you press the Sort soft key, the files and directories are sorted in order from
the oldest or the latest update date/time. A mark indicating the sort order is displayed
by Date/Time.
6-16
IM 04L42B01-01E
6.7 Managing the Files on the Storage Medium
Deleting a File
Press the arrow keys to select the file to be deleted, and press the Delete soft key.
A confirmation window appears. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER.
The file is deleted.
Deleting a Directory
First, delete all the files in the directory.
Select the directory you want to delete. The rest of the procedure is the same as
deleting a file.
1
2
3
Checking the Free Space

The free space on the storage medium is shown at the lower right of the screen.
Formatting the Storage Medium

Formatting will remove the contents of the storage media.
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Format. Press
the CF or USB soft key*, and then press DISP/ENTER.
5
6
8
9
2. Enter the volume name and press DISP/ENTER. (Up to 11 characters,
A 1)
10

The storage media is formatted.
11
Explanation
Format Type
Size
Storage medium smaller than or equal to 512 MB
Storage medium greater than 512 MB
Type
FAT16
FAT32
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-17
6.8
Loading and Displaying the Measured Data in

the Storage Medium
Load the display or event data file saved on the external storage medium and display the
waveform. The loaded data is shown on the historical trend display.
For the operations on the historical trend display, see section 4.3.
Procedure
Loading a File
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Load display
data or Load event data. Press the CF or USB soft key*; and press DISP/
ENTER.
2. Press the arrow keys to select a directory, and press DISP/ENTER. The files in
the directory are displayed. The root directory is denoted by [/].
3. Press the arrow keys to select a file, and press DISP/ENTER.
The file is loaded, and the waveform is displayed in the historical trend.
Note
The display data extension is .dad; the event data extension is .dae.
For details on how to use the Sort key, see section 6.7.
6-18
IM 04L42B01-01E
6.9
Saving/Loading the Setup Data
Save the setup data to the external storage medium or load the setup data from the
external storage medium.
Procedure
Saving the Setup Data
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Save settings.
Press the CF or USB soft key*, and then press DISP/ENTER.
3
4
5
6
2. Set the file name. (Up to 32 characters,
Aa#1)

Strings that cannot be used: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, COM1 to COM9, and LPT1 to LPT9.
To cancel the operation, press ESC.
The setup data is saved.
8
9
Loading the Setup Data for the Setting Mode

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Load settings.
Press the CF or USB soft key*, and then press DISP/ENTER.
10
11
12
13
App
Note
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
6-19
6.9 Saving/Loading the Setup Data
2. Use DISP/ENTER and arrow keys to select the setup file to be loaded.
* Setup data files are stored in the root directory [/].
The setup data is loaded.
Loading the Setup Data for the Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode
basic setting mode), and select the File/Initialize tab > Load settings. Press the
CF or USB soft key*, and then press DISP/ENTER.
2. Use DISP/ENTER and arrow keys to select the setup file to be loaded.
* Setup data files are stored in the root directory [/].
The setup data is loaded.
Note
Explanation
Setup Data File
The extension is .PDL.
The maximum size of a single setup data file is approximately 250 KB.
The following settings are also saved.
Current monitor display conditions
Monitor auto recovery registration data
Favorite key registration data
Loading Setup Data

Only the setup data of the setting mode is loaded in the setting mode. However,
settings that contradict the setup data of the basic setting mode are not loaded.
The monitor display conditions, monitor auto recovery registration, and favorite key
registration are also loaded.
If the contents of the loaded setup data is invalid, check the error log (see section
4.9).
Operations through keys, communications, and remote control input are not
executed while the setup data is being loaded.
6-20
IM 04L42B01-01E
Chapter 7
7.1
Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)
Setting the Event Action Function (Including

the remote control function of the /R1 and /
PM1 options and the USER key)
A specified action is carried out when an event occurs. This function is called event action.
The remote control function (/R1 option) and the USER key are set by the event action.
2
3
Setup Screen
Event and Action
4
5
6
7
Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and
Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)
Timer
action > Timer
When set to absolute time
When set to relative time
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
7-1
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function

(Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1 options and the USER key)
Match Time
action > Match time timer
7-2
IM 04L42B01-01E

Setup Items
Logic box number
You can set up to 40.
Event-Action > Event

The condition to execute the action.
Settings
None
Remote
Relay
Switch
Timer
Matchtime
Alarm
UserKey
Edge
Level
Description
Not use.
Select the remote control input terminal number.
Select the alarm output relay number.
Select the internal switch number.
Select the timer number.
Select the match timer number.
Select the event switch number (1 to 30). This function is available for release
numbers 3 and later.
Select the event switch number (1 to 30). This function is available for release
numbers 3 and later.
Event-Action > Action

The action to be executed when an event occurs.
Snapshot
Rate1/2
M.sample
TimerRst
Group
Flag
Time adj
PnlLoad
Comment
Favorite
AlarmRst
Description
Can be specified when the DX is configured to record event data.
Cannot be specified when the event is set to Relay, Switch, or Alarm.
Can be specified on /M1 and /PM1 options.
Can be specified when the DX is configured to record display data.
Can be specified when the DX is configured to record event data.
Set the message number to write the message and the destination. Set the
message destination to all groups (All) or a group number.
Can be specified when the function for switching between the trend interval
and the secondary trend interval is enabled.
Cannot be specified when the event is set to Timer.
Specify the number of the group to be displayed.
Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote.
Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote.
Specify the comment text block number to display. This function is available for
release numbers 3 and later.
Choose which registered display to switch to. This function is available for
Setting
Description
Key
Performs the same operation as
pressing the favorite key.
Select>Favorite Screen No
Displays the specified favorite screen.
* If you configure the settings so that the Favorite action and the Group
action occur at the same time, only the action whose event action number
is largest will be executed.
This action can only be specified when the event is Remote, UserKey, or Edge.
This function is available for release numbers 3 and later.
4
5
6
7
Settings
Memory
Start
Stop
Trigger
AlarmACK
Math
MathStart
MathStop
Math rst
SaveDisp
SaveEvent
Message
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
7-3

Timer
Timer used by event action. Used also in the TLOG computation computation function.
* The timer cannot be changed while memory sampling or computation is in progress.
Timer No.
Up to four timers (1 to 4) can be set.
When Using an Absolute Timer

Mode
Select Absolute.
Interval
Select the interval from the available settings between 1min to 24h.
Ref.time
Set the time in the range of hour 0 to hour 23.
When Using a Relative Timer

Mode
Select Relative.
Interval
Set the interval in the range of 00:01 (1 min) to 24:00 (24 hours).
Reset at Math Start

On: Resets the timer when computation is started. The resetting of the timer is not
considered to be a timeout. Even if the timer is used as an event, the action is not
executed.
Match Time Timer

Set the time match condition used in event action.
* The condition cannot be changed while memory sampling or computation is in progress.
Timer number
You can set up to four match time conditions (1 to 4).
Kind
Settings
Day
Week
Month
Year
Description
Set the time match condition of a day.
Set the time match condition of a week.
Set the time match condition of a month.
The condition is matched once a year. This function is available for
Set the items with check marks in the following table depending on the Kind setting.
Setting
Month
Day
Day of week
Hour:Minute
Day
Week
Type
Month
Year
Month
Set the month.
Day
Set the day.
Weekday
Set the day of the week.
Hour:Minute
Set the time in the range of 00:00 to 23:59.
Timer action
Settings
Single
Repeat
7-4
Description
Executes the action once when the condition is met.
Executes the action at every specified time.
IM 04L42B01-01E

Procedure
2. Press the Timer reset soft key.

3. Press the soft key corresponding to timer you want to reset. Select All to reset all
timers.
The relative timer is reset.
Operating Event Switches (Release number 3 or later)

Operating Event Level Switches
3
4
You can operate an event level switch using:

A custom display switch.
A communication command.
Operating Event Edge Switches

You can operate an event edge switch using:
The FUNC key (the procedure for operating the switch with the FUNC key is
described below).
A custom display push button.
A communication command.
Operating the Event Edge Switch Using the FUNC Key

2. Press the Edge Switch soft key.

3. Press the switch number soft key.
The switch will turn on briefly and then turn off again.
Displaying an Event Level Switch Status List (Release number 3 or later)

Display the status of the event level switch. For the operating procedure, see section
4.5.
Resetting the Match Time Timer (Release number 3 or later)

Operation ends when a match time timer whose timer action is set to single expires.
To use such a match time timer again, you must reset it.
10
11
2. Press the Match T Reset soft key.
* This soft key appears when a match timer whose timer action is set to single has expired.
3. Press the soft key with the match time timer number of the timer that you want to
reset.
12
The match time timer that you specify is reset.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
7-5

Explanation
Restarts the timer.
The resetting of the timer is considered to be a timeout. (If the timer is used as an
event, the action is executed.)
If the timer is used in TLOG computation on the /M1 or /PM1 math option and
TLOG computed value reset at each interval is specified, the computed result is
reset.
Resetting the Match Time Timer (Release number 3 or later)

This operation resets an expired match time timer so that it can operate again.
The resetting of a match time timer does not count as a timer expiration (and it will
not count as an event action event).
This operation can be used with match time timers whose timer action is set to
single.
If the timer is used in TLOG computation on the /M1 or /PM1 math option and
TLOG computed value reset at each interval is specified, the computed result is
reset.
7-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
7.2
Setup Examples of Event Action
Example 1: S
tarting/Stopping the Memory Sampling through Remote Control
(/R1 Option)
Starts/Stops the memory sampling when a signal is applied to remote control input
terminal 2. Use logic box number 1.
Setup Screen and Setup Items

4
5

6
7
If the input to the remote control input terminal 2 is turned ON when memory sampling
is stopped, memory sampling starts. If the remote control input is turned OFF when
memory sampling is in progress, memory sampling stops.
Example 2: Writing a Message When an Alarm Occurs

Write the message Channel 1 Alarm to group 1 when an alarm occurs on channel 1.
Use logic box number 2.

<Operation>
8
9

10
11
12
13
<Other Settings>
App
Set an alarm to channel 1 and output to internal switch 3.

Register Channel 1 alarm in message number 4.
For the procedure to set the alarm, see section 3.7.
For the procedure to set the message, see section 5.4.
IM 04L42B01-01E
Index
7-7
7.2 Setup Examples of Event Action
Example 3: Saving the Data Every Day at Hour 17

Save the recorded data to the CF card every day at hour 17. Use logic box number 3.
Use match time condition 1.

Logic box number 3
Match Time Condition

action > Match time timer
<Other Settings>
Set the display data to be saved automatically. Set the file save interval to 1day or
longer. If a file save interval shorter than 1day is specified, the data is also saved at the
file save interval.
For the procedure to set the recording conditions of the display data, see section 6.1.
7-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
7.2 Setup Examples of Event Action
Example 4: R
eleasing the Alarm Output Using the USER Key (Alarm
Acknowledge Operation)
Release the activated alarm output by pressing the USER key. Use logic box number 4.

2
3
4
5
6
<Operation>
Press the USER key to release the activated alarm indication and relay output.
<Related Settings>

Set the alarm indication and alarm output relay operation to Hold.
For the procedure to set the alarm indication operation and alarm output relay operation,
see section 3.5.
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
7-9
7.3
Changing the Response to Remote Contact

Input Opening and Closing (/R1 and /PM1
options; release number 3 or later)
Set the remote contact input operation.
Setup Screen
mode), and select the Environment tab > Remote.
Setup Items
Remote Input > 1 to 8
Specify an operation for each remote control terminal. Five remote control terminals
can be used for pulse input (/PM1 option).
Setting
N.O
Description
The remote signal rises when the contact input switches from open to
closed, and it falls when the contact input switches from closed to open.
The remote signal rises when the contact input switches from closed to
open, and it falls when the contact input switches from open to closed.
N.C
Remote
contact
input
Type
Operation
Closed
N.O
N.C
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Control operation
ON
OFF
Note
On models with the pulse input option (/PM1), the remote control input terminals can be
used for pulse input. When pulses are counted, the number of rising pulse edges is counted,
regardless of the Remote Input setting.
7-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
Chapter 8
8.1
Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock

Function)
Disable the key operation.

Setup Screen
Selecting the Key Lock Function
3
4
6
7
Key Operation to Be Disabled

setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Keylock
8
10
11
Setup Items
Security > Key
12
Select Keylock.
Settings
Keylock
Login
Description
Enables the key lock function. The Keylock item is displayed in the
basic setting mode menu.
Enables the login function. See section 8.2.
13
Keylock > Password

The password used to release the key lock. (Up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
The password is displayed as ******** (release number 3 or later).
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
8-1
8.1 Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock Function)
Keylock > Key action, Media/USB, Action of Function

Select whether to lock each item.
Settings
Free
Lock
Description
Key lock not applied.
Disables the operation.
Procedure
Locking the Keys

2. Press the Keylock soft key.

The key lock is activated. The key lock icon appears in the status display section.
Releasing the Key Lock


2. Press the Keylock soft key.

A window appears for you to enter the password.
3. Enter the password and press DISP/ENTER.

The key lock is released. The key lock icon in the status display section
disappears.
* The password that you entered is displayed as ********.
8-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
8.2
Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the

DX (Login Function)
Only registered users can operate the DX.
1
2
Setup Screen
Login Function
3
4
5
6
Logout Method
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > Basic settings
7
8
10
Registering Administrators
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > Admin settings
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
8-3
8.2 Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the DX (Login Function)
Registering Users
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > User settings
User Privileges
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > Authority of user
Setup Items
The login function can be set separately for login through keys and login through
communications.
Security > Key

Select Login.
Settings
Login
Keylock
Off
Description
Enables only registered users to operate the DX using keys. The Login
item is displayed in the basic setting mode menu.
Enables the key lock function. See section 8.1.
Disables the security functions.
Security > Communication

Settings
Login
Off
Description
Enables only registered users to operate the DX via communications. The
Login item is displayed in the basic setting mode menu.
Disables the security functions.
User basic settings > Auto logout

Settings
Off
1min to 10min
8-4
Description
Does not log out until the logout operation is executed.
Automatically logs out when there is no key operation for a specified time.
IM 04L42B01-01E
8.2 Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the DX (Login Function)
User basic settings > Operation without login

Sets the operation that the user can carry out when logged out.
Settings
Off
Display
Description
Only login operation is available.
Allows the user to switch the operation screen in addition to the login operation.
Admin number
Up to five administrators can be registered. Be sure to register at least one
administrator. At least one administrator must be registered to use the login function.
Admin settings > Mode

The available settings vary depending on the Security setting.
Settings
Off
Key
Comm
Web
Key+Comm
Description
Not register.
Log into the DX using keys.
Log into the DX via communications.
Log into the operator page and monitor page of the DX using a Web browser.
Log into the DX using keys and via communications.
Admin settings > User name

Set the user name. (Up to 20 characters, A a # 1 )
You cannot register user names that are already registered.
You cannot register quit or a user name containing all spaces.
Admin settings > Password

Set the password. (Up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
Unregistered password is displayed as ????????. An entered password is displayed
as ********.
You cannot register quit or a password containing all spaces.
User number
User settings > Mode
The available settings vary depending on the Security setting.

Settings
Off
Key
Comm
Web
Key+Comm
8
Up to 30 users can be registered.
Description
Not register.
Log into the DX using keys.
Log into the DX via communications.
Log into the monitor page of the DX using a Web browser.
Log into the DX using keys and via communications.
10
11
User settings > User name, Password

See the explanation for the administrator user name and password.
Authority of user
Settings
Off
1 to 10
Description
No limitations on the operation.
Registration number of the operation limitation.
12
Authority of user > Key action, Media/USB, Action of Function
13
See section 8.1.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
8-5
8.3
Logging in and Logging Out

This section explains the procedure to log into the DX using keys. For the procedure
to log into the DX via communications, see the Communication Interface Users
Manual (IM04L41B01-17E).
Procedure
Logging In

A list of registered user names appears.
2. Press the arrow keys to select a user name, and press DISP/ENTER.
A window appears for you to enter the password.
3. Enter the password* and press DISP/ENTER.
The DX is ready to be operated using keys. The name of the user that is logged in
is displayed in the status display section.
* The password that you enter is displayed as ********.
Logging Out
Using Keys
2. Press the Logout soft key.
You are logged out from the DX. The user name in the status indication section
disappears.
Auto Logout
If auto logout is enabled, you are automatically logged out if there is no key operation
for a specified time.
8-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
8.3 Logging in and Logging Out
Changing the Password

Using Keys

2. Press the Password change soft key.

A window appears for you to enter the current password.
3. Enter the current password and press DISP/ENTER.

A window appears for you to enter the new password.
4. Enter the new password and press DISP/ENTER.

A window appears for you to enter the new password again.
5. Enter the new password and press DISP/ENTER.

The window closes, and the new password is activated.
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
8-7
Chapter 9
9.1
Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm,

Tag, and Data Storage on Computation Channels
This section explains how to set a computation channels expression, measurement
range, tag, alarm, and recording On/Off. You cannot set expressions or constants while
memory sampling or computation is in progress.
Setup Screen
1
2
3
Expression and Alarm
Calculation expression, Alarm
4
5

6
7
Constants Used in Expressions
Constant
8
9
10
Tag, Memory Sampling On/Off, and Alarm Delay Time of Computation Channels
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-1
9.1 Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on Computation Channels
Conditions of TLOG Computation and Rolling Average
TLOG, Rolling average
Display for Computation Errors and Handling of Overflow Data in

Statistical Computation
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Math, Report
Setup Items
First-CH/Last-CH
Set the target channels.
Calculation expression and Span

Math On/Off

Select On for channels to be used.
Calculation expression
Enter the expression using up to 120 characters.

Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the expression. Use
the numeric keys to enter numbers and operators.
For details on how to write expressions, see section 9.2.
Note
You cannot use both the USB keyboard (/USB1 option) and the DX keys to enter the equation.
If you press a DX soft key, for example, while you are entering an equation from the USB
keyboard, the entered equation is cleared.
9-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
Span Lower, Span Upper

Set the measurement range.
Selectable range of values: 9999999 to 99999999
Selectable decimal places: X.XXXX, XX.XXX, XXX.XX, XXXX.X
Unit
Set the unit of the computed value (Up to 6 characters,
A a # 1 ).
Alarm
The available alarm types are high limit alarm, low limit alarm, delay high limit alarm,
and delay low limit alarm.
The range of alarm values is as follows:
Type
H, L, T, t
Value
Within 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point
3
4
For details on setting alarms, see section 3.7.

* If the Math On/Off or calculation expression is changed, the alarms for that channel are turned
Off.
Alarm delay > Time

Set the alarm delay time using an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
Tag > Comment

to 32 characters. On a DX with a release number of 2 or earlier, you can enter up to
16 characters. The characters that can be entered are: A a # 1 .

Aa#1)
Constant
Number of constant
Select the constant (K01 to K60) to set.
Value
The selectable range is as follows:

9.9999E+29 to 1.0000E30, 0, 1.0000E30 to 9.9999E+29
The number of significant digits of a constant is five. When specifying the
constant using exponential notation, set the mantissa less than or equal to 5
digits and the exponent less than or equal to 2 digits.
10
11
TLOG
Timer type
You can set the timer type to Timer or Match T (match time timer).
Timer No.
12
Select the timer number to use.

For details on setting the timer, see section 7.1.
For match time timer setting instructions, see section 7.1.
13
Sum scale
Set the sum scale to /s to /h to match the unit of the measured value.
3
Example: If the unit of the measured value is m /min, select /min.
Off:
Sums as-is the measured data per scan interval.
App
Reset
To reset the TLOG computed value at each interval, select On.
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-3
Rolling average
On/Off
To take the rolling average of the measured results, select On.
Interval
Select the sampling interval when taking the rolling average from the following:
The sampling interval takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan
interval. For example, if the sampling interval is set to 5 s when the scan interval
is 2 s, the actual sampling interval is 6 s.
Number of samples
Set the number of samples for the rolling average using an integer between 1
and 1500.
The rolling average time is equal to the sampling interval the number of
samples.
Note
If the number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of
samples immediately after computation is started, the average of the available data is
calculated.
Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation.
If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit, the data is clipped at the upper or
lower limit, and the rolling average is computed. The upper and lower limit is 100000000
excluding the decimal point. The decimal place is the same as that of the span lower limit.

Select On to record the computed data of the target channels.
Math
Value on Error

Specify whether to set the display for a computation error to +Over or Over.
Value on Overflow > SUM, AVE

Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the SUM or AVE
computation of TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Settings
Error
Skip
Limit
Value on Overflow > MAX, MIN, P-P

Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the MAX, MIN, or P-P
computation of TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Settings
Over
Skip
9-4
Description
Sets the computed result to computation error.
Uses a limit value in place of the overflow data and continues the computation.
Description
Uses the overflow data as-is.
IM 04L42B01-01E
9.2
Writing Expressions
This section explains the meaning and how to write expressions.
Common Items
Follow the rules below when writing expressions.
Use up to 120 characters to write expressions.
The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses.
Specify the channels in the expression using channel numbers.
Example: 1, 12, 101, and 201
The one-digit number of constants (K), communication input data (C), remote input
terminal status (D), pulse input (P, Q), internal switch (S), alarm output relay status (I),
flag (F), and recording (memory sample) status (M) in the expression can be denoted
as in 01 and 1.
Example: K01, K1, C01, C1, D01, D1, P01, P1, Q01, Q1, S01, S1, I01, I1, F01, and F1.
The data of the previous scan is used in the computation for its own channel number
and channel numbers greater than its own channel number in the expression.
Special computation (HOLD, RESET, and CARRY) and conditional expressions are
written at the beginning of the expression.
Order of Precedence in Computations
3
4
5
6
The order of precedence of computation in expressions is as follows:

Type
Function
Limitations
The following limitations exists in writing expressions.
Type
TLOG computation
Limitations
A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses.
Only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single expression.
CLOG computation Number of channels that can be written in the parentheses is 30 channels or less.
Only one CLOG computation can be specified in a single expression.
PRE
HOLD(a):b
Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
Only one HOLD computation can be specified in a single expression.
RESET(a):b
Only one RESET computation can be specified in a single expression.
CARRY(a):b
Only one CARRY computation can be specified in a single expression.
Only TLOG.SUM can be written in b.
Conditional equation RESET, CARRY, or HOLD cannot be written to a, b, or c. Other computing
elements cannot be combined (example: [a?b:c]+001). However, conditional
[a?b:c]
equations can be specified for a, b, and c.
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-5
7
8
9
Special computation and conditional expression

Power
Logical negation
Multiplication and division
Addition and subtraction
Greater than and less than
Equal and not equal
Logical product
Logical sum and exclusive logical sum
Computing Element
(high order of precedence)
ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), LN(), EXP(),
TLOG.MAX(), TLOG.MIN(), TLOG.
AVE(), TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.P-P(),
CLOG.MAX(), CLOG.MIN(), CLOG.
AVE(), CLOG.SUM(), CLOG.P-P()
PRE, HOLD, RESET, CARRY, [a?b:c]
**
NOT
*, /
+,
.GT., .LT., GE., LE.
.EQ., .NE.
AND
OR, XOR
(low order of precedence)
10
11
12
13
App
Index
9.2 Writing Expressions
Four Arithmetic Operation

Expression Example
Addition
001+002

(Determines the sum of the measured values of channel 1 and channel 2.)
Subtraction 001002

(Determines the difference of the measured values of channel 1 and
channel 2.)
Multiplication 001*K03

(Multiplies constant K03 to the measured value of channel 1.)
Division
001/K02

(Divides the measured value of channel 1 by constant K02.)
Power and Other Computations

Expression Example
Power

001**002
(Determines the measured value of channel 1 to the power of the
measured value of channel 2.)
Square root
SQR(002)

(Determines the square root of the measured value of channel 2.)
Absolute value
ABS(002)

(Determines the absolute value of the measured value of channel

2.)
Common logarithm LOG(001)

(Determines the common logarithm (log10) of the measured value

of channel 1.)
Natural logarithm LN(001)

(Determines the natural logarithm of the measured value of

channel 1.)
Exponent
EXP(001)

(Determines e to the power of the measured value of channel 1.)
Relational Computation
Expression Example
002.LT.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.
002.GT.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value of channel 3, the
002.EQ.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
002.NE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
002.GE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value of
channel 3, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.
002.LE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value of channel 3,
the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.
9-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
Logical Computation
Checks whether the two data values, e1 and e2 (e1 only for NOT), are zeroes or nonzeroes, and computes according to the conditions.
AND
Logical product
(Syntax)
e1ANDe2
(Condition) If the two data values e1 and e2 are both non-zeroes, the computed
result is 1. Otherwise, it is 0.
(Explanation)
e1 = 0, e2 = 0
e1ANDe2 = 0

e1 0, e2 = 0
e1ANDe2 = 0

e1 = 0, e2 0
e1ANDe2 = 0

e1 0, e2 0
e1ANDe2 = 1
3
4
OR
Logical sum
(Syntax)
e1ORe2
(Condition) If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zeroes, the computed result
is 0. Otherwise, it is 1.
(Explanation)
e1 = 0, e2 = 0
e1ORe2 = 0

e1 0, e2 = 0
e1ORe2 = 1

e1 = 0, e2 0
e1ORe2 = 1

e1 0, e2 0
e1ORe2 = 1
5
6
7
XOR
Exclusive OR
(Syntax)
e1XORe2
(Condition) If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and non-zero or non-zero
and zero, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, it is 0.
(Explanation)
e1 = 0, e2 = 0
e1XORe2 = 0

e1 0, e2 = 0
e1XORe2 = 1

e1 = 0, e2 0
e1XORe2 = 1

e1 0, e2 0
e1XORe2 = 0
8
9
10
NOT
Logical negation
(Syntax)
(Condition)
(Explanation)

NOTe1
The result is the inverse of the status of data e1 (zero or non-zero).
e1 = 0

NOTe1 = 1
e1 0

NOTe1 = 0
11
12
Expression Example
01-02OR03.GT.04
Determines the OR of the computed results of 01-02 and 03.GT.04.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-7
TLOG Computation
In the explanation below, an expression containing a computing element in e1, an
internal switch (S), a relay (I), or flag (F) cannot be written. In addition, only one TLOG
computation can be specified in a single computing equation.
TLOG.MAX( )
Maximum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.MAX(e1)
(Condition)
Determines the maximum value of channel e1.
TLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax)
(Condition)
TLOG.MIN(e1)
Determines the minimum value of channel e1.
TLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax)
(Condition)
TLOG.AVE(e1)
Determines the average value of channel e1.
TLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax)
(Condition)
TLOG.SUM(e1)
Determines the sum of channel e1.
TLOG.P-P( )
Maximum - minimum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.P-P(e1)
(Condition)
Determines the maximum - minimum value of channel e1.
Expression Example
TLOG.MAX(01)+K01*SQR(02)
Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed

TLOG.AVE(01)+TLOG.AVE(02)
Reason: TLOG appears twice in one equation.
TLOG.AVE(ABS(01))
Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.
9-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
CLOG Computation
Only data of measurement channels, computation channels, and external input channels
can be used in the CLOG computation. Up to 30 channels can be written in the
parentheses.
In the explanation below, an expression containing a computing element cannot be
written to e1, etc. In addition, only one CLOG computation can be specified in a single
computing equation.
CLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax)
CLOG.SUM(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition) Determines the sum of the data of channels e1, e2, e4, e5, and e6 that
are measured at the same time.
2
3
4
CLOG.MAX( )
Maximum value
(Syntax)
CLOG.MAX(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition) Determines the maximum value among the data of channels e1, e2,
e4, e5, and e6 that are measured at the same time.
CLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax)
CLOG.MIN(e1.e2.e5.e7)
(Condition) Determines the minimum value among the data of channels e1, e2, e5,
and e7 that are measured at the same time.
6
7
CLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax)
CLOG.AVE(e1-e6)
(Condition) Determines the average value among the data of channels e1 to e6
that are measured at the same time.
8
9
CLOG.P-P( )
Maximum - minimum value

(Syntax)
CLOG.P-P(e1.e2.e5.e7)
(Condition) Determines the difference between the maximum and minimum values
among the data of channels e1, e2, e5, and e7 that are measured at
the same time.
10
11
Expression Example
CLOG.MAX(001.002.I04-I06)+K01*SQR(002)
12
CLOG.AVE(001.003.005)+CLOG.AVE(002.004.006)
Reason: CLOG appears twice in one equation.
CLOG.AVE(001.ABS(001))
Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-9
Special Computation
PRE( )
(Syntax)
(Condition)
PRE(e1)
Determines the previous value of e1.
HOLD(a):b
(Syntax)
HOLD(a):b
(Condition) When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value is held.
RESET(a):b
(Syntax)
RESET(a):b
(Condition) When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value of b is reset, and b is carried
out to derive the computed value.
CARRY(a):b
(Syntax)
CARRY(a):b
(Condition) Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the computed value X of b is
less than a, the computed result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a,
the computed result is the excess (X a).
(Description)
When a value such as the flow rate is summed and the threshold value
is reached or exceeded, the sum value is reset while carrying over the
amount that exceeded the threshold value.
Expression Example
Expression that sums the values of channel 1 and resets the value when it reaches or
exceeds 10000
K01 = 10000
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(001)

002+HOLD(K01):TLOS.SUM(001)
Reason: HOLD is not at the beginning of the expression.
RESET(101.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)+RESET(101.GT.K01):002
Reason: RESET appears twice in one equation.
Conditional Expression
[a?b:c]
(Syntax)
[001.GT.K01?002:003]
(Condition) If the measured value of channel 1 is greater than constant K01, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 2. Otherwise, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 3.

[001.GT.K01?002:003]*K02
Reason: Used in combination with another computing element.
Nested Conditional Expressions

A conditional expression can be written to Expression1, Expression2, and Expression3
in the equation [Expression1?Expression2:Expression3]. For example, the following
expression is allowed: [Equation1?[Equation2-1?Equation2-2:Equation2-3]:[Equation31?Equation3-2:Equation3-3]]
Expressions can be nested as long as the number of characters of the expression does
not exceed 120 characters.
9-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
9.3
Displaying the Computation Channels
Computation channels can be assigned to groups and displayed in a similar manner to

measurement channels.
Setup Screen
Color
Color
3
4
5
6
Zone Display, Scale Display, and Bar Graph Display
7
8
9
10
Partial
* The Partial command appears in the menu if you set Partial to On in Basic Setting Mode.
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-11
9.3 Displaying the Computation Channels
Alarm Marks and Color Scale Band

Setup Items
Channel Numbers, First-CH, and Last-CH
Select the target channel range.
Color
See section 5.5.
Zone
See section 5.6.
Partial
See section 5.9.
Bar graph
See section 5.11.
Scale
See section 5.7.

See section 5.8.
9-12
IM 04L42B01-01E
9.4
Starting/Stopping Computation, Resetting

Computation, and Releasing Computation Data
Dropout Display
Setup Screen
1
2
Action Taken When the START Key Is Pressed

Math start action
3
4
5
6
7
Setup Items
Math start action > Math start
Settings
Off
Start
Rst+St
Description
Does not start the computation even when the START key is pressed.
Starts the computation when the START key is pressed.
Resets the computed result up to then and starts the computation when the
START key is pressed.
Procedure
Press START. Computation starts simultaneously with the start of the memory
sampling. The computation icon appears in the status display section.
* Math start must be set to Start or Rst+St.
12
2. Press the Math start soft key.

10
11
Starting Only the Computation

Starting the Computation

Starting the Computation Simultaneously with the Memory
Sampling

Computation starts, and the computation icon is displayed in the status display
section.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-13
9.4 Starting/Stopping Computation, Resetting Computation, and Releasing Computation Data Dropout
Display
Stopping the Computation

Stopping the Computation Simultaneously with the Memory
Sampling
1. Press STOP.

A confirmation dialog box appears.
2. Select Mem+Math and press DISP/ENTER.

The memory sampling and computation stop, and the computation icon in the
status display section disappears.
Stopping Only the Computation



2. Press the Math stop soft key.

The computation stops, and the computation icon in the status display section
disappears.
Note
When the computation is stopped, the computed data of the computation channel is held at the
value that existed immediately before the computation is stopped. When memory sampling is in
progress, the held value is recorded.
Resetting the Computed Results on All Computation Channels

This operation can be carried out when the computation is stopped. You can carry out this
operation even while the computation is in progress on DXs with release number 2 or later.

2. Press the Math reset soft key.

The computed results of all computation channels are reset.
Releasing the Computation Data Dropout Display

This operation can be carried out when a computation data dropout occurs. When a
computation data dropout occurs, the computation icon turns yellow.

2. Press the Math ACK soft key.

The computation icon returns to white.
* Math ACK is displayed in the FUNC key menu only when a computation data dropout occurs.
Note
A computation data dropout occurs when the computation process cannot be completed within
the scan interval. If computation data dropout occurs frequently, lessen the load on the CPU by
reducing the number of computation channels or setting a longer scan interval. If a computation
data dropout occurs during memory sampling, the data immediately before the dropout is
recorded as the computed data of the scan interval in which the dropout occurred.
9-14
IM 04L42B01-01E
9.5
Creating Reports
Set how the reports are created.

Setup Screen
Report Computation Type
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Math, Report
3
4
5
6
Report Type and Time of Creation
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Report > Basic settings
7
8
9
10
11
Source Channels
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Report > Report settings
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-15
9.5 Creating Reports
Setup Items
Report > Report select > 1, 2, 3, and 4
Select the type of data to output as reports. The only data type that can be set more
than once is Off. You cannot set 1 to Off.
Settings
Off
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Inst
Description
Does not output reports.
Outputs the average value.
Outputs the maximum value.
Outputs the minimum value.
Outputs the sum value.
Outputs the instantaneous value.
Report > File type

Set this item when creating two types of reports such as daily report and monthly
report.
Settings
Separate
Combine
Description
Saves each type of report to a separate file.
Saves the report data of two types in a single file.
Report set > Report kind

Select the type of report to be created.
Settings
Hour
Day
Hour+Day
Day+Week
Day+Month
Description
Creates hourly reports.
Creates daily reports.
Creates hourly and daily reports.
Creates daily and weekly reports.
Creates daily and monthly reports.
Report set > Date/Day of the week and Time (hour)

Set the date or day of the week and the time when the report is to be created. The
specified date/time is when the report file is divided. Set the values in the range
indicated below. Items with a dash are invalid.
Report Type
Date
Hour
Day
1 to 28*
Hour+Day
Day+Week
Day+Month
1 to 28*
* You cannot specify 29, 30, or 31.
Day of Week
SUN to SAT
-
Time
0 to 23
0 to 23
0 to 23
0 to 23
0 to 23
Report Time and Date/Time When the Report File Is Divided

Example: When the Date of a daily report is set to 1 and the Time (hour) is set to
18:00
A daily report is created every day at hour 18.
The file storing the report is divided at 18:00 on day 1 of each month.
9-16
IM 04L42B01-01E
9.5 Creating Reports
Report Channel number

The report is output in order by this number.
Report CH > On/Off
Select On for the report channels to be used.
Report CH > Channel

Set the channel to assign to the report channel. All channels can be assigned, but
reports are not created for channels set to Skip or Off even if they are assigned.
In the stacked bar graph display (see section 4.11 for details), report data is displayed
in the following groups. However, only channels that have the same unit as the first
channel in the group are displayed.
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Report Groups (Fixed)

R001 to R010
R011 to R020
R021 to R030
R031 to R040
R041 to R050
R051 to R060
3
4
5
6
Report CH > Sum scale

Set the sum scale to /s to /day to match the unit of the measured value.
3
Example: If the unit of the measured value is m /min, select /min.
Off: Sums as-is the measured data per scan interval.
Handling of Overflow Data

Overflow data is handled in the same way as it is in statistical computations (TLOG
and CLOG).
See section 9.1.
Starting/Stopping the Report Function
Procedure
Starting the memory sampling starts the report function. Likewise, stopping the
memory sampling stops the report function.
10
Displaying the Reports

See section 4.5.
Saving the Reports
11
See section 1.4.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
9-17
Chapter 10 Using External Input Channels (/MC1 Option)
10.1 Setting External Input Channels
External input channels can be used on the DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and
DX2048. The data of other devices loaded using the communication function can be
displayed on the DX and saved.
Setting the Input
Setup Screen
basic setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Communication (Ethernet) or
Communication (Serial) > Modbus client or Modbus master > Command settings
4
5
6
7
Input Range and Alarm

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Ext. channel >
Range, Alarm
8
9
10
Using External Input Channels (/MC1 Option)
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
10-1
Tag, Memory Sample, and Alarm Delay Time

10-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
Setup Items
Setting the Input
The measured values of external instruments are loaded using the Modbus client or
Modbus master function to be used as external input channel inputs.
For the setup procedure, see the Communication Interface Users Manual
(IM04L41B01-17E).
First-CH/Last-CH
Select the target channels. Channel numbers are 201 to 440.
Ext. range > On/Off

Select On to use the external input channel.
Ext. range > Span Lower and Span Upper

Measurement range.
Selectable range of values: 30000 to 30000
Decimal place: Down to four digits to the left of the decimal point
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
10-3
Ext. range > Unit

Set the unit. (Up to 6 characters,
Aa#1;
for release numbers 3 and later: , , and .)
Alarm
The available alarm types are high limit alarm, low limit alarm, delay high limit alarm,
and delay low limit alarm.
The range of alarm values is as follows:
Type
H, L
T, t
Value
Within 30000 to 30000
Same as H and L

Within 3000.0 to 3000.0 when the span
is 0.0 to 100.0.
Same as H and L
For details on setting alarms, see section 3.7.

* If the external input channel On/Off or span setting is changed, the alarms for that channel
are turned Off.
Tag > Comment

to 32 characters.
On a DX with a release number of 2 or earlier, you can enter up to 16 characters. The
characters that can be entered are: A a # 1 .

Aa#1)

Turn On the target channels.
Alarm delay > Time

For details on setting the alarm delay time, see section 3.7.
10-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
10.2 Displaying the External Input Channels
External input channels can be assigned to groups and displayed in a similar manner to
measurement channels. See chapter 5.
Setup Screen
Channel Display Color
Color
3
4
5
6
7
Zone Display, Scale Display, and Bar Graph Display

8
9

10
11
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
10-5
10.2 Displaying the External Input Channels

Partial
* The Partial command appears in the menu if you set Partial to On in Basic Setting Mode.

Setup Items
Channel Numbers, First-CH/Last-CH
Select the target channel range. Channel numbers are 201 to 440.
Color
See section 5.5.
Zone
See section 5.6.
Partial
See section 5.9.
Bar graph
See section 5.11.
Scale
See section 5.7.

See section 5.8.
10-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.1 A List of Messages
There are cases in which error codes and messages are displayed on the screen during
operation. A list of the possible error codes and messages are given in the table below.
Communication error codes and messages are also listed.
Error responses to communication commands are output in English.
Errors Related to Parameter Settings

Setting Errors
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
30
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
Message
System error.
Incorrect date or time setting.
A disabled channel is selected.
Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Enter a correct value.
Specify a channel that is not set to Skip or Off.
Specify a channel that is installed.
Incorrect function parameter.
See Communication Interface Users Manual.
The input numerical value exceeds the set range.
Enter a proper value.
Incorrect input character string.
Enter a proper character string.
Too many characters.
Enter the correct number of characters.
Incorrect input mode.
Specify a correct mode.
See section 3.3.
Incorrect input range code.
Specify a correct range code.
See section 3.3.
Range settings are not same within the selected channels.
Specify channels with the same range setting.
See section 3.9.
A disabled batch group is selected.
Set the last batch group greater than the first batch
group.
See section 2.2 in IM04L41B01-03E.
Cannot set a trip line for a display group that is OFF.
Check the display group settings.
Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel.
Cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
See section 3.7.
The upper and lower span limits are equal.
Cannot be set to the same value.
See section 3.3.
The upper and lower scale limits are equal.
Cannot be set to the same value.
See section 3.3.
The lower limit of the span band is greater than the upper limit. Set the lower limit less than the upper limit.
See section 3.3.
The lower limit of the scale band is greater than the upper limit. Set the lower limit less than the upper limit.
See section 3.3.
The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span.
Set the boundary value in the range of the minimum
span value + 1 digit to the maximum span value 1
digit.
See section 5.9.
Partial-expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel.
Cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
See sections 3.3 and 5.9
The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal.
Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5.
See section 5.6.
The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper
limit.
See section 5.6.
The display band is narrower than 4% of the entire display.
See section 5.6.
Incorrect group set character string.
Check the syntax.
See section 5.1.
There is no specified input channel.
Specify a channel that is installed.
Operation Guide and section 5.1.
Exceeded the number of channels which can be set.
Up to 10 channels per group.
See section 5.1.
A channel number cannot repeat in a group.
Check that a channel is not registered twice.
See section 5.1.
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
31
12
13
App
Index

Code
45
46
Message
There is no character string saved in the clipboard.
The character string saved in the clipboard is too long.
47
Start and end time cannot match.
48
Invalid or missing DST time settings.
61
There is no channel specified by the MATH expression.
62
MATH expression grammar is incorrect.
63
MATH expression sequence is incorrect.
64
MATH upper and lower span values are equal.
65
Too many operators for MATH expression.
70
Nonexistent constant specified in MATH expression.
71
Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded.
80
This username is already registered.
81
All space or quit string cannot be specified.
84
The login password has not been set up.
85
The login password is incorrect.
86
The key-lock release password is incorrect.
87
This key is locked.
88
This function is locked.
89
Press [FUNC] key to login.
90
No permission to enter to the SETUP mode.
91
Password is incorrect.
92
93
Press [ESC] key to change to the operation mode.

String including space or all space cannot be specified.
94
More than one address cannot be specified.
95
Number entered exceeds channel number range.

Use another command.
100
IP address doesnt belong to class A, B, or C.
11-2
Copy a character string to the clipboard.
Paste a character string with the specified number
of characters.
Check the starting and ending times.
See section 2.1.
Check the starting and ending times.
See section 2.1.
Check the channel number specified by the
expression.See sections 1.8 and 9.1.
Check that the expression grammar is correct.
See section 9.2.
Check that the operator used in the expression
in relation to the applicable operands meets the
grammar requirements.
See section 9.2.
Set the upper limit not equal to the lower limit.
See section 9.1.
The maximum number of operators in an
expression has been exceeded. Reduce the
number of operators, such as by splitting up the
expression into multiple computation channels.
See section 9.2.
Check the constant number specified by the
expression.
See section 9.2.
Check the selectable range.
See section 9.1.
Register another user name.
See section 8.2.
Change the character string.
See section 8.2.
Set a password.
See section 8.2.
Check the password. If you lost the password, ask
your administrator to reset it.
See section 8.3.
Check the password. If you lost the password, it
must be reset.
See section 8.1.
Release the key lock.
See section 8.1.
Release the key lock.
See section 8.1.
Log in.
See section 8.3.
Check the keylock or login settings.
Enter the correct password. If you lost the
password, it must be reset.
Press the ESC key.
Spaces are not allowed in the Web browser user
name and password.
Section 1.5 in the communication manual
Only a single sender is allowed.
Check the syntax of the Modbus command.
Sections 1.10 and 2.6 in the communication
manual
Check the IP address.
IM 04L41B01-01E

Code
101
Message
The result of the masked IP address is all 0s or 1s.
102
SUBNET mask is incorrect.
103
The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP

address.
105
This port number is already in use. Please enter a different

number.
113
Password entered is incorrect.
119
This user name is unable to use this mode.
120
Measured value is incorrect. (in ascending order)
122
Measured value exceeds the range setting.
125
Character entry cannot be performed.
126
You cannot use the same password.
127
Report kind overlaps and cannot be set up.
128
129
Logout cannot be set to Hide.

IP address is not set.
131
You have exceeded the available channel capacity.
132
You have exceeded the available number of commands.
133
External I/O auto setting information is not available.
Auto setting has already been executed.
135
External I/O cannot be found.
136
External I/O start cannot be executed.
137
DNS for this device is not set.
138
Cannot create object. The maximum allowed number was

exceeded.
IM 04L41B01-01E
Enter the correct password.

See section 6.1.
A user-level user cannot enter the Basic Setting mode
See section 8.2.
Set the calibration correction value to a value
greater than the previous value.
See section 3.9.
Check the channel input or the channel range
setting.
The DX is not showing a display used to enter
character strings.
See section 2.11.
Specify a different password.
See section 8.3.
Change the overlapped report data type.
See section 9.5.
Sections 5.17 and 8.3.
Set the IP address of the DX.
You cannot connect more than 240 channels.
The maximum number of commands that can be
sent is 16. The modules that can be set with a
single command are consecutive modules that can
be automatically set. Change the MW100 module
configuration so that there are no empty slots.
Below are the possible causes. Check them.
The MW100 is in calibration mode. Change to
the setting mode or measurement mode.
The measurement module may not have been
detected. Perform system reconfiguration.
There are no modules that can be automatically
set. Check the modules.
An IP address has not been assigned to the
MW100. Set the IP address.
The Modbus server of the MW100 is turned OFF.
Turn ON the server.
You cannot set an MW100 that has been
automatically set.
Check the Ethernet connection.
The current MW100 settings do not allow the
measurement to be started. Check the settings.
Set the DNS of the DX.
This occurs when the custom display is generated.
11-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
134
Check the subnet mask.
Check the subnet mask.
Enter a different port number for each function.
12
13
App
Index

Code
139
Code
150
Message
This dependency is not possible.
Execution Errors
Message
This action is not possible because sampling is in progress.
151
This action is not possible during sampling or calculating.
152
153
154
This action is not possible because saving is in progress.

This action is not possible because formatting is in progress.
Message not accepte because message limit was reached.
155
The message is not written while sampling is stopped.
156
157
158
There are no channels to be saved to the memory.

This function is not possible at this time.
Exceeds time deviation setting.
159
It is outside the postscript message write-in range.
162
Data storage is already started.
163
Data storage is already stopped.
164
This action is not possible because there is a bar code data

error.
11-4
This occurs when the custom display is generated.
Stop the memory sampling and then execute.
See section 6.4.
Stop the memory sampling and then execute.
Wait until the saving is complete.
Wait until the formatting is complete.
The limit is 50 messages.
See section 5.4.
Start the memory sampling and then execute.
Set the channels to be saved.
Check the DX status.
When synchronizing the clock through remote control.
See section 2.3.
Add message can be written to the past section of the
data being memory sampled.
See section 5.4.
Memory sampling is in progress on the batch group.
Memory sampling on the batch group has already
been stopped.
IM04L41B01-03
Check the text that the barcode reader scanned.
See section 2.11.
IM 04L41B01-01E
Operation Errors

Errors Related to the External Storage Medium
Code
200
Message
Operation aborted because an error was found in media.
201
Not enough free space on media.
202
210
211
Media is read-only.
Media has not been inserted.
Media is damaged or not formatted.
212
Format error.
213
214
The file is read-only.

There is no file or directory.
215
Exceeded the allowable number of directories or files.
216
The file or directory name is incorrect.
217
Unknown file type.
218
219
This directory or file now exists. Delete it or change the name.

Invalid file or directory operation.
220
221
222
230
The file is already in use. Try again later.

This action is not possible because FTP transmission is in
progress.
Media is not recognized.
There is no setting file.
231
Abnormal setting exists in file.
Use another storage medium or format it.
See section 6.7.
There is not enough free space on media or the
number of directories exceeded the limit. Use another
storage medium.
See section 1.4.
Make it writable.
Insert a storage medium into the drive.
Remove the medium and set it again. If an error still
occurs, replace or format the medium.
See section 6.7.
Try formatting again.
See section 6.7.
Access another file or make the file writable.
Specified a file in which data is being added. Tried
to save a file which does not exists in the internal
memory.
Replace a storage medium. Delete unneeded files and
directories.
See section 6.7.
Use alphanumeric characters and symbols.
See section 6.2.
Check the extension.
See section Appendix 2.
See section 6.2.
Tried to delete multiple directory levels. Or, tried to
delete a directory containing files.
Delete the files and directories in the directory first
before executing the operation.
See section 6.7.
Wait until the file is accessible.
Execute after FTP data transfer is complete.
Remove and reset the storage medium.
Switch to a medium that contains a setup file (.pdl
extension).
Specify another file.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-5
232
Errors Related to the Historical Trend

There is no available data.
233
The specified historical data do not exist.
234
The specified channel is not assigned to the display group.
235
There is no data for the chosen date.
236
There is no data after the selected time for this day.
237
The specified screen cannot be displayed
260
Errors Related to E-mail and Web Server

IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available.
261
SMTP server is not found.
262
Cannot initiate E-mail transmission.
263
Senders address rejected by the server.
264
Some recipients addresses are invalid.
265
SMTP protocol error.
266
Ethernet cable is not connected.
267
Could not connect to SMTP server.
268
269
E-mail transmission request failed.

E-mail transfer error.
270
Could not connect to POP3 server
271
Not able to login to the POP3 server.
275
The current image cannot be output to the Web.
276
Image data currently being created. Unable to perform key

operation.
Could not output screen to Web.
277
11-6
Appears when displaying historical trends. Specify another

file.
Appears when switching to historical trend from information
display.
See section 4.5.
Appears when switching to trend, digital, or bar graph from
overview.
Select a day of the month that has E or D displayed.
See section 4.3.
Select an earlier time.
Section 4.3.
The DX display mode and the Web display mode are
different, or a display group that does not exist has been
specified from the Web. See IM04L41B01-03E.
The IP address is not specified.

Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name.
Check the DNS setting.
Check the SMTP server name.
Sections 1.3 and 1.4 in the communication manual
The host name of the DX is not correct. Check the host
name.
The port number of the SMTP server is not correct.
Check the port number.
Sections 1.3 and 1.4 in the communication manual
Check the senders address.
Check the recipients addresses.
May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate
addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in
the middle of the e-mail transmission.
Check the cable connection.
Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the
network.
If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP
address, check to see that the IP address is correct.
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate
addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in
the middle of the e-mail transmission.
Check the connection settings.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
Check the login name and the password.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
The setup display cannot be output to the Web browser.
This message is displayed on the Web browser.
Try again a little later.This message is displayed on the
Web browser.
Failed to create the image.This message is displayed on
the Web browser.
IM 04L41B01-01E
Errors Related to FTP Client

For a description of the FTP client function of the DX, see the Communication Interface
Users Manual (IM 04L41B01-17E). The detail code does not appear in the error
message on the screen. You can view the code on the FTP log display of the DX or using
the FTP log output via communications.
Code
280
281
282
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
Message
IP address is not set or FTP function is not available.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280.
Character String and Details
HOSTADDR
An IP address has not been assigned to the DX.
DORMANT
Internal processing error.*1
LINK
Data link is disconnected.
FTP mail box operation error.
MAIL
STATUS
TIMEOUT
PRIORITY
NVRAM
FTP control connection error.
HOSTNAME
Failed the DNS lookup (search the IP address corresponding to the host name).
Check the DNS setting and the destination host name.
TCPIP
UNREACH
Failed to connect to a control connection server.
Check the address setting and that the server is running.
OOBINLINE
NAME
CTRL
The control connection does not exist.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper
time period.
IAC
Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence.
time period.
ECHO
Failed to transmit data on the control connection.
time period.
REPLY
Failed to receive data on the control connection.
time period.
12
13
App
Index

SERVER
The server is not in a condition to provide the service.
Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided.
Code
283
284
11-8
Message
FTP command was not accepted.
USER
Failed to verify the user name.
Check the user name setting.
PASS
Failed to verify the password.
Check the password setting.
ACCT
Failed to verify the account.
Check the account setting.
TYPE
Failed to change the transfer type.
Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode.
CWD
Failed to change the directory.
Check the initial path setting.
PORT
Failed to set the transfer connection.
Check that the security function is disabled.
PASV
Failed to set the transfer connection.
Check that the server supports PASV commands.
SCAN
Failed to read the transfer connection settings.
Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server.
FTP transfer setting error.
MODE
LOCAL
REMOTE
The destination file name is not correct.
Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files.
ABORT
File transfer abort was requested by the server.
Check the server for the reason for the abort request.
IM 04L41B01-01E

Code
285
286
290
291
292
293
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
Message
FTP data connection error.
SOCKET
Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection.*2
BIND
Failed the transfer connection command.*2
CONNECT
Failed the transfer connection.*2
LISTEN
Failed the transfer connection reception.*2
ACCEPT
Failed to accept the transfer connection.*2
SOCKNAME
RECV
Failed to receive data over the transfer connection.*2
SEND
Failed to send data over the transfer connection.*2
FTP file transfer error.
SNTP access failure.
DORMANT
LINK
Data link is disconnected.
SNTP server does not respond.
TIMEOUT
Check that the server is running.*2
Incorrect SNTP server setting.
HOSTNAME
Failed the DNS lookup (search the IP address corresponding to the host name).
Check the DNS setting and the SNTP server name.
TCPIP
Invalid SNTP server reply.
SEND
A correct IP address has not been assigned to the DX.
BROKEN
There is a problem with the SNTP server.
If this error occurs even after executing SNTP manually several times, check the SNTP
server.
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-9

Code
294
295
296
297
11-10
Message
No time correction because excess time deviation with SNTP server.
OVER
This error occurs when periodic SNTP is executed by the auto setting of the clock and
the clock is not adjusted because the time difference between the DX and the SNTP
server is greater than or equal to 10 minutes.
Check the time on the DX and the SNTP server.
IP address was released because DHCP setting is invalid.
REJECT
Address obtained by DHCP is inappropriate.
DHCP access failure.
ESEND
Failed to transmit to the DHCP.
ESERVER
DHCP server not found.
ESERVFAIL
No response from the DHCP server.
ERENEWED
Address renewal rejected.
EEXTENDED
Address lease extension rejected.
EEXPIRED
Address lease period expired.
Registration of the hostname to the DNS server failed.
INTERNAL
Failed to register the host name (transmission error, reception timeout, etc.).
FORMERR
Failed to register the host name (format error: DNS message syntax error).
SERVFAIL
Failed to register the host name (server failure: DNS server processing error).
NXDOMAIN
Failed to register the host name (non existent domain).
NOTIMP
Failed to register the host name (not implemented).
REFUSED
Failed to register the host name (operation refused).
YXDOMAIN
Failed to register the host name (name exists).
YXRRSET
Failed to register the host name (RR set exists).
NXRRSET
Failed to register the host name (RR set does not exist).
NOTAUTH
Failed to register the host name (not authoritative for zone).
NOTZONE
Failed to register the host name (different from zone section).
NONAME
Host name not entered on the DX.
IM 04L41B01-01E

Code
298
Message
Deletion of the hostname to the DNS server failed.
INTERNAL
Failed to delete the host name (transmission error, reception timeout, etc.).
FORMERR
Failed to delete the host name (format error: DNS message syntax error).
SERVFAIL
Failed to delete the host name (server failure: DNS server processing error).
NXDOMAIN
Failed to delete the host name (non existent domain).
NOTIMP
Failed to delete the host name (not implemented).
REFUSED
Failed to delete the host name (operation refused).
YXDOMAIN
Failed to delete the host name (name exists).
YXRRSET
Failed to delete the host name (RR set exists).
NXRRSET
Failed to delete the host name (RR set does not exist).
NOTAUTH
Failed to delete the host name (not authoritative for zone).
NOTZONE
Failed to delete the host name (different from zone section).
NOTLINKED
4 Physical layer was disconnected when removing the host name.
2
3
4
5
6
7
*1 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

*2 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission
(bad cable connection, duplicate addresses, network equipment failure).
Note
The FTP client function on the DX has a timer function that drops the connection if there is
no data transfer for two minutes. If the server does not respond within this time period, the
transfer fails.
The FTP client function on the DX overwrites files without a warning if files with the same
name exist at the transfer destination unless the server returns a negative response.
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-11
Communication Errors
For information regarding the communication function of the DX, see the Communication
Interface Users Manual (IM 04L41B01-17E).
Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes, Output Communication

Command Execution, and Setup Data Loading
Code
300
301
302
303
350
351
352
353
354
Message
Command is too long.
Too many number of commands delimited with ;.
This command has not been defined.
Data request command can not be enumerated with sub-delimiter.
Command is not permitted to the current user level.
This command cannot be specified in the current mode.
The option is not installed.
This command cannot be specified in the current setting.
This command is not available during sampling or calculating.
Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output
Communication Command Execution
An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
on the screen.
Code
362
363
11-12
Message
There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND.
All data have already been transferred.
IM 04L41B01-01E
Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors

on the screen.
Code
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
Message
Command error.
Delimiter error.
Parameter error.
No permission.
No such connection.
Use quit to close this connection.
Failed to disconnect.
No TCP control block.
Format error.
2
3
4
Other Communication Errors

on the screen.
Code
400
401
402
403
404
410
411
420
421
422
Message
Input username.
Input password.
Select username from admin or user.
Login incorrect, try again!
No more login at the specified level is acceptable.
Login successful. (The special user level)
Login successful. (The general user level)
Connection has been lost.
The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded.
Communication has timed-out.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-13
Status Messages
Code
500
501
503
504
505
506
508
509
510
511
513
514
515
516
520
521
530
531
532
533
534
535
542
543
550
551
552
560
561
11-14
Message
Execution is complete.
Please wait a moment...
Data are being saved to media...
File is being loaded from media...
Formatting...
Memory save to media was interrupted.
There is no file or directory.
Press [DISP/ENTER] key to display file name.
Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating.
MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating.
Post process in progress.
Now loading historical data.
Data save is completed.
Files are now being sorted.
Connecting to the line...
The data file is being transferred.
Media can be removed safely.
Media was removed compulsorily.
USB device has been connected.
USB device cannot be recognized.
There was no data which is not saved to media.
Media was recognized.
Media read error.
Flash write error.
The A/D calibration is being executed...
FTP test is being executed...
E-mail test is being executed...
Now connecting to SNTP server...
Now adjusting the time.
IM 04L41B01-01E

Code
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
Message
Ethernet cable is disconnected.
ON
Detected that an Ethernet cable was connected.
OFF
Detected that an Ethernet cable was disconnected.
The command is sent to DHCP.
RENEW
Requesting address renewal to the DHCP server.
The response was received from DHCP.
RENEWED
Address renewal complete.
EXTENDED
Address release extension request complete.
RELEASED
Address release complete.
IP address was set.
IPCONFIG
Assigned the IP address.
It is a setting that doesnt register hostname to the DNS server.
NOREQUEST
Configured not to register the host name.
The hostname was registered to DNS server.
UPDATE
Registered the host name to the DNS server.
The hostname was deleted from DNS server.
REMOVE
Assigned the IP address.
OFF
Removed the host name from the DNS server.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-15
Warning Messages
Code
600
601
610
614
615
Message
Measured data and Settings have been initialized.
Measured data have been initialized.
This usernema is already registered.
Calibration settings are reset because of range setting change.
Noise may influence measurement in test mode.
Ref. Section
See section 8.2.

See section 3.9
See section 3.1
System Errors
Servicing is required when a system error occurs. If this happens, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Code
901
902
910
911
912
913
914
921
922
923
924
930
940
11-16
Message
ROM failure.
RAM failure.
A/D memory failure for all input channels.
Channel 1 A/D memory failure.
Channel 1 A/D calibration value error.
Memory acquisition failure.
The Ethernet module is down.
IM 04L41B01-01E
11.2 Troubleshooting
Does not function (nothing is displayed).
Is the power switch

turned ON? Does the
switch work properly?
NO
2
Turn ON the power properly.
O.G.
YES
Is the power supply

connected properly?
4
NO
Connect properly.
O.G.
YES
Is the power
supplied properly?
NO
Supply the power at the specified

voltage and frequency.
O.G.
YES
6
7
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA

dealer.
O.G.: Operation Guide
8
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-17
The error is large.
The trend or digital values fluctuate.
The trend is off the scale on either the 0% or 100% side.
Does the input meet

the specifications?
NO
Change the input to meet the

specifications.
Section 12.1
YES
Is the range/span
setting appropriate?
NO
Adjust the span and range (section 3.3).

If you use Calibration Correction (/CC1
option), check the set values for
correction points (section 3.9).
YES
Taking measures
against noise?
NO
YES
Is the environmental
temperature kept constant
(TC input)?
NO
YES
Is the input wiring correct?
NO
YES
Is the input wiring parallel

with other equipment?
YES
NO
Is the RJC setting correct

(TC input)?
NO
Separate the input wiring from the

noise source.
Ground the recorder.
Ground the measured object properly.
Insulate the TC from the measured object.
Use shielded cables for input.
Change the integral time of the input
A/D converter (section 3.1).
Use moving average on the input
(section 3.4).
Attach the input terminal cover properly.
Protect the input terminal from wind or
fans.
Keep the temperature fluctuation near
the input terminal to a minimum.
Wire correctly (O.G.).

Install the terminal block correctly.
Fasten the terminal screws correctly.
Insulate the RTD from the ground.
If burnt, replace the TC.
Stop the TC burnout upscale/downscale

function of other equipment.
Ground the DX and other equipment
at one point.
Disconnect parallel wiring
(use a double-element TC, for instance).
Set it correctly.
Section 3.2
YES

dealer.
O.G.: Operation Guide
11-18
IM 04L41B01-01E
Display and other functions do not work properly.
Taking measures
against noise?
NO
YES
Move the input and communication wires

away from the noise source.
Ground the recorder.
Use shielded cables for input and
communication wires.
Insert an isolation transformer into the
power line.
Insert a power line filter into the power line.
If an inductive load is used in the alarm
output line, insert a serge suppressor in
the line.
2
3
4

dealer.
Some items on the display selection menu

or FUNC key menu are not displayed.
Is the function of the DX

configured properly?
YES
NO
6
Use the customize-menu function to show
the item on the menu.
Confirm that the DX is equipped with the
necessary options.
Section 5.17
7
8

dealer.
9
10
11
Troubleshooting
12
13
App
Index
IM 04L41B01-01E
11-19
Chapter 12 Maintenance
12.1 Periodic Inspection
Check the operation periodically to keep the DX in good working order.

Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed.
Is the display and storage functioning properly?
If not, see chapter 11, Troubleshooting in the DX2000 Users Manual.
Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated?
If replacement is necessary, see Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn
Parts.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Calibration
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
12-1
12.2 Calibrating the DX

It is recommended that the DX be calibrated once a year to assure its measurement
accuracy.
Calibration service is also provided by YOKOGAWA dealers.
For details, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Required Instruments
Calibration instruments with the following resolution are required for calibrating the DX.
Recommended Instruments
DC voltage standard:

Decade resistance box:
5520A by FLUKE or equivalent

Main specifications
Output accuracy: (0.005% + 1 V)
Yokogawa Meters & Instruments Model 2793-01
or equivalent

Main specifications

Accuracy of output range 0.1 to 500 : (0.01%
+2 m)

Resolution: 0.001
0C standard temperature device: ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics or equivalent

Main specifications

Standard temperature stability accuracy: 0.05C
For information on purchasing the calibration instruments, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
Calibration Procedure
1. Wire the DX and the calibration instrument as shown in the following figure, and
adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the DX is at least 30
minutes).
2. Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity
is within the standard operating conditions (see section 13.6).

3. Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0, 50, and 100% of the input
range and calculate the errors from the readings.

If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications, contact
your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Note
For thermocouple inputs, you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a
voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature.
DC Voltage Measurement (Example for the DX2010)

Input terminal
12-2
DC voltage standard
IM 04L42B01-01E
12.1 Calibrating the DX
Temperature Measurement When Using an RTD (Example for the DX2010)
1
2
Input terminal
The resistance of three lead

wires must be equal.
b
A
B
Decade resistance box

(Model 2793-01 from Yokogawa
Meters & Instruments Corporation)
Temperature Measurement When Using a Thermocouple (Example for the

DX2010)
Copper wires
4
5
Thermocouple wires or TC
extension wires
6
7
8
Input terminal
Copper
wires
DC voltage standard
Thermocouple
wires
(0 C standard temperature device ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics)
10
RJC of TC Input
11
12
Calibration
As the measurement terminal of the DX is generally at room temperature, the actual

output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive
force table based on 0C. The DX performs compensation by measuring the temperature
at the input terminal and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the
actual output of the thermocouple. Therefore, when the measurement terminal is shorted
(equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0C), the measured value indicates the
temperature of the input terminal.
When calibrating the DX, this compensation voltage (thermoelectromotive force of 0C
reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from the
output of the standard generator before application. As shown in the figure, by using the
0C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0C, you can
input the thermoelectromotive force of 0C reference from the DC voltage standard and
perform the calibration.
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
12-3
Chapter 13 Specifications
13.1 Signal Input and Alarm
Measurement Input
Item
Specifications
Number of inputs, scan interval, and A/D integration time
Model
Number of inputs
Scan interval
Normal mode
Fast sampling mode*

4
DX2004
125 ms, 250 ms
25 ms
8
DX2008
10
DX2010
20
DX2020
30
1 s, 2 s, 5 s
125 ms
2 s, 5 s
DX2030
40
DX2040
48
DX2048
60 Hz/50 Hz/100 ms
Integration time of the A/D converter
60 Hz/50 Hz
600 Hz (fixed)
* Fast sampling mode is not available on models equipped with external input channels (/MC1 option).
Input Type
DC voltage, 1-5V, thermocouple (TC), resistance temperature detector (RTD), ON/OFF input (DI),
and DC current (by adding an external shut resistor)
Measurement range and measurable range
Input Type
DC voltage
Range
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2V
6V
20 V
50 V
1-5V
1 to 5 V*6
Thermocouple R*1
S*1
B*1
K*1
E*1
J*1
T*1
N*1
Measurable Range
20.000 to 20.000 mV
60.00 to 60.00 mV
200.00 to 200.00 mV
2.0000 to 2.0000 V
6.000 to 6.000 V
20.000 to 20.000 V
50.00 to 50.00 V
0.800 to 5.200 V
32 to 3200F
0.0 to 1760.0C
32 to 3200F
0.0 to 1760.0C
32 to 3308F
0.0 to 1820.0C
328 to 2498F
200.0 to 1370.0C
328.0 to 1472.0F
200.0 to 800.0C
328.0 to 2012.0F
200.0 to 1100.0C
328.0 to 752.0F
200.0 to 400.0C
454 to 2372F
270.0 to 1300.0C
(454 to 32F only for
(270.0 to 0.0C only for
release numbers 3 and later) release numbers 3 and later)
32 to 4199F
W*2
0.0 to 2315.0C
328.0 to 1652.0F
L*3
200.0 to 900.0C
328.0 to 752.0F
U*3
200.0 to 400.0C
32 to 4352F
WRe*4
0.0 to 2400.0C
328.0 to 1112.0F
RTD
Pt (Pt100)*5
200.0 to 600.0C
328.0 to 1022.0F
JPt (JPt100)*5 200.0 to 550.0C
DI
Level
0: Less than 2.4 V. 1: 2.4 V or higher (judged at the 6 V range)
Contact
0: Open. 1: Closed (parallel capacitance of 0.01 F or less)
*1: R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC584-1 (1995), DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995
*2: W: W-5%Re/W-26%Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.), ASTM E988
*3: L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710
*4: WRe: W-3%Re/W-25%Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.)
*5: Pt100: JIS C1604-1997, IEC751-1995, DIN IEC751-1996
JPt100: JIS C1604-1989, JIS C1606-1989
Measuring current: i = 1mA (Pt100, JPt100)
*6: The range for linear scaling of 1-5V inputs. Burnout detection and low-cut
functions are available.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-1
13.1 Signal Input and Alarm

Item
Thermocouple burnout*
Specifications
Burnout upscale/downscale selectable (for each channel).
Normal: 2 k or less., Burnout: 100 k or more (parallel capacitance of 0.01 F or less)
Detection current: Approx. 10 A
1-5 range burnout*
Burnout upscale/downscale selectable (for each channel).
Burnout detection: Greater than scale upper limit + 10% of scale width or scale lower limit less
than 5% of scale width
TC reference junction compensation
Internal reference junction compensation or external reference junction compensation
Filter function
Takes the moving average of the input values (for each channel). Moving average data points: 2 to
400
* In fast sampling mode, burnouts on all measurement channels cannot be detected within a scan interval. Burnout may not be
detected until the number of measurements indicated below is carried out if measurement is started in a burnout condition or
after a burnout occurs.
DX2004 and DX2008: Up to 4 measurements. DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048: Up to 2 measurements
Computation
Difference computation
Computable range:
DC voltage, TC, RTD, and DI
Linear scaling
Computable range:
DC voltage, TC, RTD, and DI
Scalable range:
30000 to 30000. The decimal place is within 4 digits to the right
of the decimal point.
Unit:
6 digits or less
Over value detection:
The value can be set to over value when 5% of the scale range
is exceeded.
Square root computation Takes the square root of the input and apply linear scaling
Computable type:
DC voltage
Scalable range and unit:
Same as linear scaling
Low-cut:
Set the low-cut value in the range of 0.0% to 5.0% of the span.
1-5V
Computable range:
1-5
Scalable range and unit:
Low-cut:
The low-cut point is fixed to the span lower limit.
Alarms
Item
Number of alarms
Levels and colors
Specifications
Up to four alarms (level) for each measurement channels
You can change the alarm colors and display order by setting priorities and colors for each alarm
The alarm level and color settings are shared by all channels.
Alarm type
High limit, low limit, difference high limit, difference low limit, high limit on rate-of-change alarm, low
limit on rate-of-change alarm, delay high limit, and delay low limit
Alarm delay time
1 to 3600 s (for each channel)
Rate-of-change calculation interval of rate-of-change alarms
1 to 32 times the scan interval (common to all channels)
Alarm output
Output to the internal switch
Number of internal switches: 30
Internal switch operation: AND/OR operation selectable
Hysteresis
High and low limit alarm:
0.0 to 5.0% of the span (common to all channels)
Difference high and low limit alarms:
0.0 to 5.0% of the span (common to all channels)
Display
Displays the status on the respective operation screen and an alarm icon on the status display
section when an alarm occurs.
Display operation: Hold or not hold the display until the alarm acknowledge operation.
Alarm hide function (alarm no logging function)
Not display alarms nor record to the alarm summary (for each channel)
Alarm information
Displays a log of alarm occurrences on the alarm summary.
Alarm Annunciator function (release number 3 or later)
Alarm displays and relay output operations can be made to follow an alarm sequence.
There are three supported alarm sequences: ISA-A-4, ISA-A, and ISA-M.
First-out display function: none
13-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.2 Display Function
Display
Item
Specifications
Display*
10.4-inch TFT color LCD (640 480 dots)
Brightness
6 levels
Backlight saver function
Dim or turn off the LCD backlight if there is no key operation for a specified time.
* A section of the LCD monitor may contain pixels that are always on or off. The brightness of the LCD may also not be uniform
due to the characteristics of the LCD. This is not a malfunction.
Displayed Information
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
Item
Specifications
Display groups
Assign channels to groups on the trend display, digital display, and bar graph display and display.
Number of groups
36
Number of channels that can be assigned to each group
Up to 10
Display color
Channel:
Select from 24 colors
Background:
Select white or black
Trend display (T-Y display)
Waveform line width
Select from 1, 2, and 3 dots
Display method
Orthogonal axis display with time axis (T) and measured value axis (Y)
Layout:
Vertical, horizontal, wide, or split
Trend interval:
5 s, 10 s (release number 3 or later), 15 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15
min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, and 10 h/div for the DX2004 and DX2008.
15 s (only in fast sampling mode; release number 3 or later), 30 s, 1 min, 2 min,
5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, and 10 h/div for the DX2010,
DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048.
Switchable to the secondary trend interval.
Scale
Display a scale for each channel.
Current value bar graph, color scale band, and alarm point marks can be displayed on the scale.
Others
Grid (divisions: 4 to 12), trip line (line width: 1, 2, or 3 dots), message, zone display, partial
expanded display, auto zone display (release number 3 or later), fine grid (release number 3 or
later), and tag detail display (release number 3 or later)
Trend display (circular display)
Display method
Time axis: Circle, Measured value axis: Perimeter
Time per revolution: Select from the available settings between 20 min and 4 weeks (20 min
available only on the DX2004 or DX2008).
Display format: Full circle display and quarter cycle display
Digital Display
Displays measured values numerically
Update rate
1 s (scan interval if the scan interval is greater than 1 s)
Bar graph display
Displays the measured value on a bar graph
Direction
Vertical or horizontal
Base position
End or center
Update rate
1 s (scan interval if the scan interval is greater than 1 s)
Scale
Display a scale for each channel
Color scale band, and alarm point marks can be displayed on the scale.
Historical trend display (T-Y display)
Redisplays the display data or event data in the internal memory or external storage medium.
Display format
All screen or half screen (only when the display data is being redisplayed)
Top channel (release number 3 or later): Displays the specified channel in front of all the others.
Auto span display (release number 3 or later): Automatically adjusts the display span of the
specified channel.
Auto zone display (release number 3 or later): Displays channels in different zones.
Time axis operation
The time axis can be reduced or expanded, and data can be displayed continuously. The time
display can be switched from absolute to relative time (release number 3 or later).
Add message
Messages can be added.
Background color
Select from white, cream, black, or light gray.
Data search
Waveforms from the internal memory can be displayed through the specification of a date and time
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-3

Item
Specifications
Historical display (circular display)
Display format
Full circle display and quarter cycle display
Others
Same as the historical trend display (T-Y display)
Overview Display
Displays the measured values of all channels and the alarm statuses (if the number of channels
exceeds 261, the measured values are not displayed.).
Information display
Alarm summary display
Displays a log of up to 1000 alarms.
Specify an alarm with the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the historical trend
display.
Message summary display
Time and content of up to 450 messages (including 50 add messages)
Specify a message with the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the historical trend
display.
Memory summary display Displays the information of the data in the memory.
Specify a file with the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the historical trend
display.
Save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using keys.
Report (/M1 and /PM1)
Displays the report data residing in the internal memory.
Stacked bar graph (/M1 and /PM1; Release number 3 or later)
Displays the report data of each report group in a stacked bar graph.
Display formats: H+D (hourly data is used for the display), Day+Week (daily data is used for
the display), D+M (daily data is used for the display)
Report groups: Report channels are arranged in groups of sixes starting with the first
channel (R001). The group arrangements are fixed.
Scale/grid: Fixed at four divisions
Update interval: 1 s
The report data of the channels in the specified group is displayed in a stacked bar graph.
However, only channels that have the same unit of measurement as the first channel in the
group are displayed.
Status Display
Relay status display:
Displays the ON/OFF status of the alarm output relay and internal
switch.
Modbus client status:
Displays the communication status on the Modbus client
Modbus master condition: Displays the communication status on the Modbus master
Event switch display
(release number 3 or later): Displays the status of the event level switches.
Log display
Displays the login log, error log, communication log, FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log,
DHCP log, and Modbus log.
Four panel display
Divides the screen into four sections and displays four different display formats.
Four combinations of screens can be registered.
Alarm annunciator display (release number 3 or later)
Display windows: 80 max.
Display window label characters: 32 characters 5 lines max. Comment text blocks are used.
Custom display
Through operations such as size adjustments and attribute configurations, display components
(such as the trend, digital, and bar graph displays) can be arranged to create a custom display.
The display data that is created can be saved to internal memory or to an external medium (CF).
The saved data can be loaded and displayed.
Number of displays: 28 (3 in the internal memory and 25 in a CF card)
System information display
Displays the number of measurement and computation channels, options, remote controller ID,
MAC address, firmware version, and internal memory capacity.
Network information display
Displays the DX network setup information.
13-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
Other Displayed Information

Item
Tag display
Specifications
Tag numbers and comments can be displayed.
Tag numbers (release number 3 or later)

Up to 16 characters

Displayable characters: Alphanumeric characters

Tag numbers can be enabled or disabled.
Tag comments
32 characters on a DX with a release number of 3 or later. 16 characters on a DX with
a release number of 2 or earlier.
Message
Write messages to the trend display.
Number of messages
100
Maximum number of saved messages
400
Character
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Write method
Write a preset message or write an arbitrary message on the spot.
Write destination
Select only the displayed group or all groups.
Auto message
Write a message when the DX recovers from a power failure while memory sampling is in
progress.
Write a message when the trend interval is switched during memory sampling.
Add message
Write messages to the past data positions.
Message
The same as the Message item above
Maximum umber of saved messages
50
Status display section
Displays the DX status at the upper section of the display.
Displayed contents
Year, month, day, time, displayed group name/display name, user name (when using the login
function), batch name (when using the batch function), internal memory status, external storage
medium status, alarm status, and function usage status (key lock , computation function, and
e-mail)
Auto switching of displayed groups
Switches the display group at a given interval.
Interval: Select from the available settings between 5 s and 1 min.
Auto recovery display
Specify the display to be shown automatically when keys are not operated.
Time until the display switches: Select from the available settings between 1 min and 1 h.
Favorite display
Register frequently used displays to the Favorite key and show them through simple operation.
Up 8 displays can be registered.
Language
Select English, Japanese, German, French, or, Chinese.
Display selection menu customization
Show/hide and change the positions of each item in the display selection menus and sub menus
Insert/delete separators.
FUNC key menu customization
Show/hide and change the display positions of each item.
Comments display (release number 3 or later)
Displays comments (from a comment text block) when events occur.
Comment text blocks
100
Comment text block contents
Comment text blocks consist of 5 comment text fields.
Comment text fields
200
Characters: up to 32 characters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-5
13.3 Data Saving Function

Configuration
Item
Internal memory
Medium
External storage medium
Medium
Format
Data Type
Specifications
Temporarily saves various types of data.
Flash memory
CF card (up to 2 GB)
FAT32 or FAT16
Name
Data type (file name extension)
Description
Display data (.dad), event data (.dae), and manual sampled data (.dam)
Screen image data (.PNG), setup data (.PDL), report data (.DAR; /M1 and /PM1), custom
display setup data (.CDC)
Display Data and Event Data

Item
Internal memory
File storage capacity
Number of files
Operation
Display data
Target
Sampling interval
Description
Data size
File size
Data format
Recording
Event data
Target
Sampling intervals
Description
Data size
File size
Data format
Mode
Specifications
80 MB (standard memory) or 200 MB (large memory)

Up to 400
FIFO (First In First Out)
Measurement/computation/external input channel
Synchronized to the trend interval.
Maximum or minimum value per sampling interval
Measurement/External input channel data: 4 bytes/data value. Computation channel data: 8 bytes/
data value.
Up to 8 MB
Binary
Records data at all times.
Measurement/computation/external input channel.
Determined by the sample rate.
25 ms, 125 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20
min and 30 min (15 min, 20min, and 30min are only available on releases 3 and later)
An interval that is shorter than the scan interval cannot be set.
Data per sampling interval
Measurement/External input channel data: 2 bytes/data value. Computation channel data: 4 bytes/
data value.
Up to 8 MB
Binary
Free:
Records data at all times.
Trigger: Starts recording data when a certain event occurs and records for the specified interval.
Combinations of saved data

File size
Display data only, event data only, or display data and event data
See appendix 1.
Manual Sampled Data

Item
Item
Specifications
Measured value at an arbitrary time
Specify up to 120 channels when external input channels (/MC1) are used.
Data format
Text
Maximum number of data values that the internal memory can store
400
13-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.3 Data Saving Function
Report Data (/M1)
Item
Specifications
Item
Report at each scheduled time of report
Data format
Text
Maximum number of reports that the internal memory can store
100
Saving Data to the External Storage Medium

Item
Data Saving
Manual save
Auto save
Auto save operation

File name
Save destination
Snapshot Data
Item
Item
Data format
Output destination
Setup Data
Item
Item
Data format
File name
Save to/Load from
Specifications
Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium.
Saves when the external storage medium is inserted with a key operation.
Display data:
Every file save interval
Event data:
Every data length
Manual sampled data: When manual sampling is executed.
Report data:
When report is created.
Select save data only if there is sufficient free space on the CF card or constantly retain the most
recent data files in the CF card (media FIFO) (release number 2 or later).
Select from sequence number+user-assigned string+date, sequence number+user-assigned
string, or sequence number+batch name.
Auto save: CF card. Manual save: CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1)
Directory name: Specify using up to 20 characters.
Specifications
Displayed screen image data
PNG
CF card or communication output
Data File Loading

Item
Function
Miscellaneous
Item
Header comment
4
5
6
7
8
Specifications
DX setup data
Binary
Specify using up to 32 characters.
CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1)
Custom Display Setup Data

Item
Contents
Format
File name
Save to/Load from
10
Specifications
Custom display layout settings
Text
Up to 32 characters
CF card
11
Specifications
Load and show the display data or event data in a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1).
12
13
Specifications
Specifications
Add up to 50 characters of comment to display data, event data, manual sampled data, or report
data file.
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-7
13.4 Other Standard Functions

Event Action Function
Item
Event action
Number of settings
Events
Timer
Match time timer
Action
Security Function
Item
Key lock function
Login function
System administrators
Users
Specifications
Execute a specified operation when a given event occurs.
40
Remote control input, etc.
Number of timers: 4
Number of timers: 4
Specify memory start/stop, alarm ACK, etc.
There are limitations on the combinations of events and actions.
Specifications
Limitations to key operation, access to the external storage medium, and various operations
Allow DX operation to registered users.
5 administrators
30 users
Time Related Functions

Item
Clock
Accuracy
Time setting
Time adjustment method
While memory sampling
While memory is stopped

DST
Time zone
Date format
Specifications
With a calendar function
10 ppm (0 to 50C), excluding a delay (of 1 second, maximum) caused each time the power is
turned on.
Using key operation, communication command, event action function, or SNTP client function
Corrects the time by 40 ms for each second.
Limit in which the time is gradually adjusted: Select from the available settings between 10 s and
5 min.
If the time is outside the limit, the time is immediately corrected.
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2038.
Immediately change the time.
The date/time for switching between standard time and DST can be specified.
Sets the time difference from GMT.
Select YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, or DD.MM.YYYY.
Types of Characters That Can Be Handled

Item
Characters
Specifications
Alphabet characters, numbers, and symbols (limitation exists)
Miscellaneous
Item
Specifications
Decimal point type (release number 3 or later)
Period or comma
13-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.4 Other Standard Functions
Communication Functions
Item
Specifications
Electrical and mechanical specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet frames conform to the DIX specification).
Medium
Ethernet (10BASE-T)
Implemented protocols
TCP, IP, UDP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, SNTP, Modbus, and DX-dedicated protocols
E-mail client
Automatically send e-mail at specified times.
FTP client
Automatically transfer data files to the FTP server.
Applicable files: Display data, event data, screen image data, and report data
FTP Server
Transfer files, delete files, manipulate directories, and output file lists of the DX.
Web server
Shows the DX display on a Web browser.
SNTP client
Inquires the time to the SNTP server and sets the DX.
SNTP server
Outputs the DX time.
Time resolution: 5 ms
DHCP client
Automatically obtain the network address settings from the DHCP server.
Modbus client
Reads data from another device and writes to the registers.
Modbus server
Loads measurement and computation channel data
Loads and writes external input channel data
Loads and writes communcation input data
Some control commands such as memory start
Modbus client register access limitations
Setting/Measurement server
Operate, set, and output data of the DX using a dedicated protocol.
Maintenance/test server
Outputs connection information and network information.
Instrument information server
Outputs information (serial number, model name, etc.) of the connected DX.
EtherNet/IP server
Can join an EtherNet/IP network as an adapter (server)
Loads measurement and computation channel data
Loads and writes external input channel data
Loads and writes communcation input data
Batch Function
Item
Function
Batch name
Structure
Text field
Batch comment
Specifications
Data management using batch names. Enter text fields and batch comments in the data file.
Added to the file name of the display data and event data.
Batch number (up to 32 characters) + lot number (up to 8 digits)
Adds text to the display data and event data. There are 24 available text fields for release numbers
3 and later. There are 8 available text fields for release numbers 2 and earlier. Up to 20 title
characters and 30 other characters can be entered per field.
Adds text to the display data and event data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-9
13.5 Options
Alarm Output Relay (/A1, /A2, /A3, /A4, and /A5)
Item
Action
Number of outputs
Relay contact rating
Output format
Relay operation
Specifications
Outputs relay contact signals from the terminals on the rear panel when alarms occur.
2 outputs (/A1), 4 outputs (/A2), 6 outputs (/A3), 12 outputs (/A4), and 24 outputs (/A5)
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
NO-C-NC
Energized/deenergized, AND/OR, hold/non-hold, and reflash settings are selectable.
RS-232 Interface (/C2) and RS-422/485 Interface (/C3)
Item
Specifications
Connection
EIA RS-232(/C2) or EIA RS-422/485(/C3)
Protocol
Dedicated protocol or Modbus protocol
Synchronization
Start-stop synchronization
Transmission mode (RS-422/485)
Four-wire half-duplex multi-drop connection (1:N (N = 1 to 32))
Data rate
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps
Data length
7 or 8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
Parity
Odd, even, or none
Handshaking
Off:Off, XON:XON, XON:RS, and CS:RS
Communication distance (RS-422/485)
1200 m
Modbus communication
Operation modes: Master or slave
VGA Output (/D5)

Item
External display
Specifications
Resolution:
640 480 dots (VGA)
Connector:
15-pin D-Sub
FAIL/Status Output Relay (/F1)

Item
FAIL output
Relay operation
Status output
Relay operation
Relay contact rating
Specifications
Relay contact output on CPU error
Energized during normal operation and de-energized on system error.
Output a relay contact signal when a selected condition occurs.
A combination of the following conditions can be selected:
Low memory, memory failure, media error, A/D hardware error, burnout detection, communication
error (Modbus master or client communication error), alarm occurrence
Relay is energized when a condition occurs.
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
FAIL/Alarm Output Relay 22 Outputs (/F2)

Item
FAIL/status output
Alarm output relay
Specifications
Same as /F1
Number of outputs: 22. Same as /A[ ] for other specifications.
Clamped Input Terminal (Detachable) (/H2)

Item
Input terminal
13-10
Specifications
Make the input section clamp input terminals (detachable).
2
Recommended wire size: 0.08 to 1.5 mm (AWG 28 to 16)
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.5 Options
Desktop Type (/H5[ ])

Item
Construction
Specifications
With carrying handle.
/H5D, /H5F, /H5R, /H5J, /H5H: Power Inlet connector. With a power cord.
/H5: Can only be specified when /P1 is simultaneously specified. Screw type power terminal.
Without power cord.
Computation Function (including the report function) (/M1)
Item
Specifications
Number of computation channels
DX2004 and DX2008: 12 channels (101 to 112)
DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048: 60 channels (101 to 160)
Operation
General arithmetic operations: Four arithmetic operations, square root, absolute, common
logarithm, natural logarithm, exponential, and power
Relational operations:
<, , >, , =, and
Logic operations:
AND, OR, NOT, and XOR
Statistical operations:
TLOG or CLOG
Special operations:
PRE, HOLD, RESET, and CARRY
Conditional operation:
[a?b:c]
Double-precision floating point for TLOG.SUM and single-precision floating point for all other
computations
Computation accuracy
Data that can be used
Channel data
Constants
Communication input data
Remote control input status
Pulse input
Status input
Rolling average
Measurement range
Alarms
Display
Data saving
Report function
Measurement, computation, and external input channels (/MC1)

60 constants
60
0/1 (/R1)
Counts the number of pulses (/PM1)
Internal switch, alarm output relay (/A[ ]), flags, and recording (memory sample) status (release
number 3 or later)
Performs moving average on the computed results.
9999999 to 99999999
Decimal place: 0 to 4 digits to the right of the decimal point
High limit, low limit, delay high limit, and delay low limit
Hysteresis: High and low limit alarm: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span.
Same as the measurement channels
Number of report channels: 12 or 60 (same as the number of computation channels)
Computation types: Average, maximum, minimum, sum, or instantaneous value
Report types: Hourly, daily, hourly + daily, daily + weekly, daily + monthly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cu10, Cu25 RTD Input/3 Leg Isolated RTD Input (/N1)

Item
Measurement/display accuracy
Input Type
Setting
Cu10 (GE)
Cu1
Cu10 (L&N)
Cu2
Cu10 (WEED)
Cu3
Cu10 (BAILEY)
Cu4
Cu10:=0.00392 at 20C Cu5
Cu10:=0.00393 at 20C Cu6
Cu25:=0.00425 at 0C Cu25
* Measuring current i = 1 mA
Specifications
Under standard operating conditions
Measurement
Range
200.0 to 300.0C
Accuracy
Guaranteed
Range
70.0 to 170.0C
75.0 to 150.0C
200.0 to 260.0C
Measurement Accuracy
A/D integration time:
1.67 ms
16.7 ms or more
(0.4% of rdg + 1.0C)
(0.8% of rdg + 5.0C)
(0.3% of rdg + 0.8C)
(0.5% of rdg + 2.0C)
11
Max.
Resolution
12
0.1C
200.0 to 300.0C
13
Specifications
Input source resistance

1 or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal).
Ambient temperature influence (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or greater, with temperature variation of 10C)
(0.2% of range + 2 digits) or less
With variation of 1 per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal): (0.1% of rdg + 1
digit) or less
With maximum difference of 40 m between wires: Approx. 1C
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-11
13.5 Options
3 Leg Isolated RTD Input (/N2)

Item
Input terminal
Specifications
Isolated on each channel.
Applies to DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048
Extended Input Type (/N3)
Item
Specifications
Under standard operating conditions
Measurement
Input Type
Range
Kp vs Au7Fe
0.0 to 300.0K
PLATINEL
0.0 to 1400.0C
PR40-20
0.0 to 1900.0C
NiNiMo
W/WRe26
0.0 to 1310.0C
0.0 to 2400.0C
Type N(AWG14)
XK GOST*2
0.0 to 1300.0C
200.0 to 600.0
Pt50
Ni100(SAMA)
Ni100(DIN)
Ni120
J263*B
200.0 to 550.0C
200.0 to 250.0C
60.0 to 180.0C
70.0 to 200.0C
0.0 to 300.0K
Cu53
Cu100
Pt25
Pt100GOST*2
Cu100 GOST*2
Cu50 GOST*2
Cu10 GOST*2
Pt46 GOST*2
50.0 to 150.0C
50.0 to 150.0C
200.0 to 550.0C
200.0 to 600.0C
200.0 to 200.0C
200.0 to 200.0C
200.0 to 200.0C
200.0 to 550.0C
Thermocouple
RTD*1
Measurement Accuracy
1.67 ms
0 to 20 K
Within 4.5 K
Within 13.5 K
20 to 300 K
Within 2.5 K
Within 7.5 K
(0.25% of rdg + 2.3C)
(0.25% of rdg + 8.0C)
0 to 450C
Accuracy not guaranteed Accuracy not guaranteed
450 to 750C
(0.9% of rdg + 3.2C)
(0.9% of rdg + 15.0C)
750 to 1100C
(0.9% of rdg + 1.3C)
(0.9% of rdg + 6.0C)
1100 to 1900C (0.9% of rdg + 0.4C)
(0.9% of rdg + 3.0C)
(0.25% of rdg + 0.7C)
(0.5% of rdg + 3.5C)
0 to 400C
15.0C
30.0C
400 to 2400C
(0.2% of rdg + 2.0C)
(0.4% of rdg + 4.0C)
(0.2% of rdg + 1.3C)
(0.5% of rdg + 7.0C)
200 to 100C (0.25% of rdg +1.0C)
(0.5%of rdg +5.0C)
100 to 600C
(0.25% of rdg + 0.8C) (0.5%of rdg +4.0C)
(0.3% of rdg + 0.6C)
(0.6% of rdg + 3.0C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.4C)
(0.3% of rdg + 2.0C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.4C)
(0.3% of rdg + 2.0C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.4C)
(0.3% of rdg + 2.0C)
0 to 40 K
Within 3.0 K
Within 9.0 K
40 to 300 K
Within 1.0 K
Within 3.0 K
(0.15% of rdg + 0.8C)
(0.3% of rdg + 4.0C)
(0.2% of rdg + 1.0C)
(0.4% of rdg + 5.0C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.6C)
(0.3% of rdg + 3.0C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.3C)
(0.3% of rdg + 1.5C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.3C)
(0.3% of rdg + 1.5C)
(0.4% of rdg + 0.5C)
(0.8% of rdg + 2.5C)
(1.5% of rdg + 3.0C)
(3.0% of rdg + 15.0C)
(0.3% of rdg + 0.8C)
(0.6% of rdg + 4.0C)
A/D integration time: 16.7 ms or more
Max.
Resolution
0.1K
0.1C
0.1K
0.1C
*1 Measuring current i = 1 mA
*2 Available for release numbers 3 and later.
Thermocouple input:
2 k or less
RTD input:1 or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal).
Ambient temperature influence (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or greater, with temperature variation of 10C)
TC input
(0.1% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less, excluding the error of reference junction compensation
RTD input
(0.2% of range + 2 digits) or less
TC input
With variation of +1 k: 10 V or less
RTD input
With variation of 1 per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal):
(0.1% of rdg + 1
digit) or less
With maximum difference of 100 m between wires:Approx. 1 C
Remote Control (/R1)

Item
Number of input terminals
Input type
Input type and signal level

Voltage-free contact
Open collector
Allowable input voltage
Signal type
Action
13-12
Specifications
8
Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler, built-in isolated power supply for the input
terminals, and shared common.
Contact closed at 200 or less and contact open at 100 k or greater. The remote contact input
operation can be set to normal open or normal close (release number 3 or later)
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage current when OFF: 0.25 mA or less
5 VDC
Level or edge (250 ms or more)
Executes a specified action by applying a given signal to the remote signal input terminal.
Action assignment: Set using the event action function
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.5 Options
24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply (/TPS4 and /TPS8)
Item
Specifications
Number of loops
4 (/TPS4) or 8 (/TPS8)
Output voltage
22.8 to 25.2 VDC (under rated load current)
Rated output current
4 to 20 mADC
Max. output current
25 mADC (overcurrent protection operation current: approx. 68 mADC)
Allowable conductor resistance
RL (17.8 minimum transmitter operation voltage)/0.02 A
where 17.8 V is the result obtained by subtracting the maximum drop voltage of 5 V when the
load shunt resistance is 250 from the minimum output voltage of 22.8 V
Max. length of wiring
2 km (when using the CEV cable)
Insulation resistance
20 M or more at 500 VDC between output terminal and ground
Dielectric strength
500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10mA) for one minute between output terminal and ground
500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10mA) for one minute between output terminals
1
2
3
4
Easy Text Entry (/KB1 and /KB2)
Item
Specifications
Remote control terminal (438227)
Operating temperature range
0 to 40C
Operation humidity range 20% to 80% RH (at 5 to 40C no condensation)
Power supply
3 VDC AA dry batteries 2
Weight
Approx. 60 g (excluding the batteries)
External dimensions
170 (H) 50 (W) 23.7 (D) mm
Signal
Infrared
Combination with the DX
Number of units that can be controlled individually
Up to 32 units by setting the ID number
Communication distance
Up to 8 m from the front of the light receiving section of the DX (reference value)*
Directional characteristics
See the figure below (reference characteristics)*
* Varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the presence
or absence of external light.
Standard accessories (/KB1)
Remote control unit, two alkaline dry batteries, and ID number label
Horizontal
0
-30
Vertical
30
-45
45
15
10
1 1
Distance (m)
10
15
90
45
(-)
0
-90
15
10
1 1
Distance (m)
10
15
90
7
8
9
10
(-)
11
USB Interface (/USB1)

Item
USB port
Number of ports
Power supply
13-13
12
13
Specifications
Specifications
Complies with Rev. 1.1 and host function
2 (one each on the front panel and rear panel)
5 V 10% , 500 mA (per port)
Devices which need more than 500 mA total bus power for 2 ports can not be connected at the
same time.
Connectable devices
Only connect the devices listed below to prevent damage to the devices.
Keyboard
Complies with HID Class Ver. 1.1
1104 keyboard/89 keyboard (US) and 109 keyboard/89 keyboard (Japanese)
Number connectable units: 1
External medium
USB flash memory (up to 2 GB)
Does not guarantee the operation of all USB flash memories.
External medium such as a hard disk, ZIP, MO, and optical discs are not supported.
Number connectable units: 1
Barcode reader (release number 3 or later)
USB HID Class Ver. 1.1 compatible
English (U.S.) standard USB keyboard compatible
IM 04L42B01-01E
(+)
60
-60
(+)
0
-90
30
-45
60
-60
-30
App
Index
13.5 Options
Pulse Input (/PM1)

Item
Pulse input
Number of inputs
Input type
Input type and signal level
Specifications
3 (8 when using the remote control input terminals)
Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler and built-in isolated power supply for the
input terminals.
Shared common for pulse inputs.
Voltage-free contact Contact closed at 200 or less and contact open at 100 k or greater
Open collector
ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage current when

OFF: 0.25 mA or less
Counts the rising edges of pulses.
For voltage-free contact input: Contact open to contact close
For open collector:
Voltage level of the terminal H from high to low
Allowable input voltage
30 VDC
Max. sampling pulse period
100 Hz
Minimum detected pulse width
5 ms or more for both low (closed) and high (open)
Pulse detection period
Approx. 3.9 ms (256 Hz)
Pulse measuring accuracy 1 pulse
Pulse count interval
Scan interval or 1 s
Miscellaneous
Pulse input terminals can be used as remote control input terminals, isolated from remote control
input terminals
Remote control
Number of inputs: 5. Same as remote control (/R1) for the other specifications
Computation function
Same as the computation function (/M1)
Counting
Calibration Correction (/CC1)

Item
Calibration correction method
Specifications
Corrects the measured value of each channel using segment linearizer approximation.
Number of segment points: 2 to 16 (including the start and end points)
External Input Function (/MC1)

Item
Function
Number of channels
Display
Data saving
Manual sample
Specifications
Loads data from other instruments using the Modbus client or Modbus master function and
displays, records, and saves the data.
240 channels (201 to 440)
Specify up to 120 channels from measurement, computation, and external input channels.
DC/AC 24 V Power Supply (/P1)
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
24 VDC and 24 VAC (50/60Hz)
Allowable power supply voltage range
21.6V to 26.4 VDC/AC
Between power terminal and earth: 20 Mor greater at 500 VDC.
Withstand voltage
Between power terminal and earth: 500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Rated power supply frequency (for AC)
50/60 Hz
Allowable power supply frequency range (for AC)
50 Hz2%, 60 Hz2%
Power supply fluctuation (for AC)
With variation within 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC: 1digit or less
With variation of 2 Hz from rated power supply frequency (at 24 VAC): (0.1% of rdg+1digit) or
less
Rated power consumption
45 VA (for DC), 70 VA (for AC)
Power consumption
13-14
Supply voltage
24 VDC
24 VAC (50/60Hz)
LCD backlight off

12 VA
20 VA
Normal
20 VA
34 VA
Maximum
45 VA
70 VA
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.5 Options
Multi Batch Function (/BT2; release number 3 or later)
Number of batches
Batch single operations
Batch overview operations
Scan interval
Data type
Data recording interval
Data files
Number of display groups
Item
Function
Timers and match time timers

Batch single settings
Specifications
Individual recording start/stop and file generation operations can be performed for each batch.
Equippable models: DX2010, DX2020, DX2030, DX2040, and DX2048
2 to 6 (standard memory model) or 2 to 12 (large memory model)
Recording start/stop, computation reset, message write
Computation start/stop, report start/stop, manual sampling, setup data save/load
Maximum speed of 1 s in normal mode only (same for all batches)
Display or event data only. Trigger mode cannot be used for event data.
Same for all batches
Can be displayed or made into an event data file separately for each batch
Up to twelve per batch
The maximum number of channels per group is ten.
Channels in a display group are sampled for display or event data.
12 max.
Group, trip line, file header, data file name, text field, batch number, and lot number
4
5
PROFIBUS-DP (/CP1 option; release number 3 or later)

Item
Function
Specifications
A PROFIBUS-DP master device can access internal data in the following ways:
Load measurement channel data
Load computation channel data
Write to communication input data (for up to 32 channels)
Data mapping
Buffer
Input
Node address
Interface
Transmission medium
Transmission speed/distance
Terminator
Description
Maximum Size
Measurement channels are arranged at the start of the buffer. As 128 bytes
many computation channels as can be placed into the buffer are
inserted after the measurement channels.
Up to 32 communication input data values is arranged.
128 bytes
Output
0 to 125
PROFIBUS-DP-V0 Slave
Two dedicated cables (one for each signal line)
9.6 kbps/1200 m to 12 Mbps/100 m
No internal terminator (must be terminated externally)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-15
13.6 General Specifications

Construction
Item
Mounting
Mounting angle
Allowable panel thickness
Material
Color
Front panel
External dimensions
Weight
Specifications
Flush panel mounting (on a vertical plane) (excluding the desktop type)
Inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.
2 to 26 mm
Case:
Metal plate
Bezel and display cover: Polycarbonate
Case:
Grayish blue green (Munsell 2.0B5.0/1.7 or equivalent)
Bezel: Charcoal gray light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 or equivalent)
Water and dust proof: Complies with IEC529-IP65 and NEMA No.250 TYPE 4 (except External
Icing Test) (Style number 2 or later), except for side-by-side mounting
288(W) 288(H) 226(D) mm (D: depth from the panel mounting plane)
DX2004 and DX2010: Approx. 6 kg. DX2008 and DX2020: Approx. 6.3 kg. DX2030: Approx. 6.9
kg, DX2040 and DX2048: Approx. 7.3 kg excluding options
Normal Operating Conditions
Item
Specifications
Supply voltage
90 to 132, 180 to 250 VAC
Power supply frequency
50 Hz 2%, 60 Hz 2%
Ambient temperature
0 to 50C
Ambient humidity
20 to 80%RH (at 5 to 40C), 10 to 50% (at 40 to 50C)
2
Vibration
10 to 60 Hz, 0.2 m/s
Shock
Not allowed
Magnetic field
400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz)
Noise
Normal mode (50/60 Hz)
DC voltage
The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring range.
Thermocouple
The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force.
RTD
50 mV or less
Common mode noise
250 VACrms or less for all ranges (50/60 Hz)
Maximum noise voltage between channels
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz) or less
Mounting position
Can be inclined up to 30 degrees backward. Left and right horizontal.
Warm-up time
At least 30 minutes after power on
Installation location
Indoors
Operating altitude
2000 m or less
Power Supply
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Allowable power supply voltage range
90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC
Rated power supply frequency
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Power consumption
Supply voltage
LCD backlight off
100 VAC
28 VA
240 VAC
38 VA
Allowable interruption time
Less than 1 cycle of the power supply frequency
Isolation
Item
Withstand voltage
Ground
13-16
Normal
42 VA
54 VA
Maximum
74 VA
100 VA
Specifications
Between the Ethernet, RS-422/485, and insulation terminals and earth: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC
Between the power terminal and earth:
2300 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between the contact output terminal and earth:
1600 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between the measurement input terminal and earth: 1500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Mutually between measurement input terminals: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute (excluding the
RTD input terminal of DX2010, DX2020, DX2030,
DX2040, and DX2048)
Between the remote input terminal and earth:
1000 VDC for one minute
Between the pulse input terminal and earth:
1000 VDC for one minute
Grounding resistance: 100 or less
IM 04L42B01-01E
Transport and Storage Conditions

Item
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Vibration
Shock
Specifications
25 to 60C
5 to 95%RH (no condensation)
2
10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s maximum
2
392 m/s maximum (in packaged condition)
Supported Standards
Item
CSA
UL
CE
EMC directive
Low voltage directive

C-Tick
Specifications
*1
*2
*3
CSA22.2 No.61010.1, installation category II , and pollution degree 2 , measurement category II
UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C)
EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2

EN61000-3-2 compliance
EN61000-3-3 compliance
EN55011 Class A Group 1
*1
*2
*3
EN61010-1, installation category II , and pollution degree 2 , measurement category II
EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
3
4
*1 Installation category (overvoltage category) II: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Iimplies the regulation for
impulse withstand voltage. II applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. 2
applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 Measurement category II: Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power
from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-17
Standard Performance
Item
Specifications
Standard operating conditions:
Temperature:
23 2C
Humidity:
55% 10%RH
Power supply voltage:
90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC
Power supply frequency:
50/60 Hz 1%
Warm-up time:
At least 30 minutes.
Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation.
Input Type
DC voltage
Range
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2V
1-5 V
6V
20 V
50 V
R
S
Thermocouple
Not including
the accuracy
of reference
junction
compensation
With burnout
detection
function OFF
B
K
E
J
T
N
W
L
U
WRe
RTD
DI
13-18
Pt100
JPt100
Voltage
Contact
Measurement Accuracy (Digital Display)

A/D integration time: 16.7 ms or more
A/D integration time: 1.67 ms
(0.05% of rdg + 12 digits)
(0.15% of rdg + 1C)

R, S
0 to 100C: 3.7C,
100 to 300C: 1.5C
B
400 to 600C: 2C,
Accuracy not guaranteed for
values less than 400C
(0.15% of rdg + 0.7C)
200 to 100C: (0.15% of rdg + 1C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.5C)
200 to 100C: (0.15% of rdg + 0.7C)
(0.2% of rdg + 4C)

R, S
0 to 100C: 10C,
100 to 300C: 5C
B
400 to 600C: 7C,
Accuracy not guaranteed for
values less than 400C
(0.2% of rdg + 3.5C)
200 to 100C: (0.15% of rdg + 6C)
(0.2% of rdg + 2.5C)
200 to 100C: (0.2% of rdg + 5C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.7C)

200 to 0C: (0.35% of rdg + 0.7C)
Accuracy not guaranteed for values less
than 200C.
(0.15% of rdg + 1C)
(0.15% of rdg + 0.5C)
200 to 100C: (0.15% of rdg + 0.7C)
(0.2% of rdg + 2.5C)
0 to 200C: 4.0C
(0.3% of rdg + 3.5C)

200 to 0C: (0.35% of rdg + 0.7C)
Accuracy not guaranteed for values less
than 200C.
(0.3% of rdg + 7C)
(0.2% of rdg + 2.5C)
200 to 100C: (0.2% of rdg + 5C)
(0.3% of rdg + 10C)
0 to 200C: 18.0C
(0.15% of rdg + 0.3C)
(0.3% of rdg + 1.5C)
Max. Resolution of
Digital Display
1 V
10 V
10 V
100 V
1 mV
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
0.1C
Threshold level (Vth=2.4 V) accuracy 0.1 V

1 k or less: 1 (ON), 100 k or more: 0 (OFF) (parallel capacitance of 0.01 F or less)
IM 04L42B01-01E

Item
Specifications
Measuring accuracy in case of scaling
Accuracy during scaling (digits) = measurement accuracy (digits) multiplier + 2 digits (rounded up)
* Fractions rounded up
where the multiplier = scaling span (digits)/measuring span (digits).
Example For 1-5 V range (A/D integration time is 16.7 ms or more), measurement span of 1.000 to
5.000 V, and scaling span of 0.000 to 2.000
The measuring accuracy for 5 V input is as follows.
Measuring accuracy (1-5 Vrange) =(0.05% 5 V + 3 digits) = (0.0025 V [3 digits] + 3
digits) = 6 digits
Multiplier = {2000 digits (0.000 to 2.000)}/4000 digits (1.000 to 5.000) = 0.5
Thus, accuracy during scaling = (6 0.5 + 2) digits = 5 digits (rounded up)
Reference junction compensation accuracy
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 C and when input terminal temperature is balanced
Type R, S, W, WRe:
1.0C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, and U: 0.5C. Type B: Internal reference compensation is fixed to 0C
Maximum input voltage 60 VDC (continuous)
Input resistance
200 mV range or less and TC: 10 M or more
2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 M
Volt, TC
2 k or less
RTD input
10 or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal).
Bias current
10 nA or less (except when burnout detection function is enabled)
Maximum common mode noise voltage
250 VACrms (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Maximum noise voltage between channels
250 VACrms (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Interference across channels
120 dB (when the input source resistance is 500 and the input to other channels is 60 VDC)
Common mode rejection ratio
When the A/D integration time is 20 ms
120 dB (50 Hz 0.1%, 500 unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
When the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms
120 dB (60 Hz 0.1%, 500 unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
80 dB or higher (50/60 Hz 0.1%, 500 unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
Normal mode rejection ratio
When the A/D integration time is 20 ms
40 dB or more (50/60 Hz 0.1%)
40 dB or more (60 Hz 0.1%)
Not reject 50/60 Hz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-19
Effects of Operating Conditions
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms or greater, with temperature variation of 10C)
DC voltage, TC range (0.1% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less
* Excluding the error of reference junction compensation
RTD range
(0.1% of rdg + 2 digits) or less
Power supply fluctuation With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC (50/60 Hz):
Accuracy specifications are satisfied.
With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency (power supply voltage 100 VAC):
Accuracy specifications are satisfied.
Magnetic field
AC (50/60 Hz) and DC 400 A/m fields:(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits) or less
DC voltage range
With variation of +1 k:
200 mV range or less: 10 V or less
2 V range or higher: 0.15% of rdg or less
TC range
With variation of +1 k: 10 V or less
RTD range (Pt100)
With variation of 10 per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal): (0.1% of rdg + 1 digits)
or less
With maximum difference of 40 m between wires: Approx. 0.1 C
Effects of vibration
Effects from a sinusoidal vibration along all three axis at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an
2
acceleration of 0.2 m/s : (0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less
Miscellaneous
Item
Memory backup
13-20
Specifications
A built-in lithium battery backs up the settings and runs the clock
Battery life: Approximately 10 years (at room temperature)
IM 04L42B01-01E
13.7 External Dimensions
See the DX2000 Operation Guide (IM04L42B01-02E).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Specifications
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
13-21
Appendix
Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data

This section explains how to calculate the file size of display data files and event data
files. The calculation examples are given for the display data only and event data only
cases. If you are recording both display and event data, calculate the data size of each
and add them together.
Use the calculated file size as a rough guide.
File Size
Size of Information Other Than the Sampled Data
Item
Size [Bytes]
File header
216
Channel information 88N + 32
Group information
9636 + 32 = 3,488
Message information 104*50 + 32 (an add message area is reserved by default)
Batch information
832
Sampled data header 80 + 32 + N8 + 16 + 2
Alarm information
24 + 8 (add the size of this item even if there is no alarm)
header
Message information Up to 1041050 (varies depending on the number of messages)
Alarm information
Up to 325000 (varies depending on the number of alarms)
Release number 3
10 to 30 K
expansion information
N is the number of channels (measurement channels + external input channels + computation
channels).
Example 1: If display data of 12 measurement channels and 24 computation

channels is recorded. There are no messages or alarms.
Sampled Data Size

Data Size of Display Data and Event Data
5
6
7
8
10
11
Event Data
2 bytes/channel
2 bytes/channel
4 bytes/channel
12
Time data common to all channels is added for each sample.

Time data
216 + (88280 + 32) + 3,488 + (10450 + 32) + 832 + (80 + 32 + 2808 + 16 + 2) + (24
+ 8) + 24,096
= 60,938 bytes
Display Data
4 bytes/channel
4 bytes/channel
8 bytes/channel
A file consists of the following data.

Information other than the sampled data + the sampled data
Channel
Measurement channel
External input channel
Computation channel
8 bytes/sample
Appendix
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
App-1
Data Size per Sample

Display Data
(Number of measurement channels4 bytes) + (Number of external input channels4
bytes) + (number of computation channels8 bytes) + 8 bytes (time data)
Event Data
(Number of measurement channels2 bytes) + (Number of external input channels2
bytes) + (number of computation channels4 bytes) + 8 bytes (time data)
Sampled Data Size per File

Display Data
Data size per sample file save interval/sampling interval
The sampling interval is determined by dividing the trend interval (in seconds) by 30 (40
if the trend interval is 5 or 10 s).
Example 2: If the display data of 30 measurement channels, 240 external input
channels, and 10 computation channels is recorded with a trend interval of 30 min/div
(the sampling interval of display data is 60 s) and a file save interval of 1 day (24 h)
(304 bytes + 2404 bytes + 108 bytes + 8 bytes)24 h6060/60 s
= 1,168 bytes24 h6060/60 s
= 1,681,920 bytes
Event Data
Data size per sampledata length/sample rate
Example 3: If the display data of 30 measurement channels, 240 external input
channels, and 10 computation channels is recorded with a sample rate of 1 s and data
length of 2 h
(302 bytes + 2402 bytes + 104 bytes + 8 bytes)2 h6060/1 s
= 588 bytes2 h6060/1 s
= 4,233,600 bytes
Size per File

The size per file is the sum of the size of information other than the sampled data and the
size of the sampled data.
Display Data
Example 4: If recording under the conditions of examples 1 and 2
From examples 1 and 2, we obtain 60,938 + 1,681,920 = 1,742,858 bytes = 1.662 M
bytes
Event Data
Example 5: If recording under the conditions of examples 1 and 3
From examples 1 and 3, we obtain 60,938 + 4,233,600 = 4,294,538 bytes = 4.096 M
bytes
App-2
IM 04L42B01-01E
Save Duration to the CF Card

We will estimate the duration over which measured data can be saved to a CF card when
measured data is being saved automatically.
Display Data
Save duration to the CF card (estimate) = (Size of the CF card/size of a file)[file save
interval]
Example 6: We will estimate the save duration to the CF card under the conditions
of examples 1 and 2. In this example, the size of the CF card is assumed to be 256 M
bytes.
256 M bytes/1.662 M bytes24 h
= 3,696 h
= 154 days
2
3
4
Event Data
Save duration to the CF card (estimate) = (Size of the CF card/size of a file)[data
length]
Example 7: We will estimate the time until the CF card needs to be replaced
under the conditions of examples 1 and 3. In this example, the size of the CF card is
assumed to be 256 M bytes.
256 M bytes/4.096 M bytes2 h
= 125 h
= 5.2 days
5
6
7
Note
If you format a 256-MB CF card, you will be able to use approximately 246 MB.
Time until the Internal Memory Becomes Full

If you are manually saving the measured data in the internal memory, old data is
overwritten when the internal memory is full. You must save the measured data to the CF
card before the data is overwritten.
Display Data
Time until the internal memory becomes full (estimate) = (Size of the internal memory/
size of a file)[file save interval]
Example 8: We will estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full under
the conditions of examples 1 and 2. In this example, the internal memory is assumed
to be of a standard type (80 M bytes).
80 MB/1.662 M bytes24 h
= 1,155 h
= 48 days
10
11
12
Event Data
80 MB/4.096 MB2 h
= 39 h
= 1.63 days
IM 04L42B01-01E
Appendix
Time until the internal memory becomes full (estimate) = (Size of the internal memory/
size of a file)[data length]
Example 9: We will estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full under
the conditions of examples 1 and 3. In this example, the internal memory is assumed
to be of a standard type (80 M bytes).
13
App
Index
App-3
Appendix 2 Types of Data That the DX Can Create

and Their Application
This section explains the types of data that the DX can create and their application.
Data Type
In the DX
Extension
Format
Display data
Yes
DAD
Event data
Yes
DAE
Report data
Yes
DAR
Manual sampled data Yes
DAM
Setup data
Yes
PDL
Snapshot data
None
PNG
Binary
(undisclosed)
Binary
(undisclosed)
Text (see
appendix 3)
Text (see
appendix 3)
Binary
(undisclosed)
PNG (general
format)
Text
*1
Display Method
DX
DAQ Application
*2, *3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*2, *3
*4
Custom display setup Yes

CDC
Yes
Yes
data
*1 DX: DX main unit, DAQ: DAQSTANDARD, Application: Software application
*2 The data format can be converted on DAQSTANDARD and displayed on a software
application such as Microsoft Excel.

*3 The data can be retrieved from the DX using the communication function and displayed on a
software application.
*4 Can be displayed with the separately sold DAQStudio.
App-4
IM 04L42B01-01E
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
This section explains the format of text files. The text files that the DX can create are
manual sampled data files and report files.
In the explanation below, CRLF represents a terminator.
2
3
Format of the Manual Sample Data File

The manual sampled data is output using numerical values and strings in text format
delimited by tabs.
Values of measurement channels set to Skip and computation and external input
channels set to Off are not output.
The data is appended to the file each time manual sample operation is performed.
Format
YRECCRLF
Manual Sample Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Ch
Ch Id
Tag
Unit
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss
Version 1.02.00
DX2000
CRLF
shift-JIS CRLF
ffffffff CRLF
IIII CRLF
HHHH CRLF
ccccc
ccccc
dddd dddd
tttt tttt
uuuuuu
uuuuuu
nnnn nnnn
CRLF
ccccc
dddd
tttt
uuuuuu
nnnn
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
* Ch Id is only output when Tag numbers are being used, on DXs with release number 3 or
later.
ffffffff
File status (8 characters)

Complete Completed. (A file with 100 manually sampled
data acquisitions that is now complete.)
Progress Data is being added. (An incomplete file that
10
11
12
Appendix
does not yet have 100 manually sampled data

acquisitions.)
Decrease The file is defective. (A file that is missing some
of the manually sampled data that was stored
on it.)
IIII
Serial number of the DX (16 characters)
HHHH
File header (50 characters)
ccccc
Channel number (5 characters)
dddd
Tag number (16 characters)
tttt
Tag comment (32 characters)
uuuuuu
Unit (6 characters)
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss Sampling year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
nnnn
Measured value (13 characters)
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
App-5
File Output Example

Below is a manual sample data example of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
YREC
Manual Sample Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Ch
Ch Id
Tag
Unit
2005/10/01 08:57:22
2005/10/01 08:57:28
Version 1.02.00
DX2000
shift-JIS
Progress
S5E701600
CH001
TI-101
TI-101
C
213.8
208.6
CH002
OUT-102
OUT-102
V
0.517
0.494
CH003
FI-103
FI-103
m3/h
368.4
363.0
CH004
VA-204
VA-204
%
68.9
68.1
Note
Output when error data, overrange data, or computation overflow data is detected
Channel
Measurement channels,
external input channel
Computation channel
Data
Error
+over range (includes burnout detection)
over range (includes burnout detection)
Error
Positive computation overflow
(when the value exceeds 3.4E + 38)
Negative computation overflow
(when the value falls below 3.4E + 38)
Output
(Space)
99999
99999
999999999
999999999
999999999
A new manual sampled data file is created in the following cases.

A measurement channel is changed to Skip from a range other than Skip.
A measurement channel is changed from Skip to a range other than Skip.
A computation or external input channel is changed from On to Off or Off to On.
The unit is changed.
App-6
IM 04L42B01-01E
Report File Format

The hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports are output using numeric values and
strings in text format delimited by tabs.
Values of measurement channels set to Skip and computation and external input
channels set to Off are not output.
The data is appended to this file every time a report is created.
YRECCRLF
Report Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Report Set
File Data
Math Set
Start Time
Ch
Ch Id
Tag
Unit
Data Type
Time
Status
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Format
Version 1.02.00
CRLF
DX2000
CRLF
shift-JIS CRLF
ffffffff CRLF
IIII
CRLF
HHHH
CRLF
RRRR
CRLF
rrrr
CRLF
MMM
MMM
MMMM
MMM
YYYY/MO/DD HH:MI:SS
ccccc
ccccc

ccccc
dddd dddd
dddd
tttt tttt
tttt
uuuuuu
uuuuuu

uuuuuu
ssss CRLF
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss CRLF
eeeeeeeeee CRLF
nnnn nnnn
nnnn
nnnn nnnn
nnnn
nnnn nnnn
nnnn
nnnn nnnn
nnnn
4
5
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
6
7
8
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
CRLF
* Ch Id is only output when Tag numbers are being used, on DXs with release number 3 or
later.
ffffffff

File status (8 characters)

Complete
Completed. (A file with the necessary number of
acquisitions for its report type, for example one
acquisition for an Hourly report type, that is now
complete.)
Progress
Data is being added. (An incomplete file that does
not yet have the necessary number of acquisitions
for its report type.)
Decrease
The file is defective. (A file that is missing some of
the report data that was stored on it.)
Serial number of the DX (16 characters)
File header (50 characters)
Report setting (setting on the DX) (13 characters)
Hourly
Daily
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly
9
10
11
12
Appendix
IIII
HHHH
RRRR
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
App-7

rrrr
Contents of the report file (13 characters)

Hourly
Daily
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly

Example:

MMMM

YYYY/MO/DD HH:MI:SS
ccccc
dddd
tttt
uuuuuu
eeeeeeeeee

SSSS
When the DX is set to Hourly+Daily and

Combine, Hourly+Daily is output.
When the DX is set to Hourly+Daily and
Separate, the hourly report is output as Hourly,
and the daily report as Daily.
Report items (16 characters (including tabs that are counted
as one character each), up to four types)
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Inst
Instantaneous value
Report start year, month, day, and time (19 characters)

Channel number (5 characters)
Tag number (16 characters)
Tag comment (32 characters)
Unit (6 characters)
Status (output the events that occurred while creating report
data) (10 characters)
Bo
Burn out detected
Er
Error (error detection)
Ov
Over (overrange/computation overflow detection)
Pw
Power failure (power failure occurrence)
Cg
Change (time change present)
Report type (7 characters)
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly

yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss Report year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
nnnn
Average, maximum, minimum, sum, or instantaneous value
(13 characters)
App-8
IM 04L42B01-01E
File Output Example

Below is an example of an hourly report of 4 channels while creating hourly and daily
reports and saving each type of report to a separate file.
YREC
Report Data
Model
Language Code
File Status
Serial No.
File Header
Report Set
File Data
Math Set
Start Time
Ch
Ch Id
Tag
Unit
Data Type
Time
Status
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Version 1.02.00
DX2000
shift-JIS
Complete
S5E701600
Hourly+Daily
Hourly
Ave
Max
2005/10/01 08:10:56
CH001
CH002
TI-101
OUT-102
TI-101
OUT-102
C
V
Hourly
2005/10/01 09:00:00
91.5
259.8
-59.9
3.293636E+05
-0.039
0.726
-0.727
-1.392980E+02
Min
Sum
CH003
FI-103
FI-103
m3/h
CH004
VA-204
VA-204
%
4
5
6
241.1
416.5
83.4
8.680871E+05
48.6
76.6
23.3
1.748983E+05
7
8
9
10
11
12
Appendix
13
App
Index
IM 04L42B01-01E
App-9
Note
When the channel data is in the condition shown in the table below, the Er, Ov, or Bo status
is output to a report.
Data Condition
Error
Measurement and external input channels
Positive over range
Negative over range
Burn out detection
Computation channels
Positive computation overflow (when the value exceeds 3.4E + 38)
Negative computation overflow (when the value falls below 3.4E + 38)
Status
Er
Ov
Ov
Bo
Ov
Ov
The report output value of Ave, Max, Min, Sum, and Inst varies depending on the channel
data condition as shown in the table below.
Item
Ave
Max,
Min,
Inst
Sum
Data Condition of Measurement/

External Input Channels
When all of the data are errors or over range
When all of the data are errors
For +over range (includes burnout detection)
For over range (includes burnout detection)
When all of the data are errors or over range
When the sum value exceeds approx. 3.4E + 38
When the sum value is below approx. 3.4E + 38
Report
Output Value
(Space)
(Space)
99999
99999
(Space)
9.999999E+99
9.999999E+99
Item
Data Condition of Computation Channels
Ave
Max,
Min,
When all of the data are errors or computation overflow

When all of the data are errors
When the maximum value or instantaneous value
exceeds 99999999
When the minimum value or instantaneous value is less
than 9999999
When all of the data are errors or computation overflow
When the sum value exceeds approx. 3.4E + 38
When the sum value is below approx. 3.4E + 38
Report
Output Value
(Space)
(Space)
999999999
Inst
Sum
999999999
(Space)
9.999999E+99
9.999999E+99
* The decimal place that was specified when the span for the channel was specified
applies to the maximum and minimum values or the instantaneous values. For example,
if the span setting of the channel is 200.0, then 999999999 is output when the value
exceeds 9999999.9 and 999999999 is output when the value is below 999999.9.
App-10
IM 04L42B01-01E
Index
Symbol
burnout detection.................................................................. 1-2
**........................................................................................... 9-6
+Over.................................................................................. 1-15
-Over................................................................................... 1-15
[a?b:c]................................................................................. 9-10
1/4 circle............................................................................. 5-27
24 VDC transmitter power supply..................................... 13-13
24 V power supply............................................................ 13-14
3 leg isolated RTD input................................................... 13-12
A
A/D integration time.............................................................. 3-1
ABS...................................................................................... 9-6
absolute time...................................................................... 4-21
absolute time mode............................................................ 1-39
action.................................................................................. 1-41
added messages................................................................ 1-18
administrator............................................................... 1-45, 8-5
alarm.......................................................................... 1-4, 13-2
alarm ACK.................................................................. 1-8, 3-15
alarm acknowledge.............................................................. 1-8
alarm acknowledge operation............................................ 3-15
alarm annunciator....................................................... 1-8, 3-21
alarm color............................................................................ 1-5
alarm delay time......................................................... 3-14, 9-3
alarm display reset............................................................. 3-23
alarm hide function..................................................... 1-6, 3-10
alarm indication.................................................................... 1-5
alarm level............................................................................ 1-5
alarm mark indication......................................................... 5-17
alarm output relay............................................. 1-7, 3-8, 13-10
alarm settings..................................................................... 3-11
alarm summary......................................................... 1-21, 4-29
alarm value......................................................................... 3-13
all channel.......................................................................... 4-19
all channel display................................................................ 4-6
all data display.................................................................... 4-14
AND...................................................................................... 9-7
AND/OR................................................................................ 1-7
annunciator sequence........................................................ 3-25
auto increment...................................................................... 6-7
auto logout.......................................................... 1-45, 8-4, 8-6
automatic message writing................................................. 1-12
auto save.................................................................... 1-33, 6-5
auto scroll............................................................................. 4-6
auto span............................................................................ 4-22
auto zone.......................................................... 1-13, 4-6, 4-19
IM 04L42B01-01E
D
data display section.............................................................. 1-9
data file loading.................................................................. 13-7
data kind............................................................................... 6-2
data length............................................................................ 6-3
data save mode........................................................ 2-22, 4-33
data that can be used in equations.................................... 1-48
data that the DX can create..............................................App-4
data type............................................................................. 13-6
date/time............................................................................... 2-1
date format................................................................. 1-55, 2-4
de-energize.......................................................................... 1-8
decimal point type.............................................................. 2-23
delay high limit alarm............................................................ 1-4
delay low limit alarm............................................................. 1-4
deleting a file...................................................................... 6-17
desktop type..................................................................... 13-11
detect (alarm hide function)................................................ 3-14
DHCP log............................................................................ 4-39
differece computation........................................................... 1-3
Index-1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
background color...................................................... 1-27, 5-32

background color (historical trend)..................................... 4-23
backlight saver........................................................... 1-27, 2-8
barcode reader................................................................... 2-19
bar graph display........................................................ 1-16, 4-4
base position (bar graphs).................................................. 5-21
basic setting mode............................................................. 2-24
batch comment........................................................... 1-38, 6-7
batch function..................................................... 6-6, 6-7, 13-9
batch name........................................................................... 6-7
batch number..................................................................... 1-38
brightness................................................................... 1-27, 2-8
burnout....................................................................... 1-15, 3-2
calculate the file size........................................................App-1

calendar.............................................................................. 4-18
calibration................................................................. 12-2, 12-3
calibration correction...................................... 1-3, 3-16, 13-14
CARRY............................................................................... 9-10
change message.................................................................. 5-6
channel (computation)........................................................ 1-46
channel display colors........................................................ 5-11
channel number.................................................................... 5-3
circular display.......................................................... 1-19, 5-24
clamped input terminal..................................................... 13-10
clears the entire waveform (circular).................................. 5-26
CLOG computation............................................................... 9-9
color scale band................................................................. 5-17
comma................................................................................ 2-23
comment text block............................................................ 5-43
comment text field.............................................................. 5-43
communication errors....................................................... 11-12
communication functions.................................................... 13-9
communication log............................................................. 4-37
computation channel............................................................ 9-1
computation data dropout......................................... 1-49, 9-14
computation error................................................................. 9-4
computation function.............................................. 1-46, 13-11
computation types.............................................................. 1-46
conditional expression........................................................ 9-10
configuration (storage)....................................................... 13-6
construction (DX).............................................................. 13-16
continuing data................................................................... 4-13
count (moving average)........................................................ 3-6
Cu10, Cu25 RTD input..................................................... 13-11
current value display.......................................................... 5-15
cursor (circular)................................................................... 5-29
cursor (historical trend)....................................................... 4-13
cursor time.......................................................................... 4-21
custom display setup data........................................ 1-28, 13-7
customizing the display selection menusmenu.................. 5-38
customizing the FUNK key menus..................................... 5-38
customizing the menus............................................... 1-27, 4-3
Index
Index
difference lower limit alarm................................................... 1-4
difference upper limit alarm.................................................. 1-4
digit (scale value)............................................................... 5-15
digital display.............................................................. 1-15, 4-4
directory (data save)........................................................... 1-33
display (LCD)...................................................................... 13-3
display color (channels)...................................................... 5-11
display color (messages).................................................... 5-10
display data............................................. 1-281-57, 1-30, 13-6
display direction (bar graphs)............................................. 5-21
display direction (messages).............................................. 5-20
display direction (trend)...................................................... 5-20
displayed information......................................................... 13-3
displayed language............................................................ 1-56
display group........................................................................ 5-1
display menu.............................................................. 4-1, 5-40
display positions................................................................. 3-24
display selection menu............................................... 4-1, 5-40
display the text................................................................... 5-42
display window................................................................... 3-24
display zone....................................................................... 5-12
divided (report file).............................................................. 9-16
division (scale).................................................................... 5-14
DNS server........................................................................... 2-6
domain name........................................................................ 2-6
DST (daylight saving time)......................................... 1-55, 2-1
E
e-mail log............................................................................ 4-38
easy text entry........................................................ 1-56, 13-13
effects of operating conditions.......................................... 13-20
energize................................................................................ 1-8
EQ........................................................................................ 9-6
error codes......................................................................... 11-1
error data............................................................................ 1-52
error log.............................................................................. 4-37
error messages.................................................................. 11-1
errors related to parameter settings................................... 11-1
event................................................................................... 1-39
event action...................................................... 1-39, 7-1, 13-8
event data....................................................... 1-28, 1-30, 13-6
event data (circular)............................................................ 5-31
event level switch status..................................................... 1-25
event level switch status display........................................ 4-28
EXP...................................................................................... 9-6
expanding........................................................................... 4-41
expressions (computation)................................................... 9-5
extended input type.......................................................... 13-12
external dimensions......................................................... 13-21
external input channels............................................ 1-57, 10-1
external input function...................................................... 13-14
external storage medium.................................................... 1-33
F
FAIL/alarm output relay 22 outputs.................................. 13-10
FAIL/status output relay.................................................... 13-10
FAIL output............................................................... 1-53, 2-10
fast sampling mode.............................................................. 1-1
favorite key............................................................... 1-27, 5-35
file header............................................................................. 6-5
file name............................................................................. 1-35
file size.............................................................................App-1
fine grid....................................................................... 4-6, 4-20
firmware version................................................................... 2-5
first weekday...................................................................... 4-18
fixed (alarm mark)............................................................... 5-17
flag...................................................................................... 1-48
Index-2
flow of data recording and storage..................................... 1-29

format of text files.............................................................App-5
formatting........................................................................... 6-17
format type......................................................................... 6-17
four arithmetic operation....................................................... 9-6
four panel display..................................................... 1-26, 4-40
free (event data)......................................................... 1-31, 6-3
free messages.......................................................... 1-12, 5-10
free space........................................................................... 6-17
FTP log............................................................................... 4-37
full circle action................................................................... 5-26
FUNC key menu......................................................... 4-2, 5-39
G
GE........................................................................................ 9-6
gradually correcting the internal clock................................ 1-55
graph display........................................................................ 1-9
grid..................................................................................... 5-20
groups.................................................................................. 5-1
group set.............................................................................. 5-1
GT......................................................................................... 9-6
H
historical trend display.............................................. 1-17, 4-10
HOLD................................................................................. 9-10
hold (alarm indication).......................................................... 1-5
hold (alarm output relay)...................................................... 1-8
host name............................................................................. 2-6
hysteresis..................................................................... 1-4, 3-9
I
identified strings................................................................... 6-5
ID number........................................................................... 2-12
indicator................................................................................ 3-7
information on the displayed measured data..................... 4-23
initialize................................................................................. 2-9
input processing................................................................... 1-2
input range........................................................................... 3-3
input type...................................................................... 1-1, 3-4
integration time..................................................................... 1-1
internal memory.................................................................. 1-29
internal switch..................................................... 1-8, 1-39, 3-8
interval (rate-of-change alarm)..................................... 1-4, 3-7
invalid keys......................................................................... 2-18
IP address............................................................................ 2-6
ISA-A.................................................................................. 3-27
ISA-A-4............................................................................... 3-25
ISA-M.................................................................................. 3-29
isolation............................................................................ 13-16
J
jump default display............................................................ 5-34
K
keyboard............................................................................. 2-17
key lock...................................................................... 1-44, 8-1
L
LE......................................................................................... 9-6
limitations (expressions)....................................................... 9-5
linear scaling........................................................................ 1-3
line width of the trend......................................................... 5-20
list of files............................................................................ 6-16
LN......................................................................................... 9-6
loading a file....................................................................... 6-18
IM 04L42B01-01E
Index
loading setup data.............................................................. 6-20
LOG...................................................................................... 9-6
log....................................................................................... 4-36
log display.......................................................................... 1-25
logging in.............................................................................. 8-6
logging out............................................................................ 8-6
logical computation............................................................... 9-7
login function.............................................................. 1-45, 8-4
login log.............................................................................. 4-36
log into the DX...................................................................... 8-6
lot-No. digit........................................................................... 6-7
lot number.......................................................................... 1-38
low-cut.......................................................................... 1-3, 3-5
LT.......................................................................................... 9-6
M
MAC address........................................................................ 2-5
maintenance....................................................................... 12-1
manuals.....................................................................................i
manual sample................................................................... 6-13
manual sampled data..................................... 1-28, 1-32, 13-6
manual sampled data (format).........................................App-5
manual save....................................................................... 1-34
match time timer......................................................... 1-39, 7-4
math start action................................................................. 9-13
measurement channel.......................................................... 1-1
measurement input............................................................. 13-1
measure soft key................................................................ 3-16
media FIFO................................................................ 1-33, 6-5
memory backup................................................................ 13-20
memory sample.................................................................... 6-2
memory start....................................................................... 6-10
memory stop....................................................................... 6-11
memory summary..................................................... 1-23, 4-32
message colors.................................................................. 5-10
message display......................................................... 4-6, 4-21
message display method.................................................... 1-13
message display methods.................................................. 4-31
messages................................................................... 1-12, 5-8
messages (errors, status, etc)............................................ 11-1
message summary................................................... 1-22, 4-31
modbus client status display.............................................. 1-25
modbus master status display............................................ 1-25
modbus status display........................................................ 4-27
modbus status log.............................................................. 4-39
mode (input range)............................................................... 3-3
moving average............................................................ 1-2, 3-6
multi batch function.......................................................... 13-15
N
name of a four panel display.............................................. 4-41
NE........................................................................................ 9-6
network information.............................................................. 2-5
next soft key......................................................................... 4-2
no logging........................................................................... 3-10
non-hold (alarm indication)................................................... 1-5
non-hold (alarm output relay)............................................... 1-8
normal operating conditions............................................. 13-16
NOT...................................................................................... 9-7
number of pulses per minute.............................................. 3-18
numeric display.......................................................... 1-15, 4-6
offset time........................................................................... 5-26

operating event switches...................................................... 7-5
operation errors.................................................................. 11-5
IM 04L42B01-01E
1
2
P
partial expanded display........................................... 1-14, 5-18
parts replacement............................................................... 12-1
password (key lock).............................................................. 8-1
password (login function)..................................................... 8-5
password change................................................................. 8-7
point.................................................................................... 2-23
power-fail message............................................................ 5-37
power computations............................................................. 9-6
power failure operation....................................................... 1-52
power supply.................................................................... 13-16
power supply for transmitter............................................... 1-56
PRE.................................................................................... 9-10
preset display..................................................................... 5-34
pretrigger............................................................................ 1-31
processing order of computation........................................ 1-48
PROFIBUS-DP................................................................. 13-15
progress of the save operation........................................... 4-34
pulse input................................................................ 1-3, 13-14
pulse sum value................................................................. 3-17
Q
quarter cycle display........................................................... 5-27
R
range (input range)............................................................... 3-4
rate-of-change alarm............................................................ 1-4
recommended replacement periods for worn parts............ 12-1
recording conditions (display data)..................................... 1-30
recording conditions (event data)....................................... 1-31
ref. CH.................................................................................. 3-5
reference channel................................................................. 3-5
reference junction compensation................................. 1-2, 3-2
reflash........................................................................... 1-7, 3-7
relational computation.......................................................... 9-6
relative time........................................................................ 4-21
relative time mode.............................................................. 1-40
relay status display................................................... 1-25, 4-27
release number....................................................................... iii
releasing the key lock........................................................... 8-2
remote contact input operation........................................... 7-10
remote control...................................................................... 7-1
remote control (/R1)......................................................... 13-12
remote control function............................................... 1-39, 7-1
remote controller ID.................................................... 2-5, 2-11
remote control terminal....................................................... 2-12
repeat (event data)............................................................. 1-31
report.................................................................................. 9-15
report channel.................................................................... 9-17
report data............................................ 1-24, 1-28, 1-32, 13-7
report display...................................................................... 4-26
report file (format).............................................................App-7
report function.................................................................... 1-51
report groups...................................................................... 9-17
RESET................................................................................ 9-10
reset (TLOG)...................................................................... 1-50
resets the computed result (Rst+St)................................... 9-13
reset the sum value............................................................ 3-18
resetting the computed results........................................... 9-14
Index-3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
App
Index
operation logs..................................................................... 4-36

operations that can be carried out when logged out.......... 1-45
OR........................................................................................ 9-7
order of precedence (computation)...................................... 9-5
overflow data.............................................................. 1-52, 9-4
overview display....................................................... 1-20, 4-24
Index
Index
resetting the match time timer.............................................. 7-5
resetting the relative timer.................................................... 7-5
revisions...................................................................................ii
rolling average............................................................ 1-49, 9-4
RS-232 interface.............................................................. 13-10
RS-422A/485 interface..................................................... 13-10
S
sample rate........................................................................... 6-3
save directory....................................................................... 6-5
save duration to the CF card............................................App-3
save interval......................................................................... 6-2
save interval (circular)........................................................ 5-26
saving data to the external storage medium............ 1-33, 13-7
saving measured data (automatically)................................ 6-10
saving measured data (manually)...................................... 6-11
saving setup data............................................................... 6-19
saving the data................................................................... 4-33
scale................................................................. 4-6, 4-19, 5-13
scale lower........................................................................... 3-4
scale marks (circular)......................................................... 5-31
scale upper........................................................................... 3-4
scan interval................................................................. 1-1, 3-1
screen image data.................................................... 1-28, 6-15
scroll time........................................................................... 5-33
search for measured data.................................................. 4-16
second interval............................................................. 5-7, 6-2
security................................................................................. 8-4
security function................................................................. 13-8
selecting a bar.................................................................... 4-44
separators.......................................................................... 5-39
setup data....................................................... 1-28, 1-37, 13-7
simplified historical trend.................................................... 5-28
single (event data).............................................................. 1-31
single graph/dual graph, stacked bar graph....................... 4-43
size of the internal memory................................................ 1-30
snapshot................................................................... 6-15, 13-7
snapshot data........................................................... 1-28, 1-37
SNTP log............................................................................ 4-38
sort item.................................................................... 4-29, 4-31
span lower............................................................................ 3-4
span upper........................................................................... 3-4
Special computation........................................................... 9-10
special data........................................................................ 1-52
SQR...................................................................................... 9-6
square root computation....................................................... 1-3
stacked bar graph..................................................... 1-24, 4-42
standard display soft key.................................................... 5-34
standard performance...................................................... 13-18
standards.......................................................................... 13-17
standard temperature device.............................................. 12-2
starting the computation..................................................... 9-13
start the recording.............................................................. 6-10
status display section......................................................... 1-10
status messages.............................................................. 11-14
status output............................................................. 1-54, 2-10
status relay......................................................................... 2-10
stopping the recording........................................................ 6-11
structure of the file name...................................................... 6-5
style number............................................................................ iii
sub menu.................................................................... 4-1, 5-40
sum scale........................................................................... 1-51
symbols that can be entered.............................................. 2-17
system display.................................................................... 1-56
system errors.................................................................... 11-16
system information............................................................... 2-5
Index-4
T
tag........................................................................................ 5-3
tag comment......................................................................... 5-5
tag detail................................................. 4-7, 4-20, 4-25, 4-30
tag display............................................................................ 4-1
tag no. use/not...................................................................... 5-5
tag number........................................................................... 5-5
temperature unit................................................................. 1-57
text display........................................................................... 1-5
text field...................................................................... 1-38, 6-7
text files............................................................................App-5
time at the grid position...................................... 1-11, 2-4, 5-7
time axis............................................................................. 4-23
time correction operation.................................................... 1-55
time deviation limit................................................................ 2-3
time per revolution.............................................................. 5-26
timer............................................................................ 1-39, 7-4
timer action........................................................................... 7-4
time related functions......................................................... 13-8
time set................................................................................. 2-1
time until the internal memory becomes full.....................App-3
time zone.................................................................... 1-55, 2-2
TLOG.................................................................................... 9-3
TLOG computation..................................................... 1-49, 9-8
top channel......................................................................... 4-22
trademarks...............................................................................ii
transport and storage conditions...................................... 13-17
trend display............................................................... 1-11, 4-4
trend history........................................................................ 4-10
trend interval....................................................... 1-12, 5-6, 6-2
trend rate switching.............................................................. 5-6
trend space........................................................................... 4-9
trigger................................................................................. 6-10
trigger signal......................................................................... 6-3
trip line.................................................................................. 5-2
troubleshooting................................................................. 11-17
types of characters............................................................. 13-8
U
unit in computations........................................................... 1-48
unsaved data...................................................................... 1-34
update interval (measured values)....................................... 1-9
updating of the waveform................................................... 1-12
USB interface......................................................... 1-57, 13-13
user............................................................................ 1-45, 8-5
USER key................................................................... 1-39, 7-1
V
value indicator.................................................................... 5-15
value on over-range........................................................... 3-20
VGA output....................................................................... 13-10
VGA output terminal........................................................... 1-56
W
warning messages........................................................... 11-16
web log............................................................................... 4-37
X
XOR...................................................................................... 9-7
Z
zone display....................................................................... 1-13
IM 04L42B01-01E

Yokogawa DX2000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yokogawa DX2000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yokogawa DX2000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Users

Control of Pollution Caused IM 04L41B01-91C

Electronic Manuals Provided on the Accompanying CD-ROM

DX2000 Users Manual

Describes how to use the custom display

Describes how to use communication

Describes how to use communication

Describes how to use the accompanying

5th Edition: November 2008 (YK)

DXs Version and Functions Described in This Manual

DXs Version and Functions

DXs Version and Functions Described in This Manual

Addition and change to functions

How to Use This Manual

How to Use This Manual

Title and Contents

How to Use This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manul

Denotes 1024. Example: 768 KB (file size)

Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious

Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light

Calls attention to information that is important for proper

Denotes key or character strings that appear on the screen.

Indicates character types that can be used.

Carry out the procedure according to the step numbers.

Input Section................................................................................................................... 1-1

Setting the Date/Time..................................................................................................... 2-1

Measurement Channels and Alarms

Switching Operation Screens

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Operations in Operation Mode........................................................................................ 4-1

Setting Display Groups................................................................................................... 5-1

Saving and Loading Data

Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data................................................ 6-1

Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control

Using the Security Function

Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock Function).......................................................... 8-1

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Chapter 10 Using External Input Channels (/MC1 Option)

Setting External Input Channels.................................................................................... 10-1

Periodic Inspection........................................................................................................ 12-1

Signal Input and Alarm.................................................................................................. 13-1

File Size of Display Data and Event Data.......................................................... App-1

Number of Measurement Channels and Scan Interval

For the setting procedure, see section 3.1.

Integration Time of the A/D Converter

For the setting procedure, see section 3.1.

Input Type and Computation

You can make measurements using the following input types.

1.1 Input Section

Linear Calibration Low cut Difference Measured

Square root computation

Convert to number of pulses over 1 second

Dotted lines indicate that the function can be selected.

Reference Junction Compensation

Detects and indicates a burnout in the sensor.

Performs reference junction compensation on

Operation example when the number

For the setting procedure, see section 3.4.